SHYAM SEL AND POWER...

Envirotech East Pvt. LimitedAn ISO 9001:2008, 14001:2004 & OHSAS:18001:2007

Company Laboratory recognised by Ministry of Environment & Forests, Govt. of IndiaBengal Ambuja Commercial Complex

UN F13, 1050/1, Survey Park, Kolkata 700 075, IndiaPh: (033) 2418 8127/8128/8601, e-mail: [email protected]

web: www.envirotecheast.comJ u n e , 2 0 1 9

Environmental Impact AssessmentFor

Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA Pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour Producer Gas, 0.89 MTPA Sponge Iron, 0.6 MTPA

Hot Metal/Pig Iron, 1.51 MTPA Billets, 1.0 MTPA Long Steel Products, 0.1 MTPA DI Pipe, 1.2 MTPA Cement Grinding Unit, 136

MW Captive Power Plant & 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys At

Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Paschim Burdwan, West Bengal

SHYAM SEL AND POWER LTD.

Envirotech East Pvt. LimitedAn ISO 9001:2008, 14001:2004 & OHSAS:18001:2007 CompanyLaboratory Recognised by Ministry of Environment & Forests, Govt. of IndiaBengal Ambuja Commercial Complex,UN-F 13, 1050/1, Survey Park, Kolkata – 700 075 – 2418 8127/8128/8601; Fax – 2418 8128; email: [email protected] : www.envirotecheast.com

Date: 25th June, 2019

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN

Subject: Proposed Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansionof Integrated Steel Plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets,0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas,0.89 MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPAbillets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPAcement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captivepower plant, at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, DistrictPaschim Burdwan in West Bengal by M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd.

Ref : F. No. J-11011/887/2007-IA-II (I) dated 1st November, 2018

This is to inform you that we, M/s Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd. have undertaken theEnvironmental Impact Assessment Study for the subject job, as per the EIANotification, 2006 and in compliance with the finalized Terms of Reference,issued by Ministry of Minister of Enviroment, Forest and Climate Change, Govt.of India, vide its letter dated 1st November, 2018. The prescribed TORs have beencomplied with and that the data submitted is factually correct.

For Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd.

(Asoke Kumar Banerjee)CEO

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.envirotecheast.com

Date: 19th June, 2019

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN

Subject: Proposed Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion ofIntegrated Steel Plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets,1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cementgrinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant,at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District PaschimBurdwan in West Bengal by M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd.

Refer: F. No. J-11011/887/2007-IA-II (I) dated 1st November, 2018

This is to inform you that we, M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. have gone through the entireEnvironmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report, prepared as per the EIA Notification, 2006and in compliance with the finalized Terms of Reference, issued by Ministry of Minister ofEnviroment, Forest and Climate Change, Govt. of India, vide its letter dated 1st November,2018 for the above mentioned project. The Information / data as given in the EIA reporthas been checked at our end and is found to be factually correct in all respect.

for Shyam Sel & Power Ltd.

BRIJ BHUSHAN AGARWALMANAGING DIRECTOR

Shyam Sel &Power Ltd.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producergas, 0.89 MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA longsteel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and136 MW captive power plant at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Paschim

Burdwan, West Bengal

PAGE - 1

Declaration Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

DECLARATION

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA report for the Proposedexpansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets,0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89 MTPAsponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA longsteel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPAFerro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O.Bahadurpur, District Paschim Burdwan in West Bengal by M/s Shyam Sel &Power Ltd.

We, hereby, certify that we were part of the EIA team in the following capacitythat developed the above EIA.

EIA Co-ordinator : Metallurgical Industries (Ferrous & Non-ferrous)

Name : Mr. T. Kundu / Mr. Goutam Majumder (Associate)




PAGE - 2


DECLARATION BY EIA CO-ORDINATORS / FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTSINVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION OF EIA REPORT




PAGE - 3


DECLARATION BY EIA CO-ORDINATORS / FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTSINVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION OF EIA REPORT

M/s Shyam Sel& Power Ltd.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant forultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hourproducer gas, 0.89 MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA

Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur,District Paschim Burdwan, West Bengal

CONT. - 1

Content Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd.

X`

CONTENTCHAPTER DESCRIPTIONCHAPTER-1.0 : INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose of the Report1.2 Identification of the Project1.3 Project Proponent1.4 Brief Description of the Project1.4.1 Nature of the Project1.4.2 Size1.4.3 Land1.4.4 Location1.4.5 Description of Surroundings1.4.6 Importance to Country & Region1.5 Legal Brief Legal Framework for EIA Study1.5.1 Procedure for Environmental Clearance1.5.2 Post Environmental Clearance Monitoring1.6 Scope of Study - Details of Regulatory Scoping Carried out as per

Terms of Reference1.7 Status of Litigations1.8 Compliance of Terms of Reference (ToR)

CHAPTER-2.0 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION2.1 Type of Project2.2 Need of the Project2.3 Location of Project Site2.4 Plant Layout2.5 Project Period2.6 Raw Materials2.7 Technology and Process Description2.7.1 Mini Blast Furnace2.7.2 Sinter Plant2.7.3 DRI Plant2.7.4 Pellet Plant (1.8 MTPA)2.7.5 Induction Furnace2.7.6 Electric Arc Furnace2.7.7 Rolling Mill2.7.8 Coke Oven Plant2.7.9 Ductile Iron Pipe Plant (0.1 MTPA)2.7.10 Producer Gas Plant2.7.11 Cement Grinding Unit2.7.12 Power Plant




CONT. - 2


CHAPTER DESCRIPTION2.8 Utilities2.8.1 Storage Facilities2.8.2 Compressed Air System2.8.3 Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems2.8.4 Communication System2.8.5 Auxiliary Facilities2.8.6 Power2.9 Water Supply Facilities2.10 Fire Fighting Facilities2.11 Manpower Planning2.12 Solid Waste Management2.13 Pollution Control Measures2.14 Control of Fugitive Emissions at various Auxiliary Facilities

Inside the Plant2.15 Wastewater Management2.16 Rain Water Harvesting2.17 Storm Water Management2.18 Land & Greenbelt Development2.19 Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental

Protection (CREP): Integrated Iron & Steel Industry2.20 Project Cost

CHAPTER-3.0: BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL SCENARIO3.1 Introduction3.1.1 Physiographic Details3.2 Geological Features of the Study Area3.3 Geo-Hydrological Status of the Study Area3.4.1 Rain Fall in the Area3.4.2 Damodar River3.4.3 Ajay River3.4.4 Seismic History of the Area3.4.5 Flood Hazard Zonation Mapping3.4.6 Description of the Study Area3.5 Major Industries in 10 Km Radius Area around the Project Site3.6 Land Use3.6.1 Methodology3.6.2 Data Analysis3.6.3 Other Secondary Data3.6.4 Digital Image Processing3.6.5 Landuse and Landcover Pattern3.6.6 Land Utilization Pattern3.7 Soil3.7.1 Physical Characteristics




CONT. - 3


CHAPTER DESCRIPTION3.7.2 Chemical Characteristics3.8 Air Quality3.8.1 Selection of Monitoring Stations3.8.2 Parameters & Frequency of Monitoring3.8.3 Results & Discussions3.8.4 Conclusion3.9 Meteorology3.9.1 Location3.9.2 Past Records of IMD, Durgapur3.9.3 On-Site Meteorological Observatory3.10 Water Environment3.10.1 Present Water Use3.10.2 Water Quality3.11 Noise3.11.1 Major Sources of Noise in the Study Area3.11.2 Ambient Noise Monitoring3.11.3 Noise Levels in the Study Area3.12 Ecology3.12.1 Study Methodology3.12.2 Description of the Study Area3.13 Socio-Economic Environment3.13.1 Brief Outline of the Study Area3.13.2 Demographic aspects of the Study Area3.13.3 Social structure3.13.4 Literacy levels3.13.5 Occupational Structure3.13.6 Infrastructural Facilities

CHAPTER-4.0: ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES4.1 Project Activities4.1.1 Phases of Impacts4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase4.2.1 Activities during Construction Phase4.2.2 Impacts on Air Quality4.2.3 Impacts on Hydrology and Water Use4.2.4 Impacts on Water Quality4.2.5 Impacts on Noise4.2.6 Impacts on Soil and Land Use4.2.7 Impacts on Demography & Socioeconomics4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase4.3.1 Impacts on Air Quality4.3.2 Impacts on Water Quality4.3.3 Impacts on Hydrology and Water Use




CONT. - 4


CHAPTER DESCRIPTION4.3.4 Impacts on Noise during Operation4.3.5 Impacts on Soil4.3.6 Impacts on Land Use4.3.7 Impacts on Demography and Socioeconomics

CHAPTER-5.0: ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES5.1 Analysis of Alternatives

CHAPTER-6.0 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME6.1 Introduction6.2 Environmental Monitoring Programme

CHAPTER-7.0 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES(HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ASSESSMENT, DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ANDPUBLIC CONSULTATION)

7.1 Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment7.1.1 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GoI Rules,

20087.2 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation7.2.1 Methodology7.2.2 Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)7.2.3 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) for Storage Unit7.2.4 Results of FE and TI for Storage Unit7.3 Failure Mode Effect Analysis7.4 Risk Reduction Opportunities7.5 Disaster Management Plan7.5.1 Objective of Disaster Management Plan7.5.2 Emergencies7.5.3 Facilities, available with the Factory7.5.4 Key Personnel and Responsibilities7.5.5 Organization7.6 Hazardous Chemicals & Associated Hazards7.7 Off Site Emergency Plan7.8 Education of Public7.9 Rehabilitation and Resettlement7.10 Public Consultation

CHAPTER-8.0: PROJECT BENEFITS

CHAPTER-9.0 : ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

CHAPTER-10.0 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN10.1 Basic Contents




CONT. - 5


CHAPTER DESCRIPTION10.2 Green Belt Development Plan10.3 Hazardous Waste Management10.4 Environmental Management Department10.5 Mitigatory Measures during Construction10.6 Fire and Safety Management10.7 Environmental Awareness Campaign10.8 Legal and Statutory Compliance10.9 Documentation10.10 Information Dissemination and Public Relations10.11 Occupational Health Activities10.11.1 Introduction10.11.2 Approach10.11.3 Standards for the Occupational Health and Safety Management

System10.11.4 Core Elements of the Occupational Health and Safety

Management10.11.5 Occupational Health and Safety Policy10.11.6 Structure and Responsibilities10.11.7 Training Awareness10.11.8 Audit of Occupational Health and Safety Management10.11.9 Management Review10.12 Environmental Cost

CHAPTER-11.0: SUMMARY & CONCLUSION11.1 Introduction11.2 Site Location11.3 Project Highlights11.4 Baseline Environmental Scenario11.4.1 Meteorology11.4.2 Ambient Air Quality11.4.3 Water Quality11.4.4 Noise11.4.5 Ecology11.4.6 Demography and Socio-Economy11.5 Environmental Impacts of Proposed Projects11.5.1 Impacts on Air Quality11.5.2 Impacts on Water Quality11.5.3 Impacts on Soil11.5.4 Impacts on Land Use11.5.5 Impacts on Biological Environment11.5.6 Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment11.6 Environmental Management Plan




CONT. - 6


CHAPTER DESCRIPTIONCHAPTER-12.0 : DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

ANNEXURES

ANNEXURE DESCRIPTION

I TORs from MoEF&CC

II Water drawl permission

III Copy of Last EC

IV Air Quality Data

V Company Environmental Policy

VI Iron Ore Supply Documents

VII Poly-Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAH) Data

VIII Land Details

IX Relevant Indian Standards

Shyam Sel& PowerLtd.

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1

MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant atVillage Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Paschim Burdwan, West Bengal

C1 - 1

Introduction Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-1.0INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORTM/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. (SSPL), a Limited Company, wasincorporated on 5th September, 1991, having its registered office atS.S. Chamber, 5, C.R Avenue, Kolkata in West Bengal.

M/s SSPL is operating an Integrated Steel Plant at Village Dhasna,P.S. Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Paschim Burdwan, WestBengal. For the existing units M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd.received two Environmental Clearances (EC). The first EC wasobtained from State EIA Authority vide letter No. EN/702/T-II-I/141/207 dated 26th March 2008. The second EC was obtainedfrom Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change vide letterNo. J-11011/887/2007-IA.II(I) dated 18th March, 2009 (amendedon 19th June 2018). The name of existing operational units as perConsent to Operate is presented in Table-1.1.

TABLE-1.1NAME & PRODUCTION CAPACITY OF EXISTING OPERATIONAL UNITS

SN.

Name of Units Name of Product Production Capacity asper Consent to Operate

1. Pellet Plant Iron ore pellets 600000 TPA2. DRI Plant Sponge iron 325800 TPA3. Induction Furnaces Steel billets/ingots 309600 TPA

4 Rolling Mill TMT BarsStructurals

55008 TPA48000 TPA

5 Ferroalloy Plant FerromanganeseSilicomanganese

32400 TPA5520 TPA

6. Power Plant Electricity 61 MW

M/s SSPL proposed to expand the integrated steel plant andsubmitted application to Ministry of Environment, Forests &Climate Change (MOEF&CC) for obtaining EnvironmentalClearance (EC). The Terms of Reference (TOR) for conducting theEIA study was issued on 17th February 2014. Public Hearing wasdone on 14th October 2015 and thereafter the final EIA waspresented before the Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) ofMOEF&CC in its 33rd Meeting held on 10th July 2018. The EAC did




C1 - 2


not approve the expansion proposal citing that the configurationand facility envisaged in TOR and facilities for which EC is soughtare not matching. M/s SSPL submitted fresh application forobtaining EC of the expansion units and obtained Standard TORvide letter No J-1011/887/2007-IA-II (I) dated 1st November, 2018.The name of existing units & proposed expansion units,configuration and production capacity are presented in Table-1.2.

TABLE-1.2OVERALL PROJECT SCENARIO (EXISTING + EXPANSION)

AS PER TOR APPLICATIONSl.No.

Name ofProduct Name of Unit

Capacity ofExisting Unit (as

per EC)

Capacity ofProposed

Expansion Unit

UltimateCapacity ofProduct

1 Sinter Sinter Plant - 0.85 MTPA 0.85 MTPA(850000 TPA)

2 Iron OrePellets

Pellet Plant 1 0.48 MTPA Capacity increaseto 0.6 MTPA

1.8 MTPA(1800000 TPA)Pellet Plant 2 0.12 MTPA Capacity increase

to 0.6 MTPA

Pellet Plant 3 - 0.6 MTPA

3 Hot Metal/ Pig Iron Blast Furnace

- 0.6 MTPA(1x450 m3)

0.6 MTPA(600000 TPA)

4 SpongeIron

Direct ReducedIron (DRI) Plant

2 x 100 TPD3 x 300 TPD2 x 90 TPD

(0.4248 MTPA)

4 x 350 TPD(0.462 MTPA)

0.89 MTPA(890000 TPA)

5 FerroAlloys Ferro Alloy Plant

3 x 9 MVA2 x 4.5 MVA(0.1 MTPA)

- 0.1 MTPA(100000 TPA)

6SteelBillets/Ingots

Steel MeltingShop (SMS)(InductionFurnace route)

7x18 T2x15 T4x5 T

(0.6066 MTPA)

5 x 18 T8 x 8 T

(0.5082 MTPA)1.11 MTPA

(1110000 TPA)

SMS (ElectricArc Furnaceroute)

-1 x 45 T

(0.4 MTPA) 0.4 MTPA(400000 TPA)

Total Steel Billets/Ingots from SMS 1.51 MTPA(1510000 TPA)

7RolledProducts&Structural(angle,channel,Joist, etc)

Rolling Mill – 1Structurals 48,000 TPA Capacity increase

to 0.15 MTPA

1 MTPA(1000000 TPA)

Rolling Mill – 2TMT Bars 55,008 TPA

Capacity increaseto 0.15 MTPA

Rolling Mill – 3Wire Rods 19,6992 TPA Capacity increase

to 0.2 MTPARolling Mill – 4Long Product - 0.3 MTPARolling Mill – 5Long Product - 0.2 MTPA




C1 - 3


8 Coke Coke Oven Plant - 0.3 MTPA 0.3 MTPA(300000 TPA)

9 DuctileIron Pipe DI Pipe Plant - 0.1 MTPA 0.1 MTPA

(100000 TPA)

10 ElectricityCaptive PowerPlant

91 MW(WHRB - 48 MWCFBC - 43 MW) 45 MW (WHRB) 136 MW

(93 MW-WHRB43 MW-CFBC)

11 Cement Cement GrindingUnit - 1.2 MTPA 1.2 MTPA

(1200000 TPA)

12 ProducerGas

Producer GasPlant -

36,000Nm3/Hour

36000Nm3/Hour

MTPA: Million Tons Per Annum; TPA: Tons Per Annum; T: Tons; MW: Mega Watt

Public Hearing was conducted on 31st May, 2019 at JamuriaNazrul Bhaban, Nandi Road, Jamuria, District Paschim Burdwanin West Bengal. The Public Hearing Proceeding and action plan onthe issues raised during PH along with the budgetary provisionhas been presented as Annexure-7-IV(A) & Annexure-7-IV(B)respectively in Chapter-7.0.

The EIA Report is based on secondary data/ literature referencesupplemented by on-site data generated during the period 1st

October, 2018 to 31st December, 2018, representing the PostMonsoon season.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT

As per EIA Notification 2006, published on 14th September 2006,all projects or activities, including expansion and modernization ofexisting projects or activities or change in product mix, fallingunder Category ‘A’ in the Schedule shall require priorEnvironmental Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forest &Climate Change (MoEF&CC), Govt. of India.

The proposed project is listed at Sl. No. 3(a) in Metallurgicalindustries (ferrous & non-ferrous) and 3(b) in Cement Plants undercategory ‘A’ of Schedule of EIA Notification, 2006.

Copy of Environmental Clearances of the existing units areappended to this EIA Report (Annexure-III). The name of units forwhich the EC was granted and the status of implementation isgiven in Table 1.3 and Table 1.4:




C1 - 4


TABLE-1.3NAME OF UNITS, CAPACITY & INSTALLATION STATUS

(AS PER EC OBTAINED FROM STATE EIA AUTHORITY, WESTBENGAL DATED 26-3-2008)

SN Name of Units Capacity as per EC Units Installed/ underinstallation/ not installed

1. DRI Kilns 2x 90 TPD to produce 59400 TPAsponge iron

Installed (2 x 90 TPD)59400 TPA

2. Induction Furnace 6 x 18 tons404200 TPA Steel Billets

Installed2 x 15 tons4 x 5 tons

Under Construction3x18 tons

3. Ferroalloy Plant 2 x 6.5 MVA furnace1 x 13 MVA furnace

19000 TPA slag based ferroalloy

Not installed

TABLE-1.4NAME OF UNITS, CAPACITY & INSTALLATION STATUS

(AS PER EC OBTAINED FROM MOEF&CC, NEW DELHI DATED18-3-2009)

SN Name of Units Capacity as per EC Units Installed/ underinstallation/ not installed

1. Mini Blast Furnace 1x450 m³ Not installed2. Sinter Plant 400000 TPA Not installed3. DRI Kilns 3x300 TPD

2x100 TPDInstalled

2x 300 TPD &2 x 100 TPD

Under construction1 x 300 TPD

4. Induction Furnaces 4 x 18 tons Installed2 x 18 tons furnace

Under construction2x18 tons

5. Electrical Arc Furnaces 1 x 45 tons Not installed6. Power Plant WHRB - 18 MW

CFBC - 43 MWWHRB – 30 MWCFBC - 4x30 MWCFBC - 1x39 MW

Total - 250 MW

Installed61 MW

Under Construction30 MW

Not installed4x30 MW CFBC +1x39 MW CFBC

7. Pelletisation &Beneficiation Plant

600000 TPA InstalledUnit 1: 0.48 MTPAUnit 2: 0.12 MTPA

6,00,000 TPA




C1 - 5


8. Coke Oven Plant 0.25 MTPA Not installed9. Structural & Long

Product0.3 MTPA (TMT Bar,

Structurals, Wire Rods)Installed

TMT Bar, Structurals103008 TPA

Under constructionWire Rod mill196992 TPA

10. Ductile Iron Plant 0.1 MTPA Not installed11. ERW Tubes Plant 0.1 MTPA Not installed12. Ferro Alloy Plant:

Ferrochrome &Silicomanganese Plant

0.1 MTPA Installed3 x 9 MVA Furnace2 x 4.5 MVA Furnace

1.3 PROJECT PROPONENTM/s Shyam Sel & Power Limited (Formerly Shyama Cast Limited,belongs to Shyam Group), a Public Limited Company wasincorporated on 05.09.1991 with its registered office at 5, C.R. Avenue,Kolkata 700022. Directors of the company are Mr. Brij BhusanAgarwal, Mr. Bajrang Lal Agarwal, Mr. Sanjay Agarwal, and Mr.Mahabir Prasad Agarwal.SHYAM GROUP is a well-diversified and fast expanding Industrialhouse in Eastern India with manufacturing facilities in the state ofWest Bengal, Orissa and Meghalaya. The Group has achieved aturnover of Rs. 3500 crores (approx.) during the FY 2017-18. M/sSSPL has achieved a turnover of Rs. 2125 crores (approx.) during theFY 2017-18. The Group is poised for vertical and horizontal growth insteel and cement sector by virtue of integrated steel complex withFerro alloys and captive power plant and other related steel units. Thegroup has earned an appreciative clientele in the Indian market aswell as overseas markets in Poland, Netherlands, Italy, UAE, Taiwan,etc.The quality and performance of groups' product in the global marketare well recognized. In the year 2005, Group has received theprestigious Dhatu Nayak Award and the one of the group company isalso recognized by EEPC (Engineering Exports Promotional Council) ofIndia.

SHYAM GROUP COMPANIES:Company Name Industry Type

Shyam Metallics & Energy Ltd. Integrated Steel PlantShyam SEL & Power Ltd. Integrated Steel PlantShyam Ferro Alloys Ltd. Ferro Alloys Plant




C1 - 6


PHOTOGRAPHS OF PROPOSED PROJECT SITE




C1 - 7


PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING GREENBELT




C1 - 8


PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING PLANT




C1 - 9


1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

1.4.1 Nature of the Project

The proposed project of M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. are listed at Sl.No. 3(a) & 3(b) in Mineral beneficiation and Metallurgical industries(ferrous & non-ferrous) & Cement Plants under category ‘A’ ofSchedule of EIA Notification, 2006 and therefore, shall require priorEnvironmental Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forests &Climate Change (MoEF&CC), Govt. of India. The company has nowdecided to take up an expansion programme of the existing steel plant.Under the expansion programme, the company intends for installationof units as mentioned in Table-1.2.

1.4.2 Size

By nature the proposed project falls under Category A of EIANotification. The production capacity of expansion projects are asfollows: 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89 MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal/ pig iron, 1.11 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPADI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit and 136 MW captive powerplant & 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys.

1.4.3 Land

The total land available with M/s SSPL is 262.64 hectares (649 acres).All the proposed expansion units shall be located inside this 262.64Hectares (649 acres) of land inside the existing plant boundary. Entireland is in possession of M/s SSPL. Greenbelt has been developed onthe 33% earmarked land. Infrastructure facilities for storing water andmaterials, roads, railway siding and field hostel are available insidethe complex. Skilled and unskilled workers are easily available in thearea, hence development of quarters for accommodating the workersis not envisaged at present.

1.4.4 Location

The proposed Steel Plant of M/s SSPL is situated at village Dhasna,P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S. Jamuria, District Burdwan of West Bengal. Itsgeo-graphical coordinates are Latitude 23°40’38.51"N to




C1 - 10


23°41‘49.87"N and Longitude 87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"E withMean Sea Level 350 feet or 106.68 meters.

1.4.5 Description of SurroundingsThe project site already has proper road linkage for transport ofmaterials and equipment. Raniganj Railway Station is about 10.0 kmfrom the project site. The project site is under Jamuria Municipal Areaand beside State High Way. The NH-2 road is passing about 6.0 kmaway in the South direction and the nearest distance of NH-60 in theSE direction is about 2.6 km with respect to the project site. Thenearest Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport, Andal is about 20 km from theproject site. Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose International (NSCBI)Airport, Kolkata, is about 178 km from the project site. Kolkata city islocated at a distance of about 178 km from the project site. Distancefrom Howrah Railway station to the project site is about 175 km.Kolkata Port is around 175 km away and Haldia Port is 209 km awayfrom the Project Site.

The nearest distance of Damodar River in the South-western side isabout 11.0 km and Ajoy river is about 7.0 km in North-eastern sidew.r.t the project site. Important Towns like Raniganj Town is about9.0 km in South direction, Asansol Town is about 14.0 km in Westdirection, Durgapur Town is about 29.0 km in South-east direction.Jharkhand State Boarder is about 30.0 km in West direction from theproject site.

There is no National Park, Reserve Forest & Wildlife Sanctuary within10 km radius of the Project Site. The location of the proposed projectsite on Topo Sheet & on Google Map is presented in Figure-1.1 & 1.2respectively. Project site on Topo Sheet is presented in Figure-1.3.




C1 - 11


FIGURE-1.1: PROJECT SITE & 10 KM AREA

Project Site: Village Dhasna, P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S. Jamuria, DistrictPaschim Burdwan, West Bengal.

Project Site Co-ordinates: Latitude 23°40’38.51"N to 23°41‘49.87"N andLongitude 87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"E with Mean Sea Level 350 feet or

106.68 meters




C1 - 12


FIGURE-1.2: PROJECT SITE ON GOOGLE MAP

FIGURE-1.3: PROJECT SITE ON TOPOSHEET

Project Site




C1 - 13


1.4.6 Importance to country & region

NationalThe development of industrial projects plays a key role in theeconomic growth of any country. Iron is perhaps the most importantmetal to the mankind and its principal alloy, steel, is widely used fordomestic, agricultural, industrial and defense purposes. Per capitasteel consumption is a major indicator of economic status of anycountry.

The Indian steel industry is poised for faster growth in the decadesahead as the industrial and economic development of the countrygains pace. The steel industry has recorded remarkable performancein recent years. The industry is now capable of producing high qualitymaterials of stringent international specification for high-endapplications. The 21st century is widely perceived to be the century ofAsia and India is looked upon as one of the economies with mostpromising prospects. This is a formidable challenge as well as anopportunity to the Indian corporate sector.

The national steel policy has set a target of 60 million tonne of steelproduction by 2010 and to increase it to a level of 100 million tonneby 2020. SSPL is in position to fulfill its role in the nation’s quest forhigher growth and development in the new millennium.

Keeping all these in mind, SSPL has planned to expand the existingsteel plant and also to make technology up-gradation in different unitsin a more environment friendly way.

RegionalThe growth of the steel industry significantly contributes to economicgrowth of the Nation as well as to the region as it generatesemployment both directly and also due to development of downstreamindustries. The infrastructural and other social amenities grow in theregion leading to overall development of the region. The proposedproject will enhance the overall development of the region.




C1 - 14


The proposed project will cover addition of new units and technology.The above will lead to manufacture products at a lower cost and moreimportantly in a more environment friendly way.

1.5 LEGAL BRIEF LEGAL FRAMEWORK FOR EIA STUDY

1.5.1 Procedure for Environmental Clearance

Environmental clearance of any new project or expansion of existingprojects is now done as per the new notification of the Ministry ofEnvironment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), Govt. of Indiadated 14th September 2006. The new notification requires priorenvironmental clearance of all projects from competent central govt. orstate govt. authorities, as may be the case. The projects are nowclassified into Category “A” or Category “B” projects based on spatialextent of potential impacts on human health and natural & man-maderesources. The Category “A” projects require prior clearance by theMoEF&CC, Govt. of India while the Category “B” projects have to getclearance from the State level Environment Impact AssessmentAuthority (SEIAA), constituted by the Central Government for thispurpose.

The environment clearance procedure for new projects will requiremaximum of four stages all of which may not be applicable to all theprojects. These four stages in sequential order are as follows:

Stage1 - Screening: It refers to the definite assignment ofenvironmental category to projects or activities where the same is notcompletely specified. In case of Category 'B’ projects scrutiny ofapplication at State level to categorize project in 'B1’ or ‘B2’ is done. TheB2 projects do not require EIA Reports. The present project iscategorized as Category ‘A’ project and thus, this stage is not applicable.

Stage 2 - Scoping: It refers to the process by which the Expert AppraisalCommittee in the case of Category ‘A’ projects and State- level ExpertAppraisal Committee in the case of Category ‘B1’ projects determinedetailed and comprehensive Terms of Reference (ToR) addressing allrelevant environmental concerns for the preparation of an EIA report inrespect of the project for which prior environmental clearance is sought.The Standard ToR for this project was granted on 1st November, 2018.




C1 - 15


Stage 3 - Public Consultation: It refers to the process by which concernof local people and other stakeholders are ascertained and their viewstaken regarding the project. The Public Consultation takesplace in two steps: Publichearing and written responses.The public hearing will beconducted under thesupervision of State PollutionControl Board close to the siteof the project.

Stage 4 - Appraisal: This refersto detailed scrutiny by theExpert Appraisal Committee orState Level Expert AppraisalCommittee of the applicationand other documents like thefinal EIA report. The final EIAreport for this project will beprepared after Public Hearingfor the final appraisal by EACfor grant of EnvironmentClearance.

The steps of Environmental Clearance for proposed project is shown inFigure-1.3. STE

1.5.2 Post Environmental Clearance Monitoring

For category “A’’ projects, the project proponent shall prominentlyadvertise in the newspapers indicating that the project has beenaccorded environmental clearance and the details of MoEF&CC websitewhere it is displayed.

The project management shall submit half-yearly compliance reports inrespect of the stipulated prior environmental clearance terms andconditions in hard & soft copies to the regulatory authority concernedon 1st June and 1st December of each calendar year. All such reportsshall be public documents. The latest such compliance report shall bedisplayed on the web site of the concerned regulatory authority.

PS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE FOR PROPOSED PR

BOX 1.1: SCOPE OF THE STUDY To conduct literature review and collect the data

relevant to study area Project appreciation in terms of its environmental

pollution potential and detrimental impacts ondifferent environmental attributes.

To undertake environmental monitoring so as toestablish the baseline environmental status of thestudy area

To identify existing pollution load due to variousactivities in the ambient levels

To identify the basic environmental statusincluding the meteorological parameters andsocio-economic environment of the proposedstudy area

To predict incremental levels of pollutants in thestudy area due to the proposed plant activities

To evaluate the predicted impact on the variousenvironmental attributes in the study area by usingscientifically developed and widely acceptedenvironmental impact methodologies

To prepare an environmental management planoutlining the measures for improving theenvironmental quality for environmentallysustainable development

To identify critical environmental attributesrequired to be monitored




C1 - 16


1.6 SCOPE OF STUDY- DETAILS OF REGULATORY SCOPINGCARRIED OUT AS PER TERMS OF REFERENCEThe Environmental Impact Assessment and EnvironmentManagement Plan for the proposed expansion project addressing theenvironment related issues are prepared in accordance with therequirements of Standard terms of reference (TOR) prescribed byMoEF&CC, Govt. of India.

The study evaluates the prevailing environmental conditions. Theadverse impacts have been identified and possible mitigationmeasures have been drawn in order to protect the environment. Inorder to carry out the study, the baseline environmental scenario hasbeen established.

The main objectives of the present EIA/EMP study are brieflysummarized below:

To establish the baseline environmental scenario.

FIGURE 1.3: STEPS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE FOR PROPOSED PROJECT




C1 - 17


To identify, predict and assess the impacts of proposed futureproject on the environment.

To prepare a detailed action plan for implementation ofmitigative measures.

To suggest preventive measures to minimize adverse impactsand to maximize beneficial impacts.

To suggest a monitoring programme to evaluate theeffectiveness of mitigative measures.

To suggest the formation of a core group responsible forimplementation of the EMP.

To prepare a capital cost estimate for environment managementplan.

To address the concerns of disaster management, CSR andpoints raised in public hearing.

The scope of the present study is to conduct EIA covering all thedisciplines of environment and field monitoring in relevant disciplinesover one full season of 3 (three) months (excluding monsoon months).The draft EIA report is prepared as per the MoEF&CC Notificationdated 14.09.2006, as amended from time to time, for Public Hearingpurpose. After completion of the Public Hearing, all the environmentalconcerns and issues expressed by the Public will be addressed andappropriate changes in the draft EIA Report will be made and FinalEIA Report prepared.

Secondary and primary data collection was done comprising of, butnot restricted to the following: Long Term Climatic data from Indian Meteorological Department

(IMD) for available previous decade Geo-hydrological aspects based on available data from various

sources Identification of water bodies, hills, roads etc. within 10 km

radius Details of fauna, flora, information in forests, major habitats,

sanctuaries, sensitive places within a distance of 10 km fromthe project site (including forest details).

Major industries within 10 km radius. Historical monuments and sanctuaries within 10 km radius. Land use pattern within core zone and buffer zone (10 km

radius around the core zone), Cropping pattern.




C1 - 18


Demography and Socio-economic based on last availableCensus data for entire study area

The preparation of EIA/EMP has been done as per the genericstructure prescribed in EIA Notification dated 14th September 2006.

In line with the TOR, baseline environmental data was generated asshown below,

Description No. of LocationsAirAmbient air monitoring (24 hourly samples),twice a week for 3 months for one seasonParameters : PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2 & CO.

8

Meteorological parameters measured athourly duration simultaneously at one airmonitoring station for 3 months for Windspeed, direction, Relative humidity,Temperature etc.

1

WaterWater sample from various surface andground water in the study area and tested forphysical, chemical & biological parameters

8(Surface Water) &

8(Ground Water)

Soil 4NoiseHourly readings taken for 24 hours (Leq.)

10

1.7 STATUS OF LITIGATIONS

There are no litigations / court cases pending against the project.

1.8 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR)Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC), Govt.of India issued Standard Terms of Reference vide letter (Ref. F. No. J-1011/887/2007-IA-II (I) dated 1st November, 2018 (Table-1.6 &Annexure-I) for undertaking detailed EIA study for obtaining EC inaccordance with the provisions of the EIA Notification 2006.

This EIA Report is prepared on the basis of the available secondarydata/ literature along with the on-site data during the period (1st




C1 - 19


October, 2018 - 31st December, 2018) representing the PostMonsoon season, generated through on-site monitoring of relevantenvironmental components and parameters.

TABLE-1.6STANDARD “TERMS OF REFERENCE” & REFERENCE IN EIA REPORT

SL.No.

TERMS OF REFERENCE COMPLIANCE INPAGE NUMBER

1 Executive Summary Chapter-11.0

2 Introductioni. Details of the EIA Consultant includingNABET accreditation

ii. Information about the project proponent

iii. Importance and benefits of the project

Chapter-12.0

Chapter-1.0,Section-1.3

Chapter-8.03 Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion Chapter-2.0Section-2.20

ii. Products with capacities for the proposedproject.

Chapter-2.0Section-2.1

iii. If expansion project, details of existingproducts with capacities and whetheradequate land is available for expansion,reference of earlier EC if any.


iv. List of raw materials required and theirsource along with mode of transportation


v. Other chemicals and materials requiredwith quantities and storage capacities


vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardouswaste generation and their management

Chapter-2.0Sections-2.12, 2.13,

2.14, 2.15

Chapter-4.0Section-4.3.1

vii. Requirement of water, power, with sourceof supply, status of approval, waterbalance diagram, man-power requirement(regular and contract).

Chapter-2.0Sections-2.8.6 & 2.9

& 2.11

Annexure - II




C1 - 20


viii. The project proponent shall furnish therequisite documents from the competentauthority in support of drawl of groundwater & surface water and supply ofelectricity.

No ground water shallbe extracted.

Refer Annexure- II

ix. Process description along with majorequipment and machineries, process flowsheet (quantative) from raw material toproducts to be provided.

Chapter-2.0Sections-2.7

x. Hazard identification and details ofproposed safety systems.

Chapter-7.0

xi. Expansion/modernization proposals:a. Copy of all the Environmental

Clearance(s) including Amendmentsthereto obtained for the project fromMoEF/SEIAA shall be attached as anAnnexure. A certified copy of the latestMonitoring Report of the Regional Officeof the Ministry of Environment andForests as per circular dated 30th May,2012 on the status of compliance ofconditions stipulated in all the existingenvironmental clearances includingAmendments shall be provided. Inaddition, status of compliance ofConsent to Operate for the ongoing/existing operation of the project fromSPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report.

b. In case the existing project has notobtained environmental clearance,reasons for not taking EC under theprovisions of the EIA Notification 1994and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall beprovided. Copies of Consent toEstablish/No Objection Certificate andConsent to Operate (in case of unitsoperating prior to EIA Notification 2006,CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006)obtained from the SPCB shall besubmitted. Further, compliance reportto the conditions of consents from theSPCB shall be submitted.

Annexure-III

4 Site Details




C1 - 21


i. Location of the project site coveringvillage, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State,Justification for selecting the site,whether other sites were considered.


ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of10 Km and site location on1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areasand environmentally sensitive places).


iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four cornersof the site.


iv. Google map – Earth downloaded of theproject site.


v. Layout maps indicating existing unit aswell as proposed unit indicating storagearea, plant area, greenbelt area, utilitiesetc. If located within an Industrialarea/Estate/Complex, layout ofIndustrial Area indicating location ofunit within the Industrial area/Estate.


vi. Photographs of the proposed andexisting (if applicable) plant site. Ifexisting show photographs ofplantation/greenbelt, in particular.


vii. Land use break-up of total land of theproject sited (identified and acquired),government/private-agricultural, forest,wasteland, water bodies, settlements,etc. shall be included (not required forindustrial area).


viii. A list of major industries with name andtype within study area (10 km radius)shall be incorporated. Land use details ofthe study area.


ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrologicalstatus of the study area shall beincluded.

Chapter-3.0Section-3.2 & 3.3

x. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If the site iswithin 1 km radius of any major river,peak and lean season river discharge aswell as flood occurrence frequency basedon peak rainfall data of the past 30years. Details of Flood Level of theproject site and maximum Flood Level ofthe river shall also be provided (mega





C1 - 22


green field projects).xi. Status of acquisition of land. If

acquisition is not complete, stage of theacquisition process and expected time ofcomplete possession of the land.


xii. R&R details in respect of land in linewith state Government policy.


5 Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):i. Permission and approval for the use offorest land (forestry clearance), if any, andrecommendations of the State ForestDepartment. (if applicable).

ii. Landuse map based on High resolutionsatellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed sitedelineating the forest land (in case ofprojects involving forest land more than 40ha).

iii. Status of Application submitted forobtaining the stage I forestry clearancealong with latest status shall be submitted.

iv. The projects to be located within 10 km ofthe National Parks, Sanctuaries, BiosphereReserves, Migratory Corridors of WildAnimals, the project proponent shallsubmit the map duly authenticated byChief Wildlife Warden showing thesefeatures vis-à-vis the project location andthe recommendations or comments of theChief Wildlife Warden thereon.

v. Wildlife Conservation Plan dulyauthenticated by the Chief Wildlife Wardenof the State Government for conservation ofSchedule 1 fauna, if any exists in the studyarea.

vi. Copy of application submitted for clearanceunder the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, tothe Standing Committee of the NationalBoard for Wildlife.

Not applicable as noforest land will beused in the proposedproject.




C1 - 23


6 Environmental Status

i. Determination of atmospheric inversionlevel at the project site and site-specificmicro-meteorological data usingtemperature, relative humidity, hourlywind speed and direction and rainfall.


ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locationsfor PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO and otherparameters relevant to the project shall becollected. The monitoring stations shall bebased CPCB guidelines and take intoaccount the pre-dominant wind direction,population zone and sensitive receptorsincluding reserved forests.


iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12weeks of all stations as per frequency givenin the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009along with min., max, average and 98%values for each of the AAQ parametersfrom data of all AAQ stations should beprovided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

Annexure - IV

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (60mupstream and downstream) and othersurface drains at eight locations as perCPCB/ MoEF&CC guidelines.


v. Whether the site falls near to pollutedstretch of river identified by theCPCB/MoEF&CC.

The project site doesnot falls near topolluted stretch ofriver identified by theCPCB/MoEF&CC.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8locations shall be included.


vii.Noise levels monitoring at 8 locationswithin the study area.


viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCBguidelines.


ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles,frequency of vehicles for transportation ofmaterials, additional traffic due toproposed project, parking arrangement etc.

Chapter-4.0Section-4.3.1.6




C1 - 24


x. Detailed description of flora and fauna(terrestrial and aquatic) existing in thestudy area shall be given with specialreference to rare, endemic and endangeredspecies. If Schedule-1 fauna are foundwithin the study area, a WildlifeConservation Plan shall be prepared andfurnished.


xi. Socio-economic status of the study area. Chapter-3.0Section-3.13

7 Impact Assessment and Environmental Management Plani.

i. Assessment of ground level concentration ofpollutants from the stack emission based onsite-specific meteorological features. In casethe project is located on a hilly terrain, theAQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs ofthe specific terrain characteristics fordetermining the potential impacts of theproject on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of allsources of emissions (includingtransportation) on the AAQ of the area shallbe well assessed. Details of the model usedand the input data used for modeling shallalso be provided. The air quality contoursshall be plotted on a location map showingthe location of project site, habitation nearby,sensitive receptors, if any.


ii. Water Quality modeling in case, if the effluentis proposed to be discharged into the localdrain, then Water Quality Modelling studyshould be conducted for the drain watertaking into consideration the upstream anddownstream quality of water of the drain.

Zero DischargePlant

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materialsand end products on the surroundingenvironment shall be assessed and provided.In this regard, options for transport of rawmaterials and finished products and wastes(large quantities) by rail or rail-cum roadtransport or convey or-cum-rail transportshall be examined.

Chapter-4.0Section-4.3.1.6




C1 - 25


iv. A note on treatment of wastewater fromdifferent plant operations, extent recycled andreused for different purposes shall beincluded. Complete scheme of effluenttreatment. Characteristics of untreated andtreated effluent to meet the prescribedstandards of discharge under E(P) Rules.


v. Details of stack emission and action plan forcontrol of emissions to meet standards.


vi. Measures for fugitive emission control. Chapter-2.0Section-2.14

vii.Details of hazardous waste generation andtheir storage, utilization and disposal. Copiesof MOU regarding utilization of solid andhazardous waste shall also be included. EMPshall include the concept of wasteminimization, recycle/ reuse/ recovertechniques, Energy conservation, and naturalresource conservation


viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall beensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. Adetailed plan of action shall be provided.

Not Applicable

ix. Action plan for the green belt developmentplan in 33% area i.e. land with not less than1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species,width of plantation, planning schedule etc.shall be included. The green belt shall bearound the project boundary and a schemefor greening of the roads used for the projectshall also be incorporated.


x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measuresat plant site shall be submitted to harvestrainwater from the roof tops and storm waterdrains to recharge the ground water and alsoto use for the various activities at the projectsite to conserve fresh water and reduce thewater requirement from other sources.


xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annumfor environmental pollution control measuresshall be included.


xii.Action plan for post-project environmentalmonitoring shall be submitted.

Chapter-6.0




C1 - 26


xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural andMan-made) Preparedness and EmergencyManagement Plan including Risk Assessmentand damage control. Disaster managementplan should be linked with District DisasterManagement Plan.

Chapter-7.0

8 Occupational Healthi. Details of existing Occupational & Safety

Hazards. What are the exposure levels ofabove mentioned hazards and whether theyare within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). Ifthese are not within PEL, what measures thecompany has adopted to keep them withinPEL so that health of the workers can bepreserved.

ii. Details of exposure specific health statusevaluation of worker. If the workers’ health isbeing evaluated by pre designed format, chestx-rays. Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing(Far & Near vision, colour vision and anyother ocular defect) ECG, during preplacement and periodical examinations givethe details of the same. Details regarding lastmonth analyzed data of above mentionedparameters as per age, sex, duration ofexposure and department wise.

iii. Annual report of health status of workers withspecial reference to Occupational Health andSafety.

iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure theoccupational health & safety of all contractand casual workers.


9 Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid downEnvironment Policy approved by its Board ofDirectors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIAreport.

ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe forstandard operating process procedures tobring into focus any infringement/deviation/ violation of the environmental orforest norms/ conditions? If so, it may bedetailed in the EIA.

iii. What is the hierarchical system orAdministrative order of the company to deal

Annexure-V




C1 - 27


with the environmental issues and forensuring compliance with the environmentalclearance conditions? Details of this systemmay be given.

iv. Does the company have system of reportingof non compliances/ violations ofenvironmental norms to the Board ofDirectors of the company and/orshareholders or stakeholders at large? Thisreporting mechanism shall be detailed in theEIA report.

10 Details regarding infrastructure facilities such assanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided tothe labour force during construction as well as tothe casual workers including truck drivers duringoperation phase.


11 Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5% of the projectcost) shall be earmarked towards theEnterprise Social Commitment based onPublic Hearing issues and item-wise detailsalong with time bound action plan shall beincluded. Socio-economic developmentactivities need to be elaborated upon.

Chapter-7.0Section-7.10Annexure - V

12 Any litigation pending against the project and/orany direction/order passed by any Court of Lawagainst the project, if so, details thereof shall alsobe included. Has the unit received any noticeunder the Section 5 of Environment (Protection)Ac t, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and WaterActs? If so, details thereof and compliance/ ATRto the notice(s) and present status of the case.

No

13 A tabular chart with index for point wisecompliance of above TORs.

Complied

B. SPECIFIC TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIA STUDIES FORMETALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON-FERROUS)

1 Complete process flow diagram describing eachunit, its processes and operations, along withmaterial and energy inputs & outputs (materialand energy balance).


2 Details on blast furnace/ open hearth furnace/basic oxygen furnace/ladle refining, casting androlling plants etc.


3 Details on installation/activation of opacitymeters with recording with proper calibrationsystem

Shall be Complied




C1 - 28


4 Details on toxic metals including mercury,arsenic and fluoride emissions

Not Applicable

5 Details on stack height requirement forintegrated steel


6 Details on ash disposal and management -Non-ferrous metal


7 Complete process flow diagram describingproduction of lead/zinc/copper/ aluminium, etc.

Not Applicable

8 Raw materials substitution or elimination -9 Details on smelting, thermal refining, melting,

slag fuming, and Waelz kiln operationNot Applicable

10 Details on Holding and de-gassing of moltenmetal from primary and secondary aluminum,materials pre-treatment, and from melting andsmelting of secondary aluminium

Not Applicable

11 Details on solvent recycling Not Applicable12 Details on precious metals recovery Not Applicable13 Details on composition, generation and

utilization of waste/fuel gases from coke ovenplant and their utilization.


14 Details on toxic metal content in the wastematerial and its composition and end use(particularly of slag).


15 Trace metals Mercury, arsenic and fluorideemissions in the raw material.

-

16 Trace metals in waste material especially slag. Chapter-2.0Section-2.12

17 Plan for trace metal recovery Chapter-2.0Section-2.12

18 Trace metals in water Chapter-3.0Section-3.10

C. ADDITIONAL TOR FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT1 Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the

status of environmental clearance of iron ore andcoal mines

Annexure-VI

2 Quantum of production of coal and iron ore fromcoal & iron ore mines and the projects they caterto. Mode of transportation to the plant and itsimpact


3 For Large ISPs, a 3-D view i.e. DEM (DigitalElevation Model) for the area in 10 km radiusfrom the proposal site. MRL details of project siteand RL of nearby sources of water shall beindicated.


4 Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery.




C1 - 29


High-resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, Ikonos, IRSP-6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km radius areafrom proposed site. The same shall be used forland used / land-cover mapping of the area.


5 Respirable Suspended particulate matter (RSPM)present in the ambient air must be analysed forsource analysis - natural dust/RSPM generatedfrom plant operations (trace elements). The RSPMshall also be analysed for presence of poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), i.e. Benzenesoluble fraction, where applicable. Chemicalcharacterization of RSPM and incorporating ofRSPM data.

Annexure-VII

6 All stock piles will have to be on top of a stableliner to avoid leaching of materials to groundwater.

Shall be Complied

7 Plan for the implementation of therecommendations made for the steel plants in theCREP guidelines.


8 Plan for slag utilization Chapter-2.0Section-2.12

9 Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (cokeoven, blast furnace)


10 System of coke quenching adopted withjustification.



Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit and 136 MW captive power plant,0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys at


C2 - 1

Project Description Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-2.0PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECTM/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. is presently operating a steel plant at VillageDhasna, P.S. Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Burdwan in West Bengal.Now the company has decided to take up the expansion programme of theexisting Integrated Steel plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets,0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal/pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grindingunit, 136 MW captive power plant and 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys within thesame plant premises. The existing as well as proposed units with ratedcapacity per annum are presented in Table-2.1.

TABLE-2.1OVERALL PROJECT SCENARIO

Sl.No.



per EC)

Capacity ofProposed

Expansion Unit



2 Iron OrePellets



to 0.6 MTPA



- 0.6 MTPA(1x450 m3)

0.6 MTPA(600000 TPA)

4 SpongeIron


2 x 100 TPD3 x 300 TPD2 x 90 TPD

(0.4248 MTPA)

4 x 350 TPD(0.462 MTPA)

0.89 MTPA(890000 TPA)


3x9 MVA2x4.5 MVA(0.1 MTPA)

- 0.1 MTPA(100000 TPA)


Steel MeltingShop (SMS)(InductionFurnace route)

7x18 T2x15 T4x5 T

(0.6066 MTPA)

5 x 18 T8 x 8 T

(0.5082 MTPA)1.11 MTPA

(1110000 TPA)


-1 x 45 T

(0.4 MTPA) 0.4 MTPA(400000 TPA)

Total Steel Billets/Ingots from SMS 1.51 MTPA




C2 - 2


(1510000 TPA)

7

RolledProducts&Structural(angle,channel,Joist, etc)


to 0.15 MTPA

1 MTPA(1000000 TPA)







(100000 TPA)





(1200000 TPA)

12 ProducerGas

Producer GasPlant -

36,000Nm3/Hour

36,000Nm3/Hour

MTPA: Million Tons Per Annum; TPA: Tons Per Annum; T: Tons; MW: Mega Watt

The principal features or highlights of the proposed expansion of existingsteel plant of M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd., under study are as follows:

PROPOSED PROJECT HIGHLIGHTSLocation Village Dhasna, Jamuria, District Burdwan, West Bengal.

Its geographical co-ordinates are as followsLatitude: 23°40’38.51"N to 23°41‘49.87"N andLongitude: 87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"EAverage altitude 104 m above mean sea level

Landrequirement

No additional land is required for the expansion units. Allnew units shall be accommodated within available 262.64Hectares land (649 acres) within the existing plantboundary. Land is already in possession of the Company.

Raw waterrequirement& source

12,500 m3/day

Source: Ajay River and Supplied by Asansol DurgapurDevelopment Authority (ADDA)

Requirement of existing units: 6526 m3/day

Requirement of proposed expansion units: 5867 m3/dayDomestic consumption is 107 m3/day.

Powerrequirement

232 MWSource: 136 MW from CPP and balance from state grid.




C2 - 3


Effluentgeneration &disposal

Zero Liquid Discharge will be maintained.

Waste water will be treated and recirculated / recycled.

Air pollutioncontrol

Electrostatic Precipitators, Bag Filters, Cyclones, GasCleaning Plant, Fume Extraction System, Scrubber andTall Stacks will be installed to control air pollution to meetthe the prescribed discharge standards

Solid WasteManagement

Blast Furnace Slag will be used in the proposed CementPlant / sold to other cement plants for making cement.

Induction Furnace & Electric Arc furnace slag will beused for road making / land filling purposes afterrecovering the iron.

Dolochar from DRI Plant will be used as fuel in FBCBoilers.

Dust (Fe bearing) collected from APC devices will beused in sinter plant. Other dust will be used for landfilling purposes / stored in secured / engineered landfillsite / used as construction material.

Coal tar from Producer gas plant will be sold Mill scales will be reused in Induction Furnaces.

Manpower Additional 7000 (Direct and indirect)Project cost Rs. 1661.02 Crores

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECTTMT rod and bar products are normally used in constructional/structuralwork due to its workability and Rolled products like angles and channelsfind versatile use in industries and erection work. Ductile Iron (DI) Pipes’good mechanical properties, in addition to high durability and strength,make them ideal for high-pressure applications. Ductile Iron Pipes areused extensively in systems transporting potable water, industrial water,irrigation water and pressure sewage. Cement is used in construction ofhouse, bridges and various infrastructure. Other products are backwardintegration to the end consumer products.

All the products proposed to be manufactured have high market demand.Iron & Steel is a basic commodity for all industrial activity and itsconsumption marks industrial prosperity. The Iron & steel industry hastremendous forward and backward linkages in terms of material flow,income and employment generation. Iron & Steel is a core industry andthus its demand is strongly linked to the overall economic activity of the




C2 - 4


nation. Given the inherent long-term potential of the Indian economy andits cyclical nature, the long-term prospects of the steel industry are fairlycomfortable. The demand and production has been growing at a healthyrate for the last few years and the forecast for the next decade and half isalso very promising.

As reported by Indian Brand Equity Foundation, India’s finished steelconsumption grew at a CAGR of 5.69 percent during FY08-FY18 to reach90.68 million tonnes (MT). India’s crude steel and finished steel productionincreased to 102.34 MT and 104.98 MT in 2017-18, respectively. In 2017-18, the country’s finished steel exports increased 17 per cent year-on-yearto 9.62 MT, as compared to 8.24 MT in 2016-17. Exports and imports offinished steel stood at 0.99 MT and 1.22 MT, during Apr-May 2018.

Similarly, for cement industry also, the housing and real estate sector isthe biggest demand driver of cement, accounting for about 65 percent ofthe total consumption in India. The other major consumers of cementinclude public infrastructure at 20 percent and industrial development at15 per cent.

India’s total cement production capacity is nearly 455 million tonnes, as of2017-18. Cement consumption is expected to grow by 4.5 per cent in FY19supported by pick-up in the housing segment and higher infrastructurespending. The industry is currently producing 280 MT for meetings itsdomestic demand and 5 MT for exports requirement.

To take full advantage of improved market scenario in near future asprojected by the Industry, M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd., intends toundertake proposed expansion project at Village Dhasna, Jamuria,District Burdwan, West Bengal.

All existing Service Facilities will be suitably augmented as well asadditional Service Facilities are proposed to be installed to meet therequirement of the Steel Plant after Expansion.

2.3 LOCATION OF PROJECT SITEThe proposed project site is located at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, DistrictBurdwan, West Bengal. The project site already has proper road linkagefor transport of materials and equipment. Raniganj Railway Station isabout 10 km from the project site.




C2 - 5


The NH-2 road is passing about 6.0 km away in the South direction andthe nearest distance of NH-60 in the SE direction is about 2.6 km withrespect to the project site. The nearest Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport, Andal isabout 20 km from the project site. Netaji Subhas Chandra BoseInternational (NSCBI) Airport, Kolkata, is about 178 km from the projectsite. Kolkata city is located at a distance of about 178 km from the projectsite. Distance from Howrah Railway station to the project site is about 175km. Kolkata Port is around 175 km away and Haldia Port is 209 km awayfrom the Project Site.

The nearest distance of Damodar River in the South-western side is about11.0 km and Ajoy river is about 7.0 km in North-eastern side w.r.t theproject site. Important Towns like Raniganj Town is about 9.0 km in Southdirection, Asansol Town is about 14.0 km in West direction, DurgapurTown is about 29.0 km in South-east direction. Jharkhand State Boarderis about 30.0 km in West direction from the project site.

2.4 PLANT LAYOUTThe plant layout showing the proposed facilities with 33% Greenbelt areahas been shown as Figure-2.1.

2.5 PROJECT PERIODThe installation of proposed steel plant along with utilities and servicesrequire co-operation for procurement of equipment, equipmentfoundations, award of all contracts and supervision of all constructionjobs at plant site. The factors which are responsible for timelyimplementation of the project are:

Arrangement of proper finance for the project. Finalization of layout of the proposed plant. Design of utilities and services. Placement of orders for plant and machinery. Arrangements for Govt. sanctions and supply of power. Recruitment of personnel.

As per an initial estimate around 5 Years will be needed forimplementation of the project.

2.6 RAW MATERIALSThe major raw material, which will be handled, consists of Iron Ore, Coal,dolomite, Limestone, Manganese Ore, Quartzite etc. The raw materials will




C2 - 6


be purchased from mines located in Orissa, West Bengal, Jharkhand, MPand Chhattisgarh (depending upon availability). Coking coal will beimported. The annual requirement of major raw materials, which will berequired for the proposed project is presented in the material flow aspresented below. Raw materials will be received at railway siding locatedinside plant boundary




C2 - 7


FIGURE-2.2: MATERIAL FLOW OF STEEL PLANT




C2 - 8


FIGURE-2.3: CONCEPT DIAGRAM OF POWER GENERATION

2.7 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION

2.7.1 MINI BLAST FURNACE

M/s SSPL is planned to set up a new Mini Blast Furnace of Capacity 1x450m3 where the blast furnace complex will comprise of blast furnaces alongwith its auxiliaries for production of 0.6 MTPA hot metal/Pig iron. The blastfurnace is envisaged to operate with sinter, iron ore lump, iron ore coke,pulverized coal and fluxes. The liquid slag will be granulated at slaggranulation unit. The BF top gas will be cleaned in dust catcher and gascleaning system, and reused in the stoves, runner drying and as fuel inother furnaces. The various components of BF are described below:

a. Stock house and charging system:The transportation of raw material from storage yard to the stock housewill be done by belt conveyors. The raw material transported from storage




C2 - 9


yard will be distributed into the respective bunkers through shuttleconveyors envisaged at the top of the stock house bunkers. All materials,stored in different weigh hoppers will be charged sequentially intocollecting conveyors which will discharge material into common chargingconveyor which in turn will feed the material to the blast furnace topcharging equipment.

b. Blast furnace proper:The blast furnace shall be of structural steel construction of free standingdesign and provided with four-post tower structure. The furnace shall beprovided with under hearth water cooling system in close circuit.

c. Hot blast stoves:The hot blast stoves will be designed for a blast temperature of 1250° Cwith an operating level of 1200°C. The 3-stoves combination with cyclicoperation is considered appropriate for start up and operation. Combustionair and combustion gas will be pre-heated by a heat recovery system usingthe waste gas from the stoves.

d. Cast house:The blast furnace will be provided with two cast houses with two tap holesin each cast house. The cast houses will be connected to each other.

Figure-2.4: Process Flow Diagram of Mini Blast Furnace




C2 - 10


2.7.2 SINTER PLANT

The sinter plant complex will consist of sinter machine along withassociated services facilities. The plant capacity has been selected as 0.85MTPA for charging sinter in blast furnace. The sinter plant complex willconsist of the following units,

1. Storage and proportioning unit2. Combined mixing and balling unit3. Sintering and cooling unit4. Waste gas unit5. Main exhaust fan unit6. Cold sinter screening unit7. Plant dedusting unit

The above units will be interconnected by conveyor galleries and junctionhouses for conveying raw fix, finished sinter, and sinter return fines. Allthe iron bearing materials (iron ore fines, flue dust), 100% BF returnfines, 80% of total requirement of limestone, 80% of total requirement ofdolomite, 80% of total requirement of coke breeze are blended in thebase blending yard. Blended mix and corrective additions of limestone(20% of total requirement), dolomite (20% of total requirement) andcoke breeze (20% of total requirement) are received from the raw materialblending yard to the sinter plant proportioning building. Burnt lime willbe carried by lime tanker and fed to lime bin by pneumatic limetransportation system. A brief description of major facilities proposed forthe sinter plant complex is given below.

Proportioning unit: Suitable capacity of storage and proportioning binshas been envisaged for the sinter plant. The bunkers for blended mixand return fines will have single outlet while bunkers for correctiveadditions of crushed limestone, crushed dolomite and crushed cokebreeze will have twin outlets. All the bins will be suitably lined exceptreturn fines bin, which will be self lined. The blended mix, correctiveadditions and in-plant returns will be fed to the common collectingconveyor by electronic belt weigh feeders, whereas, lime will be fed tocommon collecting belt conveyor by loss in weigh feeder. Proportionedmaterial from belt weigh feeders below respective proportioning bins shallbe transported to a combined mixing and nodulizing drum by a commonbelt conveyor.




C2 - 11


Combined mixing and nodulizing unit: Material from belt weighfeeders below respective proportioning bins will be transported to acombined mixing and nodulizing drum by a belt conveyor where thevarious raw materials will be moistened and mixed in drum mixer. Limefrom lime bins will be discharged onto common collecting conveyorthrough lime dosing equipment. A fixed quantity of water of about60% of requirement will be added in the mixing part and the rest variablequantity will be added in the nodulizing part depending on requirement.The raw mix discharged from mixing and nodulizing drum will betransported to sinter plant main building by a belt conveyor.

Sinter plant main building: The sinter plant main building will mainlyconsist of hearth layer and raw mix feeding units, ignition furnace,sinter machine, hot sinter breaker. The sintering machine will comprisecharging and discharging sprockets, drive unit, spring loaded palletcars with high chrome cast steel grate bars, rails, curved guides atcharging and discharge ends, grate bar cleaning device, automaticlubrication system, provision for thermal expansion, wind boxes, windmain with dust hoppers and double cone dust valves, machine Spillagehoppers, sinter machine support structures. The hearth layer (15 - 25mm) will be spread onto the sintering machine first, followed by sintermix. The height of the sinter mix bed onto the machine will be 650mm including 50 mm protective hearth layer height. The hearthlayer is provided for the following reasons:

• Prevent plugging of the passage between grate bars• Prevent the scaling and overheating of the grate bars• Prevent the adhesion of fused sinter to grate bars• Ensure uniform gas distribution through the sinter mix bed

The ignition furnace with post heat hood and pre-heating (before ignitionfurnace) will be installed just after the sinter mix drum feeder. Theignition furnace will have suitably located energy efficient type gas firingburner designed for 2000 kcal/Nm3 of mixed gas. Gas mixing stationand gas boosting station will be located outside sinter plant battery limitapproximately 250 to 350 deg C hot air for the combustion is suppliedfrom waste heat recovery system of sinter cooler. Multicyclone will beprovided at inlet of combustion air fan to supply clean hot air fromdischarge of cooler.

The hot air for combustion will have control by having intake in cold air.The ignition temperature will be 1200 – 1300oC RC Lot burners will be




C2 - 12


provided for start up and safety. Hot air from waste heat recoverysystem of sinter cooler will also be used for preheating of raw materialbefore ignition furnace and post heat hood after ignition furnace. Therecovered waste heat from cooler will be utilized for ignition, postignition and preheating of raw-mix. For suction of air through sintermix bed on the sintering machine two numbers of exhausters will beprovided.

Circular sinter cooler will be used to cool the sinter to less than 100 deg Cafter it is discharged from hot sinter breaker at approximately 800 deg Cup to (-) 150 mm size, so that it can be transported throughconventional conveyor system. Forced draught fans will be provided tocool the sinter in sinter cooler. Deep bed dip rail circular cooler ofadequate capacity will be provided to match the sinter machineproduction with all the associated facilities like cooler fans, heatrecovery system etc. Retention time for the coolers will be of approx. 60minutes.

Cooling of sinter is achieved by up-drafting ambient air through the bedof hot sinter to be cooled. The sinter after being cooled in the sintercooler is transported to the screening house. In the screening house,sinter screening will be carried out in single deck screens arrangedvertically in series. The screen house in sinter plant is a separatebuilding in which all the vibrating screens will be located. Thesescreens are arranged one above the other in order to facilitatesuccessive screening of the gross sinter.




C2 - 13


The process flow of sinter plant is shown in Figure – 2.5.

Figure – 2.5 : Process flow of sinter plant

2.7.3 DRI PLANT

The direct reduction iron plant will be of conventional Rotary Kilntechnology. The rated capacity of the kilns will be 4x350 TPD to produce0.462 MTPA sponge iron. The plant will be suitably designed for conveyortransportation as well as storing system for both iron oxide feed, DRIproduct as well as by product like product fines.

The process converts lump iron ore into highly metallised, passivatediron product. The product is in the form of lumps and contains a variableand controlled percentage of carbon. This is an ideal feed material forquality steel making.

When the temperature reaches a value of about 500-600 deg C, thehematite (Fe2O3), in presence of CO, changes to magnetite (Fe3O4).When the burden reaches the lower zone of the furnace and comes incontact with hotter and richer gas, the magnetite is reduced to wurstite(FeO). The reduction of wurstite to metallic iron is the slowest stage ofthe whole reduction process. It requires high temperatures and gaswith high reduction potential and these conditions are reached in thereducing gas injection zone. The overall reduction process is representedby the following reactions:

Fe2O3 + 3CO 2Fe + 3CO2




C2 - 14


Oxide material handling:The iron oxide material i.e. lump iron ore (sized) will be collected andconveyed for screening in the oxide screening station and then sent tooxide day bins for storage.

The iron ore will be directly sent to the oxide storage bins. Two bins will beearmarked for pellet storage while one bin will store the iron ore lump.About two shifts storage capacity has been planned.

The process employs Rotary Kiln as the main reactor where the reductionof iron ore in the form of iron oxide is carried out with coal as reductant.The inner of steel frame shell kiln will be protected by refractory lining. Thekiln will have a slope of 2.50 down towards the discharge end. Air blowershaving dampers will be provided on the kiln shell in different heating zonesfor introducing air for combustion. Sized iron ore and coal shall be fed in tothe kiln at the feeding end with the help of weigh feeders. Due to the slopeand rotational movement of the kiln the charge will move towards thedischarge end. Temperature measurement and control shall be done withthe help of thermocouples provided in different heating zones of the kiln.Additional coal requirement shall be met by injecting fine coal through thedischarge end of the kiln.

Kiln discharge consisting of mixture of sponge iron and dolochar, mixtureof unreduced iron, uncalcinated limestone, gangue and semi burnt coal,will be passed on to a rotary cooler where water will be sprayed to cool thedischarge mix to about 120°C. The cooler discharge will fall on to a hopperand taken through conveyers for screening of fines and coarse materialsand subsequently subjected to magnetic separation where sponge iron willbe separated from dolochar. The reducing gases generated from thecombustion of the coal will flow in the counter current direction andemerge from the feed end of the kiln which will be maintained at a positivepressure of about +5 mm water column. The flue gases will then passthrough a gravitational Dust Settling Chamber (DSC) and then to the AfterBurner Chamber (ABC) where CO will get converted to non-toxic CO2. Theflue gas at about 900°C to 1000°C, will be taken to the Waste HeatRecovery Boilers (WHRB) to utilize the waste heat content of flue gases.




C2 - 15


Figure – 2.6 : Process flow of DRI Plant

Power Generation from DRI Plant: (30 MW Generations)Waste gases generated from DRI (Sponge Iron) plant contain carbonmonoxide and other volatile matter which after combusted releasessignificant heat. This heat contains significant calorific value - about2300 kcal/Nm3). This heat will be used to produce steam through WasteHeat Recovery Boilers. The high pressure steam will be used to runturbines and generate 30 MW electricity.

2.7.4 Pellet Plant (1.8 MTPA)In the existing project, there are two pellet plants with 0.48 MTPA &0.12 MTPA capacity. M/s SSPL has decided to enhance the capacity ofone of the existing pellet plants i.e. the 1st plant capacity enhancementfrom 0.48 MTPA to 0.6 MTPA. Second Pellet Plant of 0.12 MTPA capacitywill be replaced by 0.6 MTPA capacity pellet plant. In addition, one newpellet plant of 0.6 MTPA capacity is proposed. The final productioncapacity of Pellet Plant after expansion will be 1.8 MTPA. The details ofthe overall scenario with respect to the pellet plant configuration arementioned below,




C2 - 16


Division Plant NameOld Completed New Project

Ultimate ECRequired

PelletPlant

Pellet Plant 1 0.48 MTPA

Capacity enhancement fromexisting 0.48 MTPA to 0.6MTPA(through modification) 1.8 MTPA

(Iron OrePellets)Pellet Plant 2 0.12 MTPA

Replacement of existing 0.12MTPA by 0.6 MTPA

Pellet Plant 3 - New 0.6 MTPA

In pellet plant, the concentrated iron ore fines will be mixed withlimestone, coke breeze and bentonite and grounded in a GrindingUnit. The grounded material is transported pneumatically to mixer.

The mixed material is conveyed to balling disc for making green balls,where water is added. The green balls are called pellets, which arescreened to 9 -16 mm size in a double deck roller screen. Oversizeand undersize material are returned to mixed material bins for reuse.The pellets are fed by conveyor to the travelling grate of induratingfurnace for heat hardening. Mixed gas (blast furnace / coke oven gas) orproducer gas is used as fuel to achieve temperature of 1300oC. Producergas plant is also considered to supply the gaseous fuel requirement ofpellet plant. Heat provides recrystallisation, bonding and impartsstrength to the pellets. The indurated pellets are air-cooled using afan. The cooled pellets are taken to stockpile by belt conveyors afterseparation of hearth and side layers in the hearth layer separation bin.The hearth and side layers are reused in the furnace.

Slurry receiving and filtration: The iron ore will be received by pipeline in slurry form in slurry receiving tanks and filtered in highefficient pressure filters. The iron ore is dewatered (calledconcentrate). The filtrate is clarified and reused in the pellet making.

Mixing: The iron ore concentrate is mixed with additives like cokefines, limestone powder, and bentonite in high intensity mixer and withrequired quantity of water for ideal moisture for next stage of processcalled balling.

Balling: The homogeneous feed is fed to balling discs. Green balls areformed in an inclined pan of 7.5 m diameter, driven by variablefrequency drives.




C2 - 17


Indurations: The green balls are converted to pellets by fired in theindurating furnace. In this process, the wet pellets are dried,preheated, indurated, and cooled on a continuous moving grate withoutintermediate transfers. The indurating burners will be fired with coalgas. The process air introduced for pellet cooling will be circulatedfrom the cooling zone of the grate in a multipass manner to the otherprocess zones. The heat transferred to the air in the cooling zone willbe transferred to the zones for drying and preheating of the greenpellets. The indurating furnace divided in to five zones. The zones areup draft drying, down draft drying, preheating, firing, cooling zones. Theindurating temperature is around 1300 deg C.

Product Handling: Pellet is discharged from end of the machine andscreened to remove materials that are recycled to the hearth layer. Thepellets are stored in sheds.

Figure- 2.7 : Schematic Process Flow of Pellet Plant

2.7.5 INDUCTION FURNACE

It is also proposed to install 5x18 T + 8x8 T numbers of Induction furnacesfor production of 0.5082 MTPA billets.

The plant will produce steel in the form of billets, TMT Bars and Strips &Structural products through IF-CCM-RM route. Steel making will be doneusing induction furnaces. A brief description of the processes is dealt insubsequent paragraphs and the process flow sheet is given below.




C2 - 18


Steel Making by Induction FurnaceThe greatest advantage of the Induction Furnace is its low capital costcompared with other types of Melting Units. Its installation is relativelyeasier and its operation simpler. Among other advantages, there is verylittle heat loss from the furnace as the bath is constantly covered andthere is practically no loss during its operation. The molten metal in anInduction Furnace is circulated automatically by electromagnetic action sothat when alloy additions are made, a homogeneous product is ensured inminimum time. The time between tap and charge, the charging time,power delays etc. are items of utmost importance is meeting the objectiveof maximum output in tones/hours at a low operational cost. Thedisadvantage of the induction furnace is that the melting process requiresusually selected scrap because major refining is not possible.

The process for manufacturing steel may be broadly divided into thefollowing stages:

i) Melting the charge mixed of steel & Iron scrapii) Ladle teeming practice for Casting (OR)iii) Direct teeming practice for billet Casting unladdable teeming machine




C2 - 19


The furnace is switched on, current starts flowing at a high rate and acomparatively low voltage through the induction coils of the furnace,producing an induced magnetic field inside the central space of the coilswhere the crucible is located. The induced magnetic fluxes thus generatedout through the packed charge in the crucible, which is placed centrallyinside the induction coil.

As the magnetic fluxes generated out through the scraps and complete thecircuit, they generate and induce eddy current in the scrap. This inducededdy current, as it flows through the highly resistive bath of scrap,generates tremendous heat and melting starts. It is thus apparent that themelting rate depends primarily on two things (1) the density of magneticfluxes and (2) compactness of the charge. The charge mixed arrangementhas already been described. The magnetic fluxes can be controlled byvarying input of power to the furnace, especially the current and frequency.

In a medium frequency furnace, the frequency range normally variesbetween 150-10K cycles/second. This heat is developed mainly in theouter rim of the metal in the charge but is carried quickly to the center byconduction. Soon a pool of molten metal forms in the bottom causing thecharging to sink. At this point any remaining charge mixed is addedgradually. The eddy current, which is generated in the charge, has otheruses. It imparts a molten effect on the liquid steel, which is thereby stirredand mixed and heated more homogeneously. This stirring effect isinversely proportional to the frequency of the furnace and so that furnacefrequency is selected in accordance with the purpose for which the furnacewill be utilized.

The melting continues will all the charge is melted and the bath develops aconvex surface. However, as the convex surface is not favorable to slagtreatment, the power input is then naturally decreased to flatten theconvexity and to reduce the circulation rate when refining under areducing slag. The reduced flow of the liquid metal accelerates thepurification reactions by constantly bringing new metal into close contactwith the slag. Before the actual reduction of steel is done, the liquid steelwhich might contain some trapped oxygen is first treated with somesuitable deoxidizer. When no purification is attempted, the chiefmetallurgical advantages of the process attributable to the stirring action




C2 - 20


are uniformity of the product, control over the super heat temperature andthe opportunity afforded by the conditions of the melt to control de-oxidation through proper addition.

As soon as the charge has melted clear and de-oxidising ions have ceased,any objectionable slag is skimmed off, and the necessary alloying elementsare added. When these additives have melted and diffused through thebath of the power input may be increased to bring the temperature ofmetal up to the point most desirable for pouring. The current is thenturned off and the furnace is tilted for pouring into a ladle. As soon aspouring has ceased, any slag adhering to the wall of the crucible iscrapped out and the furnace is readied for charging again.

As the furnace is equipped with a higher cover over the crucible very littleoxidation occurs during melting. Such a cover also serves to preventcooling by radiation from the surface heat loss and protecting the metal isunnecessary, though slags are used in special cases. Another advantage ofthe induction furnace is that there is hardly any melting loss comparedwith the arc furnace.

CONTINUOUS CASTING MACHINEThe molten steel from the IF is cast in a continuous casting machine toproduce billets. In some processes, the cast shape is torch cut to lengthand transported hot to the hot rolling mill for further processing. Othersteel mills have reheat furnaces. Steel billets are allowed to cool, and thenbe reheated in a furnace prior to rolling the billets into bars or othershapes.

The process is continuous because liquid steel is continuously poured intoa ‘bottomless’ mould at the same rate as a continuous steel casting isextracted.

1) Before casting begins a dummy bar is used to close the bottom of themould.

2) A ladle of molten steel is lifted above the casting machine and a hole inthe bottom of the ladle is opened, allowing the liquid steel to pour intothe mould to form the required shape.

3) As the steel’s outer surface solidifies in the mould, the dummy bar isslowly withdrawn through the machine, pulling the steel with it.




C2 - 21


4) Water sprays along the machine to cool/ solidify the steel.5) At the end of the machine, the steel is cut to the required length by gas

torches.

2.7.6 ELECTRIC ARC FURNACEIt is also proposed to install 1x45 T number of Electric furnace forproduction of 0.4 MTPA billets.

In furnace of this type, the electric energy is used to form an electric arc whichheats the metal by radiant heat evolved.

An EAF is a furnace that heats charged material by means of an electric arc. EAFtemperatures can be up to 1,800oC.

The furnace has a steel shell in the form of a tapered cylinder with a sphericalbottom. The shell has a refractory lining inside. The reaction chamber of thefurnace is covered from above by a removable roof made of refractory bricks heldby a roof ring. The furnace has a main charging door and a tap hole with tappingspout. It is fed with a three phase alternating current and has three electrodesfastened in electrode clamps which are connected by means of a sleeve with amovable electrode stand. Current is supplied via water cooled flexible cables andwater cooled copper tubes. The furnace rests upon two support sectors which canroll on the furnace stand to tilt the furnace towards the main door and towardsthe tap hole for tapping, the tilting motion being affected by a rack mechanism.

The furnace is charged from the top by means of a pan. To open the reactionchamber for charging, the furnace roof which is suspended from chains is raisedup to the gantry. The latter together with the roof and electrodes, can be swungtowards the tapping spout. A rotating mechanism is provided to rotate the furnaceshell through an angle of 40 degrees in both directions from the normal position.The furnace also has an electromagnetic stirring device for intermixing of moltenmetal.

Figure- 2.8 :A Modern EAF Schematic Diagram




C2 - 22


Although electricity provides most of the energy for EAF steelmaking,supplemental heating from oxy-fuel and oxygen injection is used. The majoradvantage of EAF steelmaking is that it does not require molten iron supply. Byeliminating the need for blast furnaces and associated plant processes like cokeoven batteries, EAF technology has facilitated the proliferation of mini-mills,which can operate economically at a smaller scale than larger integratedsteelmaking. EAF steelmaking can use a wide range of scrap types, as well as DRIand molten iron (up to 70%). This recycling saves virgin raw materials and theenergy required for converting them. The EAF operates as a batch melting process,producing heats of molten steel with tap-to- tap times for modern furnaces of lessthan 60 minutes.

Process Description

The steel melting shop has been designed to produce liquid steel andcast the same in continuous casting machine to form billets, blooms andingots of various specifications. Electric Arc Furnaces (1 x 45 ton) hasbeen proposed in the steel melting shop for production of alloy steeland low carbon steel.

The hot metal produced in blast furnace will be taken todesulphurization plant. The desulphurised metal is taken in the transferladle by injection of a mixture of Calcined lime, calcium carbide (55%)and magnesium (97%) through a refractory coated immersed lance.Nitrogen is used a carrier gas. De-slagging and fume extraction facilityhas been considered. The desulphurised metal is taken for steel makingin Steel Melting Shop comprising Electric Arc Furnace technology. TheEAF will be AC Arc type, bottom tapping, water cooled side walls,roof side graphite electrode, foamy slag formation, continuouscharging of hot DRI through roof, mechanized charging of lime, ferroalloyand scrap through roof and coke / coal powder by injection into furnace.Heating, deoxidation, alloying and homogenization of chemicalcomposition takes place in the Laddle Refining Furnace. Overheadbins are provided for storing lime, deoxidizers and ferroalloys.

The metallic charge to the Electric Arc Furnace (EAF) is desulphurisedhot metal and sponge iron in defined ratios. DRI comes directly from theDR Plant by conveyors. The hot metal comes from the blast furnace byladle carried by a car, which is driven by a loco. The ladles are liftedfrom the car by EOT crane and kept aside in an area earmarked forthem. Lime and Ferroalloys are stored in a silo and filled by bucket




C2 - 23


elevator. A belt conveyor carries them to day bins. A gallery between theEAF and LF bays is provided for Lime and Ferro-Alloy day bins. Ferro-alloys are filled in the day bins with a bucket lifted by a hoist in thegallery itself. These bins feed the ladle at EAF and LRF.

Hot metal is charged into the EAF with the help of EOT crane. The roof isswung open and scrap is charged. The cycle starts with the charging ofScrap on the hot heel of the EAF, after this the hot metal is chargedfrom top (slag door side). Arcing starts and melts part of the scrap andclears it from the door. Intensive oxygen blowing starts and lasts forabout 15-17 minutes for reducing carbon. Oxygen lancing is donethrough the slag door with manual door lances. DRI is continuously fedfrom the time the lancing starts. After the oxygen lancing is over arcingstarts. This lasts for 25-30 minutes. During this period phosphorus isreduced and slag is over run from slag door. Towards the end of thearcing, oxygen lancing is done again along with lime dosing formaintaining foaming slag and final dephosphorisation. The tap-to-taptime for fettling, slag-off, superheating, etc. is around 65 minutes.Samples are taken during the heat for measurement of C, P and Npercentages followed by corrective action. Slag is poured into theslag pots on a car and taken out. Slag generation is around 5% of thetotal charge.

The liquid metal is tapped into ladle at about 1620oC and ferroalloysare charged into the ladle during tapping and then taken to LaddleRefining Furnace. Desulphurisation, chemistry correction, partialdegassing and temperature control activities are done in the LRF. Theprocess lasts for about 30-40 minutes. Purging for stirring is donethroughout the process, through porous plug from the bottom. Afterrefining, the Laddle is lifted by the EOT crane and transported to theContinuous Casting Machine (CCM) where it is placed on the turret.The turret rotates by 180o. The Laddle pouring hole is automaticallypositioned over the tundish. The slide gate is opened hydraulically andthe pouring starts into the tundish. From the tundish liquid steel flowto moulds which shapes and forms the slabs. The hot slab goes througha water spray chamber and comes to a straightening cum withdrawalmachine which is a set of hydraulically pressed rollers. The slab is cutto required sizes and comes to a run out roller table. In case of slabcaster, the slabs are cut by oxy-propane torch cutting machine and thecut slabs are transported through run out roller table to cross transferand fed to plate mill and hot strip mill.




C2 - 24


Figure – 2.9 - Process flow of Electric Arc Furnace

2.7.7 ROLLING MILLThe company is planned to set up Rolling Mill for production of 1.0 MTPALong products as a finished product. The proposed capacity of Rolling Millis as follows,

Division Plant Name Old Completed New ProjectFinal RollingMill Capacity

RollingMILL

Long ProductsMill - 1

0.048MTPA

Capacity enhancement fromExisting 0.48 MTPA to 0.15MTPA(through modification)

1 MTPA(LongProducts)

Long Product Mill- 2 0.055008

MTPA

Capacity enhancement fromExisting 0.055008 MTPA to0.15 MTPA(through modification)

Long Product Mill- 3

0.196992MTPA

Capacity enhancement fromExisting 0.196992 MTPA to0.2 MTPA

Long Product Mill- 4 -

0.3MTPA

Long Product Mill- 5 -

0.2MTPA

Rolling mill consists of set of equipment together will produce the saidquantity. Rolling mill will primarily comprise of one tunnel typetemperature equalizing-cum-holding furnace with roughing and finishingstrand, one pendulum type bar and cobble shear, one high pressure de-




C2 - 25


scaling station, run out roller table equipped with turnover cooling bedalong with auxiliary facilities and roll shop equipment.

Operating parametersThe net operating hours of the mill are affected by various factorsconsidering integrated direct linked operation with furnaces, ladlefurnace and bloom caster unit, such as relining of furnaces, breakdownand mismatching of operational requirements between the units.Considering the effect of the external factors enumerated above and theoperation and maintenance requirements of the mill itself, the net annualoperating hours of the mill will be about 7200.

Product weighing stationA product weighing station will be included to provide weight output tocomputer tracking and logging systems and print out a tag forattachment to the finished coil.

Product marking machineA marking machine will be provided to print bar data on outer wrap ofthe coil. The machine will comprise of the frame, print head, ink system,etc. The signals for marking data will be fed through PC and receivedthrough PLC / microprocessor system.

Roll grinding and bearing inspection facilitiesThe roll grinding and bearing inspection facilities will be installed in aseparate roll shop which will be located adjacent to the main mill bay.

Shop layoutThe proposed mill equipment and other associated facilities will behoused in multibay building consisting one bay for tunnel furnace andtwo parallel bays for mill and roll grinding and bearing inspectionfacilities. The main equipment of the mill and storage area will be locatedin a bay of 30 m width having about 300 m length. This bay will beserved by EOT cranes. The motor room for the mills will be located in abay of 21 m width and 63 m length, and will be served by one 45 tcapacity EOT crane. All technological basements like oil cellars, hydraulicpump accumulator stations, strip cooling pump house, etc. will belocated in the mill bay. The water circulation system including scale pitwill be located outside the main mill building.




C2 - 26


TMT ProcessBy adopting thermo mechanically treatment process higher strength ofTMT bars is obtained. In this process, steel bars get intensive coolingimmediately after rolling. When the temperature is suddenly reduced tomake surface layer hard, the internal core is hot at the same time. Due tofurther cooling in atmosphere and heat from the core, the temperingtakes place. This process is expected to improve properties such as yieldstrength, ductility and toughness of TMT bars. With above properties,TMT steel is highly economical and safe for use. TMT steel bars are morecorrosion resistant than Tor steel.

2.7.8 COKE OVENThe coke oven complex will have one module producing 3,00,000 TPAcoke.

In this process, the coal to be charged in oven is first converted into a cakethrough stamping process and then charged into oven. The oven will beprovided with self-adjusting suction pressure controller for individual ovenas well as a changer controller at chimney base in order to control thermalregime of Coke Oven Battery. The major facilities envisaged are as under:

Coal Preparation and Proportioning Plant Coke Oven Battery Proper Coke Screening Plant Gas Cleaning Heat Recovery System and Power Plant Auxiliary production facilities like maintenance shop, laboratory,

warehouse etc.

Coal Preparation& Proportioning PlantThe prime objective of a coal preparation plant is to feed consistent qualityof coal to coke oven batteries for production of required quality of BF coke.A separate coal yard will be provided near the Coke oven battery. Coal willbe received through rail wagons, self-discharging trucks & tipper system.

The unloading and loading system is designed to capacity of 100t/h, whilethe blending, crushing and feeding system is designed to capacity of100t/h.

The cleaned coal shall be fed into the coal hopper. Appropriate number ofcoal blending hoppers shall be provided based on the coking coal types,




C2 - 27


and electronic belt scale shall be provide below the coal blending hopperfor measuring the coal blending proportion. The coal blending hoppersshall be welded with steel, and electrical vibrator shall be provided on theouter wall to ensure no sticking or blocking.

Two back-impact plate hammer crushers shall be selected for crushing ofraw material coal. Permanent magnetic iron remover shall be providedbefore raw materials enter the crusher.

The coal preparation plant is mainly composed of cleaned coal yard, coalreceiving and blending hopper, crusher room and cleaned coal beltcorridor, for purpose of stripping, loading, coal blending, crushing andother tasks so that blended coal of required grain size shall be delivered tothe coal tower of the coke oven.

The coal preparation plant shall be continuously operated to 330 Daysevery year and production personnel shall be allocated to three-shiftoperations

The major facilities envisaged are as under:

Supply of coals3-4 grades of coal Imported and indigenous will be blended to make chargemix. In actual practice, coal supply will depend upon actual over all receiptpatterns and accordingly blend composition is to be adjusted keeping inview the qualitative parameters of BF coke required.

This would also require laboratory tests for establishing the most optimumcoal blend.

Brief Description of Coke oven PlantCoke quenching system consists of Coke quenching pump house,quenching tower, coke dust trap device, Coke fines sedimentation pond,clean water pond, coke fines dewatering system. A coke fines bucket craneis placed over the sedimentation pond to periodically remove the coke finesfrom the pond. The coke fines removed from the pond is used in sinterplant and Ferro alloy plant.

The coke is mainly quenched by the water entering at the bottom of thecoke box of the quenching car as well as by the rising vapor. By floodingthe coke box from the bottom, the coke is quickly cooled down creating




C2 - 28


steam which catapults the coke high up into the shaft. As the coke fallsdown the small loose breeze coke particles are separating from the lumps,which has a stabilizing effect to the coke. Furthermore, the quick coolingdown of the coke reducing the development of unwanted gas emissions.

Figure – 2.10 - Process flow of Coke Oven Plant

The Coke quenching tower is made of a reinforced concrete structure toaccommodate the second set of emission control facilities and vapor spraysystem. The two stages of baffle plates fastened on supporting structuresof wood are separating the dust from the quenching vapor. The baffleplates are arranged louver-like in a roof type pattern. The baffles of thelower stage are made of stainless steel, the baffles of the upper stage are ofspecial plastic material. Further, two stages of vapor spraying systemarranged below each stage of baffle plates. The piping is made of stainlesssteel and contains nozzles to spray the water on the rising vapours. By thewater spray nozzles, located below the dust catching louvers, the risingvapours are cooled and dust particles are washed down. The water forspraying of the vapours is extracted from the clean water pond of thequench water treatment plant. Dust particles not washed down byspraying are largely removed by the baffle plates installed above. Further,the arrangement of the louvers is designed to ensure an equal distributionof the vapours over the full section of the quench tower stack. By thissystem, the required limitation of dust in the quenching vapor is achieved.




C2 - 29


Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP) will be installed in Coke Oven after WasteHeat Recovery Boiler. The outlet of ESP shall be vented to atmospherethrough a stack.

Power From Coke Oven Plant: (15 MW Generations)Waste gases generated from coke ovens contain carbon monoxide andother volatile matter which after combusted releases significant heat.This heat contains significant calorific value (GCV of mixed fuel -about 2300 kcal/Nm3). This heat will be used to produce steam throughWaste Heat Recovery Boilers. The high pressure steam will be used torun turbines and generate 15 MW electricity.

2.7.9 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PLANT

M/s SSPL is planning to install 0.1 MTPA Ductile Irons Pipes Plant. TheManufacturing Process consists of the following processes steps,

1. Molten Hot Metal preparation and Chemistry correction2. Magnesium treatment3. Centrifugal Casting4. Core Making5. Mold Maintenance6. Heat Treatment by Annealing Furnace7. Zinc Coating8. Hydraulic Pressure Testing9. Cement Mortar Lining10. Bitumen Coating11. Finishing

A ductile iron pipe is produced with centrifugal casting method. Themolten ductile iron is poured into a rapidly spinning water-cooled mouldand centrifugal force results in an even spread of iron around thecircumference.

Molten Hot Metal Preparation: In Blast Furnace Hot Metal, Carbonpercentage (%) is usually 4.2% to 4.3%. But in DIP, Carbon percentage is3.6%. Therefore Steel Scrap with 0.3% Carbon is to be added by about12% to 15% of BF Hot Metal.

Magnesium Treatment: During this process, molten Hot metal treatedwith Ferro Alloys, like Silico-Manganese, Magnesium, carbon etc. and




C2 - 30


melted with 1460-1520°C of temperature. The George Fischer Converterprocess has been carried out in the crucibles at about 1500°C by tundishtreatment and it was performed by means of 2,1% of Fe-Si-Mg. Next,molten iron will be poured to the cast process.

Centrifugal Casting: Centrifugal casting requires water cooling metallicand centrifugal casting machine that works automatically. Types of themachine are divided as the pipe dimension (DN). Here For example, thereare machine for DN80-300mm, machine for DN350-700mm or machine forDN700-1000mm.

During the process, the treated liquid iron is poured into spinning mouldthrough a runner. The hot metal starts solidification in the water cooledmould and is extracted as complete pipe. When the molten iron enters themould spinning, it needs water high speed spin through the long throughfor the water cooling system. During this process, the solidificationprocess will be started. Finally, the extractor will extract the pipe after itsolidified completely.

Core Making: Core making equipment consists of manual machine andautomatic machine known as core-making jets. Silicon sand, solidifyingagent and resin will be mixed and rolled. Then it’s moved to the hopper ofthe core-making jets machine with a conveyor. Core making process willbe started by jetting that material into core box. When it’s solidifiedcompletely core will be made and tested. Next, core will be conveyed tocasting process.

Mould Maintenance: To remove the rust in the internal surface of a mould,it will be grounded with sand wheel before it’s dotted with penning head toincrease its crack resistance. If cracks found on the mould surface, it willbe removed by turning the mould and welding the turning area. Nextgrinding and penning will accomplish the maintenance.

Annealing/ Heat Treatment : The process consists of heating section, heatholding section, slow cooling section and fast cooling section. Ductile ironpipe will be entered to this 52 meters long machine and rolled on it.Certainly its temperature will be controlled.

Zinc Coating: Arc melted Zinc/ Zinc-alloy is sprayed on the outer surfaceof pipe.




C2 - 31


EN 545/598 mandates a minimum zinc content of 130 g/m2 (with localminima of 110 g/m2 at 99.99% purity), and a minimum average finishinglayer thickness of 20 µm .

Finishing and Hydrostatic Testing: Pipe dimension will be checked hereand it’s important to remove the fins on the internal surface. A Hydrostaticpressure testing will be done in 10 seconds with proper pressure as perthe following chart

Hydraulic pressure for hydrostatic testingNominal Diameter (mm) Hydraulic Pressure (Mpa):80=50mpa=300, 200=50mpa =600, 700=50mpa =1000, 1100=50mpa=2000

Cement Lining: Pipe will be rolled with low speed and it will be sprayedwith material. This material includes cement, sand, and water. Pipe will berolled with high speed to move excessive water and deposit cement. Naturecure will be given to cement lining. Grinder will smooth its surface

Bitumen Coating: As zinc coating, bitumen will be sprayed to pipe. But itwill be done to internal and external surface. Bitumen will reduce thecorrosion on the external surface.

Finishing: This process includes marking (trade mark), painting if it’srequired and packing. It will pack with thick wood and bundled with steelbelt.

Ductile Iron Metallurgy: Ductile Iron is an iron with elementary alloy suchas carbon, Si, Mn and Mg. Commonly, the carbon content on its structureis 3 % or more. Ductile iron is one of the most important engineeringmaterials, in view of its excellent cast-ability, significantly bettermechanical properties and low cost. Simply, it’s similarly to steel instrength, toughness, ductility and hardness.

2.7.10 PRODUCER GAS PLANTIn the proposed project a 36,000 Nm3/hr capacity producer gas plantwill be installed. Producer gas is fuel gas that is generated from coal. Airis passed over the red-hot carbonaceous fuel and carbon monoxide isproduced. The reaction is exothermic and proceeds as follows:

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carbon_monoxide

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Exothermic




C2 - 32


2C + O2 + 3.73 N2 → 2CO+ 3.73 N2

The nitrogen in the air remains unchanged and dilutes the gas, giving it avery low calorific value. The concentration of carbon monoxide in the"ideal" producer gas was considered to be 34.7% carbon monoxide(carbonic oxide) and 65.3% nitrogen. After "scrubbing", to remove tar, thegas may be used to power gas turbines (which are well-suited to fuels oflow calorific value), spark ignited engines (where 100% petrol fuelreplacement is possible) or diesel internal combustion engines (where 40%- 15% of the original diesel fuel is still used to ignite the gas).

2.7.11 CEMENT GRINDING UNIT

The Company is planned to install 1.2 MTPA Cement Grinding Unit in theproposed expansion project. The Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) is a kindof Blended Cement which is produced by either inter-grinding of OPCclinker along with gypsum and pozzolanic materials in certain proportionsor grinding the OPC clinker, gypsum and Pozzolanic materials separatelyand thoroughly blending them in certain proportions.

The manufacturing process of the plant comprises of grinding of clinkerwith Gypsum and Fly ash. This involves the use of Fly ash as a resource. Noclinker manufacturing will be involved. There will be no generation of wastewater or any obnoxious emissions from the plant. The cement dustemission during packing and grinding operations will be collected in the bagfilters and recycled.

Manufacturing Process: The clinker will be ground in Mills with gypsum toa fine powder in order to regulate the setting time of cement and to gain themost important property of cement, which is compressive strength. Toproduce PPC type of cement, the required additives will be ground withclinker and gypsum to a very fine powder and then used as desired. Used invarying proportions, these additions, which are of natural or industrialorigin, give the cement specific properties such as reduced permeability,greater resistance to sulfates and aggressive environment, improved workability, or higher-quality finishes.

The Mills will grind the feed to a fine powder. The cement will ground to afineness of not less than 3000 square cm. per gram as determined bymeasurement of the specific surface. The Mill discharge will then fed to an

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrogen

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Calorific_value

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tar

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gas_turbine




C2 - 33


elevator, which takes the material to a separator, which separates fineproduct and the coarse. The latter will sent to the mill inlet for regrindingand the fine product will be stored in concrete silos. The cement stored insilos will be then packed and delivered in different ways, e.g. bagged or bulk,as per the customer‘s requirement.

Raw Material Receiving and HandlingThe major Raw Materials like Gypsum and Clinker will be transportedinside the factory premises via Trucks and thereafter stored in respectiveMaterial Silos. These will be transported further from the respective silos tothe hoppers via Belt Conveyors. Further as and when required, these rawmaterials will be fed into the Horizontal Cement Grinding Mill throughWeigh Feeders, which keep a check on the right proportion of all rawmaterials. Another important Raw Material, namely Fly Ash will betransported to the Grinding Mill via pipes in a closed environment so as toeliminate the risk of Air pollution from Fly Ash.

Storage & Packing:The ground cement will be conveyed to cement silos where it will beextracted and packed in HDPE or PP bags by electronic rotary packingmachines and dispatched to consumers by road. Mechanized loadingsystem for loading of packed bags on trucks will be envisaged.

2.7.12 POWER PLANTM/s SPSL proposed to install 45 MW capacity Captive Power Plantutilizing waste heat from proposed Sponge Iron Plant (30 MW) andproposed coke oven plant (15 MW).

The boiler will be complete with evaporator steam drum, mud drum, bankof super heaters, economizer, attemperator, air fans, ESP, internal pipingetc. Soot blowing and super heater attemperation system will also beprovided. Boiler will be provided with blow down tanks (IBD, CBD etc),sample cooler.

Flue gas cleaning systemThe exhaust gases will be discharged from boiler to ESP and then into theatmosphere through induced Draft fan and chimney. The pressure drop inthe boiler ducts and ESP will be kept to match with the requirement ofexisting ID fan. The boiler will be of semi-outdoor type with a weather




C2 - 34


canopy and side covering of trapeze corrugated steel sheets or othersuitable materials, as available.

The gases passing out of WHRBs will be passed through multi-fieldElectrostatic Precipitator before releasing the gas, having huge quantity ofdust particles, into the atmosphere. The ESP will be installed between theWHRB and the stack. The dust content in the gas, downstream of ESPshall be limited to 30 mg/Nm3. The ESP Unit will be provided withtransformers, rectifier and controls. The dust particles will be collectedbelow ESP in hoppers and conveyed by means of conveyors orpneumatically and stored in silos. This will be subsequently disposed offby trucks.

2.8 UTILITIES

PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM – WASTE HEAT RECOVERY BASED POWER PLANT

DRI Plant &Coke Oven Plant




C2 - 35


2.8.1 Storage FacilitiesRaw materials like Iron Ore Fines/Lump, Lime Stone, Dolomite, Quartzite,Bentonite, Coal etc. will be stored in the raw material yards from wherethey will be conveyed to the stock house kept in day bins by feeding intoground hopper and conveyors.

2.8.2 Compressed air systemMajor utilization of compressed air will be in pneumatic cylinder of variousplant units and especially for rotary shears in Rolling Mill. Air receiverwith adequate capacity will also be provided to cope up the temporarypeak requirement of various units. The compressors, dryers andassociated pipe work will be located in one place, within a building.Compressed air to various consumers will be distributed throughcompressed air piping system.

2.8.3 Air conditioning and ventilation systemsVentilation system with fan-filter units will be provided for protection ofequipment from excessive thermal loading. These systems will generally beinstalled in the electric rooms and other closed premises requiringprotection of equipment.

Air conditioning will be provided in the plant control rooms, PLC room,laboratory and Plant offices and Administrative Building. The airconditioning will be achieved by providing window model/package type airconditioners.

2.8.4 Communication SystemSuitable communication network has been envisaged for quick transmittalof information within the plant. The network shall contain automaticinternal telephone system (PAX) and two-way audio communicationsystem.

2.8.5 Auxiliary facilitiesVarious services facilities like repair and maintenance shop, central stores,administrative building, canteen, guesthouse, time office, laboratory etc.will be provided during construction of expansion phase.

2.8.6 Power




C2 - 36


The estimated power demand of the Steel Plant after expansion will be 232MW. The power requirement will be met from 136 MW capacity CaptivePower Plant after proposed expansion. Balance Power will be drawn fromstate grid.

Unit wise Power Demand (existing, Under implementation & proposedUnits) breakup for the Steel Plant is presented below,

POWER DEMAND WITH UNIT WISE BREAKUP

2.8.7 Oxygen Plant

Air separation unit (commonly called oxygen plant) will be installed tomeet the requirement of oxygen, nitrogen and argon for the steel plant.ASU will have facilities for generation of oxygen, nitrogen and argon atthe required pressures and produced by air separation process basedon low-pressure cryogenic cycle and double column rectification.

Oxygen will be required for oxygen enrichment in the blast furnace,blowing in the electric arc furnace, secondary refining, cutting of slabsin continuous casting plant, and for general purpose use in various




C2 - 37


units of the steel plant. Nitrogen will be mainly required as carrier gasin coal dust injection system, bell less top equipment for blast furnace,DRI unit and also for occasional purging of fuel gas pipelines andequipment. Argon will be required for shrouding in the tundish andmould in the continuous casting plant, stirring in ladle.

2.9 WATER SUPPLY FACILITIES

Water systems of the Plant shall comprise of the following: Make-up water Re-circulating water Once through water Emergency water Drinking water Fire water Dust suppression water

Water will be mainly required for cooling of equipment, dust suppressionetc. Space provision has been kept in the Plant General Layout forinstallation of an intake well pump, raw water treatment plant, reservoiretc.

Emergency water system:Emergency water will be required to cool the vital parts of cooler duringthe transition period between normal power failure and emergency powersupply. Emergency water will also be required for cooling of vitalequipment of other Production Units.

Emergency water shall be supplied from a structural overhead tank.

Drinking and sanitary water system:Drinking and sanitary water requirement for the plant is met fromdrinking water overhead tank. A portion of the make-up water will bedisinfected and will be stored in the overhead tank for further distributionto consuming points and for fire fighting.

Fire water system:The emergency water pipelines will be led throughout the steel divisioncomplex for fire fighting. These fire fighting pipelines will be connected tothe emergency water storage tank. In addition to the fire fighting pipelines,additional fire hydrants would also be provided at suitable locations.

Water softening unit and DM plant




C2 - 38


Water softening plant and DM plant will be installed for supply of softmake-up water/ DM make-up water to various closed-loop soft/ DMmake-up water re-circulation circuits.

Distribution pipe work:In general, mild steel pipes are considered for re-circulating and make-upwater piping. Mainly buried pipes are considered except for shop internalpipes. Pipe work shall comprise all necessary valves, fittings, hydrants etc.

Source of waterDaily water requirement for the total Project will be around 12,500 m3/day(Existing Units: 5092 m3/day, Units being Implemented: 1434 m3/day &Proposed Units: 5867 m3/day) including Domestic Demand 107 m3/day,which will be sourced from Ajay river / ADDA Supply.

Unit wise Water Demand (existing, under implementation & proposedUnits) breakup for the Steel Plant is presented below,




C2 - 39


WATER DEMAND WITH UNIT WISE BREAKUP

Raw water treatment and filtration plantA raw water pump house of RCC construction along with treatment plant,filtration plant and make-up water pump house are proposed to beprovided at raw water reservoir to meet the make-up water requirement ofthese units. Make-up water will be pumped through MS pipeline todifferent plant consumers.

Overhead tanksOverhead tanks will be provided for supply of emergency water to criticalconsumers for a short duration in the event of interruption in normal




C2 - 40


cooling water supply. The overhead tanks will be multi-compartment type,each compartment serving emergency water requirements of individualconsumers.

Water Pollution Control and ConservationWaste water generated from the different areas of the plant will be treatedto the desired extent in suitable treatment facilities and recycled back tothe process, as far as practicable. This will ensure adequate reuse of waterin the respective re-circulating systems and economizing on the make-upwater requirement.

Sewage generated from toilet blocks etc. shall be treated in the existingSewage Treatment Plant (which will be augmented as required) and thetreated effluent shall be collected in the existing sump, located in a lowlying area. The water thus collected shall be used for dust suppression atraw material handling system, landscaping etc.

Thus, Water system will be designed for “Zero Discharge” wherein alldischarges will be treated and reused in the plant.

Surface run-off will be settled in a settling basin prior to reuse/disposal.

2.10 FIRE FIGHTING FACILITIESMany working premises in a steel plant have hazardous and fire proneenvironment. To protect the working personnel, equipment andmachineries, fire fighting measures have been planned for the proposedproject.

Fire protection facilitiesIn order to combat any occurrence of fire in plant premises, the followingfire protection facilities have been envisaged for the various units of theplant.

Portable fire extinguishersAll plant units will be provided with adequate number of portable fireextinguishers to be used as first aid fire appliances. The distribution andelection of extinguishers will be done in accordance with the requirementof IS: 2190-91.




C2 - 41


Hydrant systemA fire hydrant network system has been envisaged for the proposedexpansion project. Internal hydrants will be provided at suitable locationsand different hydrants will be provided normally along the road and in theclose vicinity of the units to meet the additional requirement of water forextinguishing fire.

Automatic systemFor oil cellars control rooms and computer rooms, automatic fireextinguishing system has been envisaged.

In addition to the yard fire hydrant system, the fire protection systemsenvisaged for the plant are as follows:

Internal fire hydrant for multi storied buildings to be tapped-off fromthe outdoor fire water header

Fire detection and alarm system for electrical rooms, cablebasements/cellars, cable tunnels, selected oil/hydraulic cellars

Portable fire extinguishers such as CO2, foam and dry chemical powderin all areas of the plant with fire hazard.

2.11 MANPOWER PLANNINGOperation and maintenance of proposed plant require human resources indifferent categories like managers, engineers of different discipline likemetallurgical, mechanical, electrical, electronics, computer, civil,structural, chemical, etc., highly skilled, skilled and semi-skilled workforce in different disciplines, commercial, accountants and financialmanagers, unskilled labour force, clerical, security personal, etc.

Factory human resourcesIn order to operate and maintain the plant facilities, including its technicaland general administration needs, the estimated additional manpowerrequirement for the proposed project has been estimated to be 7000persons (including Labour Contractors). The above estimate covers the topmanagement, middle and junior level executives and other supporting staff.

2.12 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENTThe main solid waste generated from the units is slag from Blast Furnace,Induction Furnace & Electric Arc Furnace, Tar & Ash from Producer GasPlant, dust from ESP & Bag Filters. The various waste materials arising




C2 - 42


out of the technological processes would be re-utilised to the extentpossible.

Adequate Dust Extraction Systems (ESP, Bag filters & Cyclones) will beplanned. All dust captured in these Pollution Control Equipment will beused in Sinter Plant.

Dolo-char generated in DRI units will be used in CFBC boiler. The fly ashsold as a raw material for cement plant and also used for brickmanufacturing and land filling. End Cuts & Scrap from CCM & RollingMill will be used in SMS. Mill scales generated from CCM and RM will beused in sinter plant. Coke Breeze from Coke Oven Plant will be used inSinter Plant. Dust from APC Devices of Sinter plant, Pellet plant & Cementplant will be 100% recycled in the process. The hot slag generated from IFand EAF will be transferred to slag yard after cooling and scrap recovery. Itwill be used for Road construction / Land filling purpose, Paver BlockMaking after recovering metal from Slag Crushing unit.

Besides, there will be generation of Used/Spent Oil in very small quantity.Used oils removed from machineries, gear boxes, compressors etc. will becollected in drums and temporarily stored in specifically earmarked areas.They will be disposed through the approved agencies.

Thus, all solid wastes generated in the Plant will either be reused /recycled in various Production Units or will be sold / utilised for landfilling and other gainful purposes.

Solid waste generation and its disposal from the proposed units arepresented in Table-2.2.

TABLE-2.2SOLID WASTES & THEIR UTILIZATION FROM THE PROPOSED UNITS

Sl.No.

Type Quantity inTons/Year

Utilization

1. Dolochar from 4X350 TPDDRI Kilns

1,11,000 To be used in FBC power plant.

2. Slag from 1x450 m3 MBF 1,63,800 To be used for Cementmaking.

3. Slag from (5X18 T + 8X8 T)Induction Furnaces

61,000 Slag will be used for RoadConstruction purpose / other




C2 - 43


civil construction purpose.

4. Tar Sludge from Producergas plant

12,000 Sold to WBPCB authorizedvendor.

5. Coal Ash from PGP 47,500 To be used for Makingconstruction materials

6 Dust from ESP and BagFilters of Sinter Plant

50,000 To be reused in process

7 Dust from ESP and BagFilters of Pellet Plant

1,40,700 To be reused in process

8 Dust from GCP and BagFilters of Blast Furnace

60,200 To be reused in Sinter Plant

9 Dust from ESP and BagFilters of DRI Plant

70,500 To be reused in Sinter Plant

10 Dust from Bag Filters ofInduction Furnaces

60,200 To be reused in process

11 Mill scales from rolling milland casting machines

20,000 To be reused in InductionFurnaces

TABLE - 2.3TYPICAL CHARACTERISATION OF SOLID WASTES

Unit Type of waste Typical Chemistry

DRI Plant DRI fines Bulk density : 1850 – 3300 kg/m3Grain size : upto 12 mmIron fines: 33% coal fines in the form of solidsas fixed C: 9% Ash:58%

Dolochar Ash - 65 to 75%Fixed Carbon - 20 to 30%Moisture - 3.5 to 4.5%VM - 1.5 to 2.5%Sulphur - 0.2 to 0.3%

The blast furnace slag is a low melting chemical compound formed by thechemical reaction of the gangue and the flux in the charge. All unreducedones (silicates, alumino-silicates, and calcium-alumina-silicates) join the




C2 - 44


slag. The indicative major constituents of the slag of MBF include thefollowing:

2.13 POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

Probable Pollution Sources Mitigation Measures

Sinter Plant:

Fumes from the process &

Dust from Raw Material Handling

Section

Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP) &

Bag Filters

Pellet Plant:



Section


Bag Filters




C2 - 45


Blast Furnace:

Dust and Fumes from Blast Furnace,

Laddles and Cast House and dust from

stock house

Dust Collectors, Gas Cleaning

Plant, Fume Extraction System

and Bag Filter

Sponge Iron Plant:

Dust and Fumes from DRI Kiln &


Section, Material transfer, Product

separation and loading point


Bag Filters

Steel Melting Shop & DIP Unit:

Dust and Fumes from Furnaces Fume Extraction System and

Bag Filters

Rolling Mill:

Minor Fumes from Heating Furnace

(Direct charging of hot billet)

Skylight exhaust system

Cement Plant:

Dust from the Grinding Unit, Packing

Plant, Storage silos

ESP and Bag Filters

2.14 CONTROL OF FUGITIVE EMISSIONS AT VARIOUS AUXILIARYFACILITIES INSIDE THE PLANT

The unit will install air pollution control equipment to control particulatematter emissions. Fugitive emissions from the proposed plant would besignificant as there will be air pollution due to activities like materialhandling and transfer points of materials and movement of vehicles. Theseoperations generate large quantity of dust. Specific instances of fugitivedust generation may include dust blown by wind from the raw-materialsstockpile, dust caused by vehicular traffic within the factory, dust leakagefrom conveyors, conveyor transport points, storage hoppers and packersetc.. Control measures like good housekeeping, proper maintenance,wetting of dusty areas, use of enclosed storage wherever feasible etc.,would considerably reduce fugitive dust.




C2 - 46


For the purpose of effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions,following efforts will be made:

Storage area shall be clearly earmarked. Enclosure shall be provided for all the loading & unloading operations,

if possible. All transfer points shall be fully enclosed. Airborne dust shall be control by sprinkling of water. All roads shall be paved on which movement of raw materials or

products will take place. Preventive measures shall be employed to minimize dust build up on

road. Conveyors shall be provided with conveyor cover. Maintenance of air pollution control equipment shall be done regularly. All the workers shall be provided with disposable dust mask. Green belt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions. Regular training shall be given to the personnel operating and

maintaining fugitive emissions control systems.

The fugitive emission will be monitored at following locations within plantarea as per CPCB guidelines. Details of such locations are given below,

LOCATION OF FUGITIVE MONITORINGSR.NO.

AREA MONITORING LOCATION

1 Raw material handling area Transfer points2 Day bin area Feeder area, Mixing area,

Transfer points3 Product processing area Furnace area4 Other areas As per SPCB guidelines

There will be Dust Extraction/Dust Suppression Systems/Foggy DustArresters to control fugitive emissions at Furnace Tapping Points, rawmaterial handling section and various other facilities inside the plant.

With the implementation of all the above control measures, the gaseousemissions shall be contained within the acceptable limits, thus ensuringthe full compliance to National Ambient Air Quality Emission Standardsissued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 16th November, 2009.




C2 - 47


2.15 WASTEWATER MANAGEMENTThe prevention and control of water pollution aim at conserving make-upwater by recycling the wastewater after treatment. The wastewater, likelyto be generated from the proposed plant is:

Underflow from Raw Water Clariflocculator Backwash Waste from Filtration Plant Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards Cooling Tower & Boiler Blow-down Canteen Effluents

Sludge from Raw Water Clariflocculator and Backwash from FiltrationPlant will be led to a thickener for removing suspended solids. Theoverflow from the thickener will be reused in the plant water system. TheSludge from the thickener will be dried and dumped.

Cooling Tower & Boiler Blow-down from various recirculation systems willbe cascaded for reuse in Ash Handling, gardening and dust suppression asshown in water balance diagram.

Efforts will be made to harvest rainwater in the plant. Run-off water fromthe office areas, shop roofs will be collected and stored for future use.

The plant will be designed as a zero discharge plant as far as the processeffluents are concerned. The water will be recirculated through cooling andtreatment. No plant effluent will be discharged outside the plant premises.The entire waste water will be recycled for various purposes inside theplant.

Domestic effluent from the various buildings / sheds of the plant will beconveyed through separate drains to Sewage Treatment Plant (STP). Thetreated effluent from STP will be used in Gardening purpose.

Water pollution control systems envisaged are summarized in Table-2.4.

Table-2.4List of Water Pollution Control Systems

Source Pollutants Control SystemRaw materialhandling yard

Surface runoffcontaining freeminerals too assuspended Solids

Catch Pits (to recoverthe minerals fromsedimentation andreuse.)




C2 - 48


Raw Water TreatmentPlant

Suspended Solids alongwith Biomass

Clarifier, Thickener,Sludge Pond.

Cooling Tower &Boiler Blow down

Temperature, DissolvedSolids, Free Cl and TSS

Reused in the plantarea.

Canteens, Toilets BOD, O & G, TSS/TDS. Sewage TreatmentPlant (STP)

Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)Sewage from the various building in the plant will be routed throughsewage treatment plant (STP) and treated waste water will be used forgreen belt development within the premises.

Sewage treatment plant (STP) based on SBR technology is proposed to beset-up in the proposed project. A well-designed sewer network will collectwastewater from different sections of the plant area. The sewer networkwill convey the wastewater into the proposed STP.

STP DetailsThe proposed STP will be designed for treatment of raw sewage duringoperation phase to maintain the desired quality of treated wastewater. Theexpected characteristics of raw sewage are as follows:

Sr. No. Parameter Concentration1. pH 6.5 – 8.52. Suspended solids 200 – 250 mg/l3. BOD 250 – 300 mg/l

The expected characteristics of the treated sewage on adopting the schemeof treatment are as follows:

Sr. No. Parameter Concentration1. pH 6.5 – 8.02. BOD <5 mg/l3. TSS <10 mg/l

2.16 RAIN WATER HARVESTINGThe entire land of the plant area has to be leveled in such a way that RainWater flows down to the RCC constructed Rain Water storage tank. Water




C2 - 49


will enter into the storage tank through filter bed. Filter bed will be madewith different size of gravels and core sand. The filtrate water will be storedin the tank. The same water will be rinsed for greenery purpose throughwater pump and motor. The residue of the filter bed will be removedmanually from time to time.

Rain Water harvesting potential:Total Project Area – 649 acres (262.64 hectares)Average annual rain fall in the project area - 1400 mmAverage annual monsoon rain fall - 80% of 1400 mm = 1120 mm (say)Volume of surface run off in the plant campus = 262.64 x 1.12 x 0.4 ham,

= 117.66 ham say 1.177 mcmRain water harvesting potential of the plant campus – 1.177 mcm

75% run off may be allowed to be drained through natural drainagesystem. For its sustenance and remaining 25% may be harvested andstored suitably. Around 0.294 mcm (i.e 2,94,000 cu.m) of water thereforecan be conserved within the plant. Considering the average depth of 2.5 min storage tanks, area for surface storage involves around 29 acres.

2.17 STORM WATER MANAGEMENTThe effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of alldrainage pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to see that noneof the drains are clogged due to accumulation of sludge/sediments. Theclogged drains will be cleaned as soon as possible, preferably the same day.The catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage system from the rawmaterial handling areas will be regularly checked and cleaned to ensuretheir effectiveness. This checking and cleaning will be rigorous during themonsoon season, especially at the time of heavy rains forecast.

2.18 LAND & GREENBELT DEVELOPMENTAll the units shall be accommodated within 262.64 Hectares (649 acres) ofland in the existing plant boundary. The required land is already inpossession by the Company.

Considering the need of open space for fire fighting and safety requirement,greenbelt has been planned along the periphery in addition to smallpatches of green area in the unutilized open space, roadside treeplantation and grass lawns. The peripheral green belt varies in width tosuit the plant design requirement. The greenery is shown in the plantlayout (Figure-2.1).




C2 - 50


Out of the total plant area of 262.64 hectares (649 acres), around 87hectares (33% of the total area) has been covered under Green Belt.Around 1,30,500 number of trees (@1500 nos. of tree per hectares) hasbeen considered for plantation. Substantial plantation has been alreadydeveloped inside the plant.

Name of plants and number of plants already planted (year-wise)

Name of plants and number of plants proposed to be planted (year-wise)

2.19 CHARTER ON CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY FORENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION (CREP): INTEGRATED IRON &STEEL INDUSTRY

The Charter on Corporate Responsibility (CREP) as laid down by CentralPollution Control Board (CPCB) for Iron and Steel Industry will guide theproduction in the proposed steel plant and consideration is given below.

S.N.

Unit/Item

Responsibilities Extent of fulfillment

1. DRI Utilisation of dolochar &waste gas

Waste gas shall be used inthe WHRB and dolocharshall be used in CFBCboiler of CPP.

2. SMS To reduce fugitiveemission by installing asecondary de-dustingsystem

secondary de-dustingfacility envisaged to reducethe fugitive emission

3. SMS Utilisation of SMS Slag 100% utilization will beexplored

4. Stack &AAQ

Installation ofContinuous stacksmonitoring system & itscalibration in majorstacks and setting up ofthe online ambient airquality monitoringStations.

Effort will be made




C2 - 51


5. APCS To operate the pollutioncontrol equipmentefficiently and to keepproper record of runhours, failure time andefficiency with immediateeffect.

Will be complied

2.20 PROJECT COST

DESCRIPTION COSTTotal Capital Cost of the Project Rs. 1661.02 CroresTotal Capital Cost for EnvironmentalPollution Control Measures

Rs. 116 Crores

Recurring Cost / annum forEnvironmental Pollution ControlMeasures

Rs. 11.6 Crores

The breakup of project cost for proposed expansion project are as follows,

Sl. No. Cost of the Project Grand Total1 Land 99.902 Cost of Civil Construction 383.803 Plant and Machinery 849.444 Miscellaneous Fixed Assets 112.55

Total Hard Cost (A) 1445.695 Preliminary & Preoperative expenses 53.836 Contingencies (5% of hard cost) 67.297 Margin Money for Working Capital 94.21

Total Soft Cost (B) 215.33Grand Total Cost (A) + (B) 1661.02


Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.11 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit and 136 MW captive power plant,0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys

at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Paschim Burdwan, West Bengal

C3 - 1

Baseline Environmental Scenario Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-3.0BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL

SCENARIO

3.1 INTRODUCTIONThe proposed Steel Plant Project of M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. (SSPL)is situated at Village Dhasna, P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S. Jamuria, DistrictBurdwan of West Bengal. Its geographical co-ordinates are Latitude23°40’38.51"N to 23°41‘49.87"N and Longitude 87°06‘57.27"E to87°07‘35.84"E with above mean sea level as 104 m.

The project site already has proper road linkage for transport ofmaterials and equipment. Raniganj Railway Station is about 10.0 kmfrom the project site. The project site is under Jamuria Municipal Areaand beside State High Way. The NH-2 road is passing about 6.0 kmaway in the South direction and the nearest distance of NH-60 in the SEdirection is about 2.6 km with respect to the project site. The nearestKazi Nazrul Islam Airport, Andal is about 20 km from the project site.Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose International (NSCBI) Airport, Kolkata, isabout 178 km from the project site. Kolkata city is located at a distanceof about 178 km from the project site. Distance from Howrah Railwaystation to the project site is about 175 km. Kolkata Port is around 175km away and Haldia Port is 209 km away from the Project Site.

The nearest distance of Damodar River in the South-western side isabout 11.0 km and Ajoy river is about 7.0 km in North-eastern side w.r.tthe project site. Important Towns like Raniganj Town is about 9.0 km inSouth direction, Asansol Town is about 14.0 km in West direction,Durgapur Town is about 29.0 km in South-east direction. JharkhandState Boarder is about 30.0 km in West direction from the project site.

The EIA is aimed at determining the environmental impacts on the"Study Area", which encompasses all areas falling within a radius of 10km around the plant site due to the proposed project.

There is no national park, wildlife sanctuary/reserve forest exist within10 km radius of plant.




C3 - 2


The major environmental disciplines studied in this EIA report includeSoil, Land Use, Meteorology, Surface and Ground Water Quality, AirQuality, Noise, Ecology and Demography, Socio-Economy and Geologicalfeatures & Geo-hydrological Status.

The following chapters present the detailed discussion on the field data,generated for soil, meteorology, water quality, air quality, noise, ecologyand socio-economic during three months’ period (1st October, 2018 - 31st

December, 2018) representing Post Monsoon season along with therelevant secondary data, collected from various agencies on the relevantdisciplines.

The site Location map indicates the project site which has been shown inFigure-3.1; the Google view map of the site location have been presentedin Figure-3.2. The 10 km radius of the study area for the proposedproject has been presented in Figure-3.3.




C3 - 3


FIGURE-3.1 : PROJECT SITE LOCATION

Project Site:Village: Dhasna, P.O: Bahadurpur,P.S. - Jamuria, District – Burdwan,West Bengal.Site Co-ordinate:Latitude 23°40’38.51"N to23°41‘49.87"N and Longitude87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"E(Mean Sea Level 104 m)




C3 - 4


FIGURE-3.2: GOOGLE VIEW POINT OF THE SITE LOCATION

Project Site: Village - Dhasna, P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S. Jamuria, District Burdwan, West BengalSite Co-ordinate: Latitude 23°40’38.51"N to 23°41‘49.87"N and

Longitude 87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"E (Above Mean Sea Level: 104 m)

PROJECT SITE




C3 - 5


FIGURE-3.3: GOOGLE MAP OF THE STUDY AREA(10 KM RADIUS FROM THE PROJECT SITE)




C3 - 6


3.1.1 PHYSIOGRAPHIC DETAILSThe proposed project is located at Jamuria. This area is sort of anextension of the Chota Nagpur Plateau. It is a rocky undulating areawith laterite soil, with the Ajay on the north, the Damodar on thesouth. This area resembles a promontory jutting out from the hillranges of Central India and consists of barren, rocky and rollingcountry with laterite soil rising into rocky hillocks on the right bankof the Ajay river and shut in on the West, North by the hills ofChotanagpur and the Santhal Parganas. Ajay-Barakar divide is aconvex plateau, the average altitude being 150 m. It is a transitionalzone between the Jharkand plateau which constitutes a portion ofPeninsular Shield in the west. In general the Jharkhand plateauconsists of the meta sedimentary rocks of Precambrian age,Gondwana sedimentary rocks, Rajmahal basalts and Upper Tertiarysediments. Laterite has developed on these older rocks as well as onearly Quaternary sediments in this area. The gradient is westerly tothe west and to the east it is northerly towards Ajay and southerlytowards Damodar below the latitude. The average elevation ofBurdwan plain is about 104 m above the Mean Sea Level (MSL). Thisarea is a low lying alluvial plains with riverine aggregates.

Jamuria is a city and a municipality under Asansol Subdivision ofPachim Burdwan district in Indian state of West Bengal. Latitude ofthe project site is 23°41'37.04"N and Longitude 87°7'13.55"E. Averageelevation of the area is 106.68 meters (350 feet). The project sitealready has proper road linkage for transport of materials andequipments. Raniganj Railway Station is about 10 km, south-eastfrom the project site. The project site is under Jamuria MunicipalArea and beside State High Way. The distance of NH-2 is about 6 kmand NH-60 is about 2.6 km from the project site.

Damodar River is about 11 km in the southern side with respect tothe project site and Ajay river is about 7 km in northern side w.r.t theproject site. Important Towns like Raniganj Town is about 9.0 km inSouth direction, Asansol Town is about 14.0 km in West direction,Durgapur Town is about 29.0 km in South-east direction. JharkhandState Boarder is about 30.0 km in West direction from the project site.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chota_Nagpur_Plateau

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laterite

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ajay_River

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Damodar_River

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Foot_(length)




C3 - 7


3.2 GEOLOGICAL FEATURES OF THE STUDY AREAFor the purpose of the study under reference, the project area hasbeen considered as extending over the entire district of Burdwan.Asansol-Durgapur region is composed of undulating latterite region.This area lies between two mighty rivers - the Damodar and the Ajay.They flow almost parallel to each other in the region – the averagedistance between the two rivers is around 30 km. The discovery ofcoal led to industrialisation of the area.

The metropolitan city Asansol, a coal-mining-industrial centre, is thesecond largest city in West Bengal, after Kolkata. Asansol is boundedby 23°41′ N latitude and 86°59′ E longitude. The study area is withinthe coal country. Ranigunj Coalfields covers an area of 1530 sq.km. Itis spread over four districts of West Bengal – Burdwan, Birbhum,Bankura and Purulia and a part of Dhanbad district (Jharia coalfieldsare also within Raniganj coalfields area) of Jharkhand. The heart ofRanigunj coalfields lies in Asansol region. Asansol is situated at anaverage elevation of 97 meters. Most of Bengal is flat alluvial plains.

The study area lies on Gondwana rocks which are overlained byalluvial soil and laterite. It forms the lower edge of the Chota Nagpurplateau, which occupies most of Jharkhand. It is located between twomighty rivers, Damodar and Ajay. Another mighty river, Barakar,joins the Damodar near Dishergarh. A small rivulet, Nunia, flows pastAsansol. Nunia, a small stream about 40 km long has its origin nearAdra village in the Salanpur area, flows through the Barabani area,past Asansol and joins the Damodar in the Raniganj area. Dhanbaddistrict lies on the western side of the study area, Durgapur subdivision of Bardhman district lies on the eastern side. To the south,across Damodar river there are Purulia and Bankura districts. To thenorth of the study area there are Dumka and Birbhum districts.

The study area lies in Damodar valley. The study area is almostcovered by thick layer of soil, alluvium laterite etc. Below this thicklayer the rocks of Raniganj formation of lower Gondwanas are found.These rocks mainly comprises of sandstones of varying grain size,grey shales, intercalation of shale and sandstones along with coalseam. The underground mine area is structurally affected by as manyas 4 faults, out of which two faults are major ones with throw varying

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Damodar_River

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ajay_River

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jamuria

http://wapedia.mobi/en/Damodar_River




C3 - 8


from 20 m to 70 m and the remaining two are minor faults. Thebuffer zone is occupied by mostly alluvium, sandy soil, lateritic clayand gravel followed by Raniganj formation.It consists of Theoccurrence of alluvial soil is widely spreaded in the area withconsiderable thickness ranging from 3 m to 20 m.

In the study area coarse gritty soil blended with rock fragments isformed from the weathering of pegmatites, quartz veins andconglomeratic sandstones, where as sandy soil is formed due to theweathering and erosion of granitic rocks and sandstones. This soil isof reddish in colour, medium to course in texture, acidic in reaction,low in nitrogen, calcium, phosphate and other plant nutrients. Waterholding capacity of this soil increases with depth as well as with theincrease of clay portions. There are several hillocks about 700-800 ft.high in the northern part while the southern part is relatively plainwith some undulations.

The petrological and chemical composition of coal reflects all itsinherent characters together with the variation in thickness of thecoal seams, these aspects have been studied in detail aroundJamuria. The data reveal that any coal seam having its mothermaterial supplied continuously from the same source will show avariation in its composition. This variation is closely related to theenvironmental factors of the site of deposition i.e morphology,including the channel axis of the deposition, and the palaeocurrentdirection. It is fact that these coal-seam properties may be used justas other sedimentary parameters in interpreting the characteristics ofthe site of deposition and depositing current.

The study area which comes under Raniganj Coal Basin is anexample of an Indian Gondwana Rift. Rifting occurred in peninsularIndia during Permian–Triassic Gondwana sedimentation. The rocks ofthe Paleozoic–Mesozoic Indian Gondwana Supergroup succeed theMesoproterozoic Vindhyan sedimentary rocks and the IndianPrecambrian shield unconformably, and are renowned for their coalresources.

The trace fossil assemblages of the ice-marginal shallow marinesediments of the Talchir Formation (Permo-Carboniferous), Raniganj




C3 - 9


Coal Basin, shows the adverse effect of extreme climatic conditions onbiota. The glaciomarine Talchir succession starts with glacialsediments near the base and gradually passes to storm-laid shallowmarine sediments up-section. The fine-grained storm sediments hostabundant trace fossils. Although the studied ichnitescharacteristically show marginal marine affinity, the ichnodiversityand bioturbation intensity suggest a lower than normal shallowmarine trace fossil population. Further, endobenthic annelids, wormsand crustaceans are identified as dominant trace-makers. Absence ofbody fossils, dominance of worms and annelids as trace-makersindicate a stressed environmental condition, induced by cold climateand lowered marine salinity due to influx of glacier melt-outfreshwater during climatic amelioration, in the Permo-Carboniferousice-marginal sea.

Only metamorphic rocks are found in the northern part of westernside of the study area where as sedimentary rocks are found in thesouthern part. Thus we find a lithological boundary betweensedimentary and metamorphic rocks. This lithological boundaryindicates a time-gap or Unconformity, between the formation ofmetamorphic rocks and deposition of sediments. Occurrences ofxenoliths in this area indicate that the metamorphic rocks wereoriginated from igneous rocks. Quartzite is also found in this areawhich indicates its sedimentary origin. Sandstone probably gotmetamorphosed in contact with the igneous intrusion. Weatheredmetamorphic rock is found in the north – western part whichprobably indicates longer duration of exposure. Igneous dykes arefound in coal seams which indicate a second period of tectonicswhich probably tilted sedimentary succession and unconformity.

The amphibolites-gneiss and granite-gneiss found are part of thePrecambrian basement. The basement was then uplifted due totectonic activity which opened up a basin for sedimentation. Thebasement rocks develop the deformations probably during thisupliftment. The tectonic activity took several years to occur duringwhich time no sedimentation took place. After this time-gap,sedimentation took place and thereafter, digenesis which formed thesedimentary rocks. These sediments are part of the Gondwanasediments and much younger than the basement rocks.




C3 - 10


The sedimentary rocks also show layering, each layer correspondingto a definite time period. The khaki-green siltstone found is a part ofTalchir boulder-bed. The coal seams found in further south belong tothe Barakar formation.

It is assumed that two igneous intrusions occurred. The first igneousintrusion is marked by the expansion of the igneous melt along theaxial planes of the neutral folds which occurred during the uplift ofthe basin. The second igneous intrusion occurred after completion ofthe formation of the sedimentary succession, simultaneously withanother round of tectonic activity which tilted the unconformity to itspresent position.

The horizontal igneous layer and the lamprophyre dyke were formedduring this second intrusion, which changed the adjacent formingquartzite and jhama coal respectively.

3.3 GEO-HYDROLOGICAL STATUS OF THE STUDY AREAJamuria in Burdwan district with its varied tectonic elements andriverine features is a transitional zone between the Jharkhandplateau which constitutes a portion of peninsular shield in the westand Ganga-Bramhaputra alluvial plain in the north and east. Ingeneral the Jharkhand plateau consists of the metasedimentary rocksof precambrian age, Gondwana sedimentary rocks, Rajmahal basaltsand upper tertiary sediments. Laterite has developed on these olderrocks as well as on early Quaternary sediments.

Water-Bearing Formations:On the basis of occurrence and movement of groundwater the areaunder study can be divided into two hydrogeological units viz.Consolidated Formation represented by Archaean metamorphics ofChhotanagpur Gneissic Complex (CGC), Semi-consolidated Formationconsisting of Gondwana sedimentaries and Unconsolidated Formationcomposed of Tertiary and Quaternary sediments of Bengal basin.Groundwater potentiality of the semiconsolidated and consolidatedformations is a function of degree of fracturing, disposition as well aswater holding capacity of the fractures and hydraulic connectivitybetween individual fractures.




C3 - 11


Consolidated Archaean Crystallines:It consists of Archaean crystallines comprising granite gneiss, schist,pegmatite, quartzite etc. of CGC. The rocks occur in major part ofSalanpur block and in the northern parts of Baraboni and Jamuriablocks i.e. on the north-west of Raniganj Coalfield. Secondaryporosities like faults, fractures and joints provide suitable avenues forgroundwater recharge and development of groundwater repositoriesin weathered and fracture zones of 5 to 10 m thickness.

Aquifer characteristics:Aquifers constituted with weathered and/or fracture zones generallyexist at shallow depth under unconfined condition. In some pocketsthe thickness of these potential zones is as high as 20 m. Existence ofa large number of dug wells and few shallow hand pumps in thisArchaean unit indicates that availability of water is limited to shallowaquifers generally occurring within 10 m bgl. Semi-consolidatedGondwana Formation It is composed of sandstone, siltstone, shale,claystone, conglomerate and coal of Lower Gondwana group. Presenceof coal seams at different depth levels in Ranigaj and BarakarFormations of Gondwana group have led to the development of a largenumber of coallieries altogether forming Raniganj Coalfield. Thesedimentary rocks are traversed by faults, joints and dykes mostlytrending NNE-SSW. Fracture density is maximum in the northernpart of Raniganj Coalfield, progressively lessens towards south andbecomes lowest in the vicinity of Damodar river (Sikdar et al., 2004).The Gondwana rocks appear to have better groundwater potentialitycompared to that of the Archaean metamorphics as thefractures/faults have wider openings and larger aerial extent to act asbetter conduits for the movement and storage of groundwater,especially in the northern part. Groundwater movement in this part ofGondwana basin is largely from NW to SE, with some variations – Nto NE towards Ajoy river on the north and S to SE towards Damodarriver on the south.

Flow of water is induced by coalmines. Configuration of water tablecontours indicates steep hydraulic gradient ranging from 0.003 m/min the northern part near Ajoy to 0.0056 m/m m in the southern partnear Damodar (CMPDI, 2005, 2007). It varies considerably from0.003 m/m to 0.004 m/m in and around main mining areas of




C3 - 12


Sonepur Bazari, Kottadih, Kumardih, Jhanjra, Bansra etc., beingsteepest (about 0.01 m/m) in the neighborhood of active minesbecause of percolation of groundwater into the mines in consequenceof mine dewatering.

(a) Shallow aquiferAlluvial soil/detrital mantle, laterite and gravel form thick andregionally extensive shallow aquifers under unconfined conditionmostly within 25 m bgl. The aquifers have hydraulic conductivity inthe range of 0.001 m/day to 0.55 m/day and transmissivity rangingfrom 0.016 m2/day to 1.60 m2/day (CMPDI, 2005, 2007). Thicknesshas been found to vary between 3 m and 20 m in the RaniganjFormation in Kumardih, Banshra and Sonepur Bazari coalminingareas. Shallow aquifers are harnessed by dug wells and shallow handpumps for domestic use.

(b) Deeper aquiferAquifers at deeper level (>30 m bgl) are represented by weatheredand/ or fractured sandstone occurring under semiconfined toconfined conditions, extending down to about 120 m or even more.But, the productive aquifers, wherever they exist, mostly occur withinthe depth of 120 m. They are often separated by coal seams inRaniganj and Barakar Formations. Kumardih colliery and itssurrounding areas in Andal block shows that about 10 to 50 m thicksub-horizontal zones of sandstone are bounded by shale/coal seamsat different depth levels. Sandstones with sub-horizontal beddingparallel fractures form potential aquifers at depth. Water level inareas like Salanpur, Baraboni, Asansol MC, Jamuria and Kulti blockssituated in hard rock terrain occurs mostly within the depth of 6 mbgl in pre-monsoon and 3 m bgl in post-monsoon periods. Sometimesdeeper occurrence of pre-monsoon water level in the range of 10-12 mbgl has been recorded for Raniganj, Pandaveswar and Kanksa blocks.On average pre monsoon water level in Jamuria I is 10.01mbgl andJamuria II is 6.44mbgl. For post monsoon the average in Jamuria I &II are 2.41 and 5.56mbgl respectfully.




C3 - 13


GROUND WATER:Ground water in the study area occurs as shallow depth under watertable condition within the weathered mantle, fractured zone of hardrock and narrow zone of unconsolidated sediment along major valleys.Net annual groundwater availability in hard rock dominated blockshas been estimated as about 2888 ham for Bararoni, 1736 ham forSalanpur, 3004 ham for Jamuria, 1932 ham for Raniganj and 3911ham for Andal & Pandaveswar. The potential aquifers comprise twounits, A weathered residual which is in general 8-10 m thick, porousand unconsolidated, containing water in the interstices. Underlyingfractured hard rock which stored water within zones of the secondaryporosity.

Top aquifers consist of mostly detrital mantle comprising of alluvium,sandy soil, lateritic clay and gravel together with partly consolidatedweathered sandstones. From borehole logs and depth of open welltaping aquifers, it can be seen that the thickness of top aquifersrange from 3 m to 20 m. Ground water occurs in this formationunder the water table conditions. The water level in existing openwells range from 2.1 m to 16.5 m and 6.7 m to 9.0 m below groundlevel in pre and post-monsoon respectively. The fluctuation of watertable is 6.1 m. The ground water flow direction is towards south-easti.e. towards Damodar River with hydraulic gradient of 0.01 to 0.008while it has been also inferred to be towards Damodar River in thebuffer zone which controls the master drainage of the area. Theaverage fluctuation in water levels between the two extreme seasonsis around 6.1 m in the area. In respect of the confined/semi-confinedaquifer in the core zone area, the piezometric head is at deeper levelin relation to potentiometric levels of dug wells tapping theunconfined aquifer inferring hydrological discontinuity or lowpressure head in deep aquifers.

Hydro-morpho-geological Map of the area has been presented inFigure-3.4.1 and detail of Legends of Figure–3.4.1 has beensummarized in Table–3.4.1.




C3 - 14


Figure-3.4.1: Hydro-morpho-geological Map of the Area




C3 - 15


Table – 3.4.1Details of Legends of Figure-3.4.1

MapSymbol

Geomorphic Unit Lithology Ground WaterProspect

LR Linear Ridge - PoorRH Residual Hill - PoorPP-S Pediplain (Shallow) Sedimentary

Out CropPoor toModerate

DPP- S Dissected Pediplain(Shallow)

SedimentaryOut Crop

Poor toModerate

PP – M Pediplain (Moderate) MetamorphicOut Crop

Moderate toGood

DPP – M Dissected Pediplain(Moderate)

MetamorphicOut Crop

Moderate toGood

DBP Dissected Burried Pediment MetamorphicOut Crop

Good

Lineaments Good

Symbols of Different Settlements

Settlement Road River Water bodies Railway line StateBoundary

DistrictBoundary

Ground Water Zones of the area have been identified by Remote Sensingand Geo-hydrological Studies. The zones are presented in Figure-3.4.2.




C3 - 16


Figure-3.4.2: Identification of Ground Water Zone based on RemoteSensing Studies and Geo-hydrological Studies

(a) Area of fresh groundwater availability up to 15 to 20m below groundlevel (bgl) and beyond. Based on VES interpretation (blue colourindicates granular zone, yellow colour indicates less granular and redcolour indicates granular zone having higher resistivity).

(b) Areas of fresh groundwater availability up to 15–20m below groundlevel (bgl) and beyond (blue colour indicates granular zone and redcolour indicates high resistive zone).




C3 - 17


(c) Area of fresh groundwater availability up to 15–20m below groundlevel (bgl) and beyond. Based on VES interpretation (blue colourindicates granular zone, green colour indicates less granular zone andred colour indicates granular zone having higher resistivity).(d) Area of fresh groundwater availability up to 15–20m below groundlevel (bgl) and beyond. Based on VES interpretation (blue colour is moregranular zone and red indicates resistive zone).

List of observation points are given in Table – 3.4.2.

Table - 3.4.2




C3 - 18


Groundwater Recharge and ResourceAmongst the blocks of Asansol subdivision total annual groundwaterrecharge for Baraboni and Jamuria are 3209 ham and 3338 hamrespectively, which is higher than that of Raniganj (2146 ham) andSalanpur (1929 ham).

MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR RECHARGING THE AQUIFERS AT THEPROJECT AREARecharging of the aquifers within plant premises is not permitted byWBPCB for industrial project. However, efforts has been made for storingrainwater inside the project area.

Management Plan for the Conservation of Surface Water & GroundWater at the Project Area:

Conservation of Surface Water Resources:1. No garbage dumping will be made near any surface water / ground

water resource.2. Technique of improvement of water quality using aquatic plants and

fishes will be introduced where necessary in order to avoid mosquitobreeding.

3. No sewage will be diverted to water bodies in order to maintain theirwater quality.

4. Rain water harvesting system will be introduced at the project site.

Conservation of Ground Water ResourcesEfforts will be made to maintain the sustainability of ground waterresources by arresting the ground water outflows by WatershedManagement.

MAKE UP WATER REQUIREMENT (SURFACE WATER)520 m3/day water from Ajay river will be the drawnfor use in the project .Permission for drawl of water from Ajoy River has been obtained fromcompetent Authority.

Actually two major rivers are the likely source of surface water in thestudy area. One major river is Damodar and another major river is Ajay.




C3 - 19


Damodar river is about 11.0 km away from the project site towardssouth. Ajoy river is also about 7.0 km away from the project site towardsnorth.

3.4.1 RAIN FALL IN THE AREAThe total annual mean rain fall received in the study area is about1392.2 mm. Rainfall peaks during the month of July (about 344.4 mmin the study area) followed by August (about 335.3 mm). Total number ofrainy days in the study area is about 73 days per annum. Rainfall profileof Asansol - Jamuria region is presented in Table-3.4.3 and Figure-3.4.3.

Table-3.4.3 : Rainfall Profile of Asansol Jamuria RegionArea Profile

Asansol Asansol region receives medium and high rain fall.Western part of Asansol receives heavy rainfall whereas the eastern part receives medium rainfall.

Jamuria Entire Jamuria Region receives medium rainfall.

Figure-3.4.3: Rainfall Profile of Asansol-Jamuria Region

3.4.2 DAMODAR RIVER




C3 - 20


Damodar river rises in the Palamau hills of Chota Nagpur at an elevationof about 609.75 meters. It flows in a south-easterly direction enteringthe deltaic plains below Raniganj. Near Burdwan the river abruptlychanges its course to a southerly direction and joins Hooghly river about48.27 km below Kolkata. Total length of Damodar River is about 547kms. Principal tributary of Damodar river is Barakar. There are fivedams in the Damodar valley. These are Maithan dam, Panchet dam,Konar dam, Tilaiya dam, and Tenughat dam. There is a barrage onDamodar river at Durgapur. For the five sub-catchments, namely Tilaiya,Maithan, Konar, Panchet and Durgapur the average annualprecipitations are 1,117.7 mm, 1,320.8 mm, 1,141.7 mm, 1,142.0 mmand 1,320.8 mm respectively.

These five dams and one barrage have been constructed across Damodarriver to store 1,270 million cu.m of water. During nine dry months theriver Damodar is allowed to maintain a perennial flow by regulating thereservoir sluices. Efforts are made to maintain the flow rate of 570cusecs above Punchet dam, 430 cusecs for the next stretch up toDurgapur and below Durgapur 100 to 200 cusecs. Damodar river is arain fed torrential river. The river catchment is characterized by aprolonged dry season followed by turbulent monsoon with the annualrunoff, 11,385 million cu.m of water.

3.4.3 AJAY RIVERAjay river has been originated on a small hill about 300 meters high,south west of Munger in Bihar. Then it flows through Deoghar district &Dumka district of Jharkhand and enters West Bengal at Simjuri, nearChittaranjan. It first forms the border between Burdwan District andJharkhand and then between Burdwan District and Birbhum District,and finally it enters Katwa subdivision of Burdwan district at Narengvillage in Ketugram police station. Ajay river then joins Bhagirathi Riverat Katwa Town. The total length of Ajay river is 288 km, out of which152 km is in West Bengal.

The important tributaries of Ajay river are Pathro and Jayanti inJharkhand, and Tumuni and Kunur in Burdwan district of West Bengal.

http://medlibrary.org/medwiki/Bardhaman_District

http://medlibrary.org/medwiki/Birbhum_District

http://medlibrary.org/medwiki/Katwa

http://medlibrary.org/medwiki/Hooghly_River




C3 - 21


The Ajay catchment lies in the path of tropical depression of cyclonicstorms which form in the Bay of Bengal in the monsoon period and movegenerally in the north-west direction. Abnormally heavy rain spells aregenerally associated with these storms during monsoon. The averageannual rain fall in the river catchment varies from 1,280 mm to 1,380mm. Nearly 75% to 80% of the rain fall is concentrated in the fourmonsoon months of June to September.

3.4.4 SEISMIC HISTORY OF THE AREAAccording to IS:1893-1984, the Project Site falls in Zone-III. It meansthat the earthquake shock in the area is minor. There is no majorearthquake episode recorded in the study area till date.

3.4.5 FLOOD HAZARD ZONATION MAPPINGFlood hazard zonation mapping as depicted in Figure-3.4.5 has beenprepared following an integration of overall assessment throughout theWest Bengal. Basically five districts of West Bengal have been identifiedto have the probability to be affected by flood. These districts are (1)

PROJECTSITE

m/s2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 4..0 6.0 m/s2

Figure 3.4.4: Seismicity mapProject Site




C3 - 22


North 24 Parganas, (2) Nadia, (3) Mursidabad, (4) South 24 Parganas,and (5) Medinipur.

The project area does not come under flood hazard zone. No flood hazardhas been recorded in the area till date.

Figure-3.4.5: Flood Hazard Zonation Mapping of West Bengal

Project Site




C3 - 23


Table – 3.4.4Cluster Analysis

3.4.6 DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY AREABurdwan District extend from 22°56' to 23°53' North latitude and from86°48' to 88º25' longitudes. Lying within Burdwan Division, the districtis bounded on the north by Dumka (of Jharkhand), Birbhum andMurshidabad, on the east by Nadia, on the south by Hooghly, Bankuraand Purulia and on the west by Dhandbad (of Jharkhand) districts.

The river Barakar forms the State Boundary to the west; the Ajayseparates Birbhum and Dumka to the north with exception of a portionof Katwa subdivision; the Damodar forms a southern boundary withPurulia and bankura, while Bhagirathi forms the main eastern boundarywith a few exceptions. The maximum length from east to west is 208 kmwhile the maximum breadth from north to south is 112 km. In shape thedistrict resembles a hammer.

Burdwan district with its varied tectonic elements and riverine featuresis a transitional zone between the Jharkhand plateau, which constitutesa portion of peninsular shield in the west, and Ganga-Brahamaputra

Districts No. ofSub-Divisions

Vulnerable Sub-Divisions

Major Rivers

North24 Parganas

05 -Barrackpore-Bashirhat

- Jamuna- Bhagirathi- Icchamati

Nadia 03 -Nadia Sadar - Jalangi- Hugli- Ganga

Murshidabad 05 -Lalbagh- Kandi

-Jangipur

- Bhagirathi- Ganga

South24 Parganas

02 - Diamond Harbor - Rupnarayan- Hugli

- DamodarMedinipur

(East + West)4+4=8 -Haldia

-Kanthi-Tamluk- Ghatal

- Kasai- Hugli

- Subarnarekha- Rupnarayan




C3 - 24


alluvial plain in the north and east. In general the Jharkhand plateauconsists of the metasedimentary rocks of Precambrian age, Gondwanasedimentary rocks, Rajmahal basalts and upper tertiary sediments.Laterite has developed on these older rocks as well as on earlyQuaternary sediments. Towards south, the alluvial plain merges withDamodar-kasain-Subarnarekha deltaic plains.

The Western half of the district resembles a promontory jutting out fromthe hill ranges of Chotonagpur Plateau and consist of baren rocky androlling country with a laterite soil rising into rocky hillocks, the highestbeing 227 m. These diversify and otherwise monotonous landscape andlend a special charm to the skyline around Asansol subdivision.

Ajay-Barakar divide is a convex plateau, the average altitude being 150m.The gradient is westerly to the west and to the east it is northerlytowards Ajay and Southerly towards Damodar below the latitude.

The river system in Burdwan district includes the Bhagirathi-Hoogly inthe east, the Ajay and its tributaries in the north and the Dwarakeswar,the Damodar and its branches in the southwest. Besides, there areinnumerable Khals and Old River beds all over the area. The notablerivers and khals are Damodar, Bhagirathi, Barakar, Ajay, Dwarakeswar,Nonia, Singaram, Tamla, Kukua, Kunur, Banka, Chanda-kanki nala,behula, Gangur, Brahmani, Khandesvari, Karulia nala, Koiya nala,Kandarkahal, Ghea Kakinadi etc.

Asansol is a subdivision located in Burdwan district, in the westernperiphery of West Bengal. Asansol is located at 23.68°N 86.98°E. It hasan average elevation of 97 meters. Asansol subdivision lies on exposedGondwana rocks and consists mostly of undulating laterite soil. It formsthe lower edge of the Chota Nagpur Plateau, which occupies most ofJhrkhand.It is located between two mighty rivers, Damodar and Ajay.Another mighty river Barakar joins the Damodar near Dishergar. A smallrivulet Nunia flows past Asansol.

Grand Trunk Road (NH-2) runs across the subdivision. The highway hasbeen broadened as part of the Golden Quadrilateral Project and nowallows two-lane traffic each way. A bypass enables highway traffic toavoid the congested areas of Asansol, Neamatpur, Kulti, and Barakar.The railway track from Kolkata to Delhi passes through the area andbifurcates into the main line and the grand chord line, at Sitarampurrailway junction. Another railwy truck links Asansol with Adra and thento Jamshedpur via Purulia and Kharagpur via Bankura. A brach lineconnects Andal with Sainthia on the Sahibgunj loop.

The Asansol – Durgapur region is composed of undulating latterite soil.This area lies between two mighty rivers – the Damodar and the Ajay.




C3 - 25


They flow almost parallel to each other in the region – the averagedistance between the two rivers is around 30 km. For ages the area washeavily forested and infested with plunderers and marauders. Thediscovery of coal led to industrialization of the area and most of theforests have been cleared. At the western fringe of the area the Barakarforms the boundary with Jharkhand. Nunia, a small stream about 40km long has its origin near Adra village in the salanpur area, flowsthrough the Barabani area, past Asansol and joins the Damodar in theRaniganj area.

3.5 MAJOR INDUSTRIES IN 10 KM RADIUS AREA AROUND THEPROJECT SITEThere are various industries like Steel, Ceramics, Refractories, Collieriesetc. operating in 10 km radius area around the project site includingoperating industries at Jamuria Industrial Estate. The name of theindustries is given below:

Sl. No. Name of Industry Sl. No. Name of Industry1 Super Smelters Ltd. 18 Hindustan Cables Ltd.2 Calstar Sponge Ltd. 19 Disergarh Power Supply3 Rajshri Iron Industries Pvt.

Ltd.20 Burnpur Cement

4 Bhagwati Sponge Pvt. Ltd. 21 Kabita Refractories5 Shivam Dhatu Pvt. Ltd. 22 Tasra Coal Block6 Gagan Ferro Tech 23 Vision Sponge (P) Ltd.7 Damodar Sponge 24 Mark Steels Ltd.8 Supreme Cement 25 Howrah Gases Ltd.9 Kunjbehari Steel Pvt. Ltd. 26 Jai Balaji Sponge Ltd.10 Damodar Steel & Power Pvt.

Ltd.27 Savitri Sponge Iron Pvt.

Ltd.11 Bakreswar Cement 28 Sitalpur Colliery12 Satwik Cement 29 Satya Narayan Colliery13 Victoria West Colliery 30 Mangalpur Jute Mill14 J K Rope Ways 31 Omega Minerals Pvt. Ltd.15 Bongemari Colliery OCP

Main32 Senha Small Hydro Power

16 S G Pulp & Paper (P) Ltd. 33 AIC Iron Industries Pvt.Ltd.

17 Salanpur Ceramics 34 S C L Cement Ltd35 Rabindra Enterprises




C3 - 26


3.6 LAND USE

3.6.1 METHODOLOGY

3.6.2 DATA ANALYSIS

Remote Sensing DataTo study and map the land use pattern of the area, LANDSAT-TM1multispectral imagery with extension latitude 23°41'29.40" North andlongitude 87°06'19.19" East has been used as input data. The spatialresolution of the satellite data is 30 m. The bands used as input data forthe current study have these following features:

Band 2: 0.52-0.59 µm (green): This band corresponds to the greenreflectance of healthy vegetation and is spanning the regionbetween the blue and red chlorophyll absorption bands.

BASIC DATA

IMPORT *.IMG FILE

LAYER STAKE TOPREPARE FCC

DIGITALCLASSIFICATION

VISUALINTERPRETATION

MAPPING &CATEGORISATION OF

LANDUSE

AREA ESTIMATION OFLAND COVER/LAND

USE

IMAGEENHANCEMENT

FINAL PLAN ANDMAPPING

FIGURE – 3.6.1

The sensitivity of the environment i.e. existinglanduse is studied through GeographicalInformation System (GIS). GeographicInformation System (GIS) is a scientifictechnique, which has revolutionized the waythat land is inventoried, managed, planned andstudied. GIS provides the theories and methodsfor organization and analysis of originalmeasurements of location and secondaryspatial data, as well as topography. As aninformation system GIS provides the theoriesand methods for organization, storage,analysis, modeling, mapping and display ofphysical and biological data, as well as thedistribution of cultural or socio-economic data.GIS applications are diverse. They includedetermining the suitability of land for differentuses, planning future land uses for differentobjectives, analyzing land and land-coverproperties for both resource inventories andscientific studies, and sitting of developmentalactivities. The section below describes themethodology for mapping and plan preparationtechniques.




C3 - 27


Band 3: 0.62 - 0.68 µm (red): This red chlorophyll absorption band ofhealthy green vegetation is one of the most important bands forvegetation discrimination. In addition, it is useful for soil-boundaryand geological boundary mapping. Band 3 may exhibit more contrastthan bands 1 and 2 because the effect of the atmosphere is reduced.The 0.69 m cut-off represents the beginning of a spectral region from0.68 to 0.75 m where vegetation reflectance crossovers occur that canreduce the accuracy of vegetation studies.

Band 4: 0.77 - 0.86 µm (near infrared): For reasons discussed above,the lower cut-off for this band was placed above 0.75 m. This band isespecially responsive to the amount of vegetation biomass present ina scene. It is useful for identification of vegetation types, andemphasizes soil-crop and land-water contrasts.

3.6.3 OTHER SECONDARY DATAThe secondary database considered for validation and geo-referencing ofthe image is as follows:

Topographical map in 1 inch: 1 mile of Survey of India: 73 M/1 andM/2.

District Planning Series Map, NATMO, 1998

Step-I Layer stacking of three distinct file into a single file and create FCC

Step-II

Select an appropriate band used throughout the analysis. Anexamination of the three bands shows that the one visible band (2)provides less evidence of the various water surfaces across theimage. Band 4, the near infrared band, clearly separates waterbodies from other surfaces. Band 3 help to distinguish vegetationcover.

Step-IIIDigital classification: Un-supervised ISO data classification carriedout considering green, red, NIR bands with 5 iteration and expectednumber of classes 50.

Step-IVAggregation of classes obtain through this classification session intoclasses having significance on the physical world was then carriedout based on DN value.

Step-VVisual interpretation is also done since digital classification onlyconsider pixel values not the geographic location, association, shape,etc.

Step-VI Area Calculation of each Land Use/Land Cover ClassesStep-VII Comparison with some reference data and sample ground validationStep-VIII Final Map and Report




C3 - 28


Schem atic Diagram of Land Use Map Preparation using Rem ote Sensing & GIS

Schem atic Diagram of Land Use Map Preparation using Rem ote Sensing & GIS

3.6.4 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

The digital image processing includes image rectification; imageenhancement; visual interpretation and land use mapping. Theprocesses are explained below:

Image RectificationThe satellite images are given in BSQ(Band Sequential) format. These areimported to Erdas environment. Thengeometric correction applied to theimages to correct the distorted imagedata to create a more faithfulrepresentation of original scene. Imagerectification procedures are often termed‘pre-processing’ operations because theynormally precede further manipulationand analysis of the image data to extractspecific information.

Image EnhancementThis procedure is applied to the images in order to more effectivelydisplay or record the data for subsequent visual interpretation. Highpass filter used to visualize more correctly the linear features such as,roads, rail, canal, river etc. Histogram Equalization was used todistinguished area of the same tone.

Visual Interpretation and Land use MappingSatellite imagery contains detail records of features on the ground at thetime of satellite overpass. An image interpreter systematically examinesthe images for generating the information required by him. Othersupporting materials such as published maps and reports from varioussources will increase the accuracy of the interpretation. The chain ofprocess in visual interpretation of the shape and pattern in an imagebegins with detection. There are certain fundamental characteristicsseen on images which aid in the visual interpretation of satellite imagery.These are tone/ color, size, shape, texture, pattern, location, association,resolution and season. Visual interpretation is subjective and differsfrom person to person and also upon the season, scale, spectral bands,spatial resolution, overall image contrast & quality of the data.

The procedure for mapping for land use from satellite imagery ofdifferent season & on different scale is well established. Severalparameters like terrain, climatic conditions, socio-economic trends, and

FIGURE – 3.6.2




C3 - 29


Area-wise Landuse and Landcover typeClass Name Area(sq km) Percentage

Agricultural Land 129.1 41.1%Forest and DenseVegetation 7.5 2.4%Settlements withVegetation 73.1 23.3%Settlements 22.9 7.3%Open Area 34.7 11.1%Land with Scrub 41.3 13.2%Water bodies 3.5 1.1%River 1.9 0.6%Total 314.0 100.0%

environmental influences etc. play a vital role in the existence of variousland use categories.

Study limitation

There are some limitations for the interpretation of the satellite data.These are mentioned below:

One season data sometimes give same spectral response of differentobjects creates confusion in image analysis and sub classification

One time data is unable to show sub-classification in the study area Area of the line features like road, rail etc. is not been included

since GIS does not give any calculation.

3.6.5 LANDUSE AND LANDCOVER PATTERN

The developmental projects will not only affect the environment of Projectsite, it may also have an adverse as well as beneficial impact on thereceiving environment of thesurrounding area within 10 km.In the proposed project ofEnvironment ImpactAssessment Study, the Landuse/ Land cover study has beendone within 10 km radius areawhich is called Study Area. TheProject Site is situated inJamuria around 4.0 km away inthe East side from Jamuriasettlement area in BurdwanDistrict of West Bengal.

The proposed site is situatedabout 14 km. in east directionfrom the Asansol MunicipalCorporation in Burdwan districtof West Bengal. The site is welllinked with roads and railways.

The Damodar River is about 11.0km away in the south of theproposed site. The study area ischaracterized by plain lands.

The topography of the StudyArea does not show muchvariation in the land use / land cover pattern.

FIGURE – 3.6.3




C3 - 30


The region is mostly covered by agricultural land with settlements andpatches of green vegetations either planted by local inhabitants or arethe natural vegetations within the study area. The land use / land coverpattern of the Study Area have been framed from the Satellite Imageryand Topo sheet and authenticated by field visit. The land use / landcover pattern of the Study Area, may be divided into following 9categories: (i)Agricultural Land, (ii)Forest and dense Vegetation,(iii)Settlements with vegetation, (iv)Settlements, (v)Open Area, (vi)Landwith scrubs, (vii)Water bodies, and (viii)River. The above categories ofland use and land cover pattern cover an area of about 314 sq.km. Thepercentage of land area covered in figure is mentioned in the Table andhas been illustrated through the pie diagram. The area under differentland use / land cover of Study Area is presented in the following Landuse and Land cover Map.

3.6.6 LAND UTILIZATION PATTERN

The land-use describes the change in pattern of land features due to thehuman activity.

As the land cover refers to the existing surface features on the earth.Thus, it describes the pattern of development of the area. The pattern ofland use and land cover is less variable. The land is the alluvial plain ofAjay River and Damodar River. So, the fertile land of the study area isused mostly for agriculture. The area is also densely populated withmany settlements within 10 km radius.

The study area within 10 km radius is spread over 314 sq.km area. Thecategories of forests, open area, land with scrub, river and water-bodiesare the land cover in the study area whereas the agricultural lands andthe settlements are under the categories for land use. The settlementswith vegetations fall in the category of land-use as well as the land-cover.This is because of the fact that some of the vegetations are naturalvegetation while some of the vegetations are planted by human beings.

The land use and land cover of the Study Area in particular settlementswith respect to the direction of Project site is mentioned in the followingTable and the pattern of land-use and land-cover is also describedbelow:

AGRICULTURAL LANDThe Agricultural land covers about 129.1 sq km of the land area that is41.1% of the total area which is the maximum area covered by thislanduse pattern within 10 km radius. Most of the land has singlecropped agricultural practice. Some part of the land has been kept ascurrent fallow where grasses are grown. This may be attributed to rainfed agricultural practice. These agricultural lands are used for seasonalcrops. Most of the land is cultivated. Also, vegetables are grown in some




C3 - 31


of the fallow land during March to May. People are mostly cultivators.Rice is the main staple crop of the region with maize and vegetables asthe secondary crops.

FOREST AND DENSE VEGETATIONThe category of forestland and dense vegetations in the study areaconsists mostly of open mixed jungle and dense vegetation on openlands or along roadside. As it is interpreted from the satellite imagery,the dense vegetation in the area also consists of the vegetations byplantations, social forestry and orchards in the area. Mostly open mixedjungle or the dense vegetations have been observed surrounding thesettlements. These kinds of dense vegetations occur in small portions inthe southern part near the settlements of Sarthakpur, Balanpur andTapasi, just 2 km away from the project site. It is also found in thesouthwestern part near Belebathan and J.K Nagar Township and in theeast-northeast near Pariharpur. These vegetations are tropical drydeciduous type. The trees are of average height and important trees aremango, banyan, banana, jackfruits, sal, mahua etc. The total forest areacovers only about 7.5 sq km which is 2.4% of the total land area.

VEGETATION WITHIN SETTLEMENTSThe category of Vegetations within settlements covers about 73.1 sq kmof land i.e. 23.3% of total land-use. The vegetations in the settlementsare green vegetations planted by local habitants mostly and some are thepart of the natural vegetation of the area surrounding the settlements.These vegetations are present in patches throughout the study areamostly in the western, southwestern, southern and southeastern part inthe study area. These also cover some portions of northeastern part ofthe study area. These vegetations are observed in patches because theseinclude the type of plantations like social forestry, orchards and gardens.These also include the natural mixed vegetations along the roadside orempty lands. The vegetations which remain after the clearance ofvegetated lands for agricultural use and for establishing settlements alsocome under this category. But in the present study area thesevegetations are not dense and consist of other shrubs, herbs and thinvegetations within the settlements.

SETTLEMENTSSettlements in the study area refer to the towns as well as villagesettlements with all infrastructural facilities like roads, railways,markets etc. It also covers the industrially built-up areas. The study areais densely populated area with many settlements spread along the mainroads and railways and along the National Highway, NH-2 also calledThe Grand Trunk Road.

Settlements cover mostly 22.9 sq km of land area which is 7.3% of thetotal 10 km study area. Among these settlements Jamuria is a




C3 - 32


prominent township in the northwest with around 4.0 km away from theproject site and Asansol city is located in the west just 14 km away fromthe proposed site. All kinds of infrastructure facilities are available inthese town settlements. Other Town settlements are Shripur, Ninga, J.KNagar Township, Siarsol etc. Some village settlements are Hijalgora,Barul in the north, Ratuibari, Chalbalpur, Satgram in the southwest,Shjibdanga in west-southwest, Bakdiha in the northeast, kenda,Dhorana, Parasia, Parashkol, Dhabdadihi etc in the southeast.

OPEN AREAOpen area covers the maximum land in the Study area. It is a categoryof wasteland. These are open barren land which is not suitable foragriculture. These lands have badland topography i.e. soil nutrients arelost either by erosion or frequent use by human beings. The lands aregenerally devoid of any green vegetation. Open area can be considered asland-cover as well as land-use.

Sometimes the vegetation on the patches of lands is cleared due tofrequent use for agriculture and other purposes. Because ofmultipurpose use these kinds of lands have lost the fertility and remainbarren without any vegetation. Such kind of open areas fall in thecategory of land-use. Sometimes due to presence of gravels and rocks orsimply sands, open areas are formed which are devoid of any vegetation.Such kind of open areas fall in the category of land-cover. In the studyarea the sandbars formed along the banks of Ajay River also comes inthe category of open area. These sandbars are formed in the summerseason when the water is dried up and depositions occur along the riverbanks.

The Study Area has 34.7 sq km of land under the category of open areawhich is 11.1% of total land use and land cover. Open area excluding thesand bars cover the entire study area in patches.

LAND WITH SCRUBThe land with scrubs covers about 41.3 sq km i.e., 13.2% of total landarea. This kind of land cover refers to the land area where the naturalvegetation consists of bushes and scrubs and very little growth ofgrasses. The soil of this type of land area with very few unwantedvegetation is unsuitable for agricultural purposes and is classified in thewasteland category. Only small thorny bushes and grasses are sustainedin this soil. Generally, this type of land cover may be observed to bespread within the agricultural land of any area. In the proposed studyarea also, this type of land-cover is spread throughout the study areaalong with the open areas.




C3 - 33


WATER BODIESWater bodies refer to the small water reservoirs like ponds, lakes, tanksetc. In the study areas these water bodies are present in small patchesin the western, southwestern, southern, southeastern and eastern part.Water bodies cover only 3.5 sq km of land area which is 1.1% of totalland use.

RIVERRiver Ajay is located in the NNE direction with respect to the Project Siteat about 7.0 km away. This River is flowing from north-northwest tonortheast direction in the study area. The River covers about 1.9 sq kmof land of the study area which is 0.6% of the total land area (314 sq km).

OTHER TRANSPORT NETWORKS AND CANALSApart from these Land use and Land cover categories there are networkof metalled and unmetalled roads crossing each other throughout theStudy Area. The main National Highway, NH-2 is about 6.0 km awayfrom the project site, passes in the south direction. The most importantrailway line of Eastern Railways passes in the southwest direction fromthe project site, connecting Delhi in the west and Kolkata in the south-east.

There are also some other railway lines which are the part of EasternRailways which join the main line. One line from Gourangdi in the northjoins the main line forming Andal loop and another from Sitarampur inthe northwest got dissected near Barabani forming two separate lines tojoin again to the Andal Loop and later to the main line. There are alsomany networks of roads running to many directions.

The land use pattern is shown in Figure-3.6.4 and the false colorcomposite is shown in Figure-3.6.5.




C3 - 34


FIGURE-3.6.4: LAND USE PATTERN OF THE STUDY AREA

M/S SHYAM SEL & POWER LTD.JAMURIA, PASCHIM BURDWAN, W.B.




C3 - 35


FIGURE – 3.6.5 : FALSE COLOUR COMPOSITE OF THE STUDY AREA

M/S SHYAM SEL & POWER LTD.JAMURIA, PASCHIM BURDWAN, W.B.




C3 - 36


3.7 SOILSoil may be defined as a thin layer of earth’s crust that serves as anatural medium for the growth of plants. It is the unconsolidatedmineral matter that has been subjected to and influenced by geneticand environmental factors such as parent materials, climate,organisms and physico-chemical action of wind, water and sunlight,all acting over a period of time. Soil differs from the parent materialsin the morphological, physical, chemical and biological properties.Also, soil differs among themselves in some or all the genetic orenvironmental factors, therefore, some soils are yellow, some areblack, some are coarse textured. They serve as a reservoir ofnutrients for plants and crop and also provide mechanical anchorageand favorable tilth. Soil of the area is very much controlled by thegeology. The soils of the area have been derived from ferruginousmaterial and shales. The area is a fairly broad band running fromeast to west, from the Ajay river, near Churuliathrough Raniganjcoalfield, up to Barakar, a tributary of river Damodar. The areabelongs to coal bearing Damodar series of Lower Gondwanasediments of middle Precambrian. The soils of the crest are welldeveloped, with argillic horizon. But because of convex topographyand susceptibility to erosion, the soils have moderate depth. Theseare well drained soils. Taxonomically, these soils belong to soil familyof fine, mixed, hyperthermic Typic Haplustalfs. All these soils havesubangular blocky structure at the surface and angular blocky in thesubsurface horizons. Weathered parent material mixed with soil andiron concretions has been observed at a depth of 74 cm. The area isoccasionally cultivated. They are mostly cultivated for crops likepaddy and wheat. This soils are of Madhudanga and Jamuria series.The western portion made up of hard rocks has a higher elevationthan the eastern portion which is covered by an alluvial blanketGeologically too, the Gondwana strata has ageneral southern dipvarying from 5° to 25n. Archean rocks have been exposed to formisolated hillock and pediment in the extreme North West. They have aloamy and sandy loamy cover. From the north western extreme theland slopes south eastwards first with a moderate slope and then agentle slope. The soil cover here varies from clay loam to clay. Furthereast, and in the central portion of the study area is the toe slopewhich has a soil cover varying between sandy clay loam to clay. Thealluvial blanket in the extreme east is made of soil varying between




C3 - 37


sandy clay loam to clay loam. Soils in the area are mostly sandy loamwith clay in texture and hence contain large percentage of silt andsand and hence possess medium water holding capacity. The soil inthe immediate vicinity of the project is loamy silt. Only in areas closeto rivers, soils are sandy silt. Alluvial soils are often very fertile. Spotsampling of soil samples from the core area and different places inthe buffer zone was carried out. Locations of soil sampling with codenumber are shown in Table-3.7.1 and soil characteristics of these soilsamples have been summarized in Table-3.7.2.

3.7.1 Physical CharacteristicsThe physical properties examined include colour, texture, bulkdensity, porosity and water holding capacity. Colour of soils wasobserved generally as Brown. It is well documented that Brownish soilare almost neutral in nature with sufficient amount of nitrogen,calcium, phosphate and other plant nutrients.

Soils having larger particles usually have higher bulk density thanthose of smaller particles. Bulk density of soils in the study areavaried between (1.13 - 1.18) gm/cm3 which is in normal range forsuch soils. Water Holding Capacity of these soils ranged between(30.8 – 34.3)%.

3.7.2 Chemical CharacteristicsThe soils were almost neutral pH range (5.1 – 5.7). Electricalconductivity (EC) was found varying between (520 – 577) µmhos/cm.In soil samples, calcium content of the soils varied between (0.25 -0.31)%. Ranges of sodium in the soils varied between (0.33 - 0.40)%.In soils, sodium generally occurs as NaCl, Na2SO4 and sometimes, asNa2CO3 and other soluble salts. In comparison to sodium, potassiumlevels were slightly low. Range of potassium varied between (0.22 -0.27)%. In the study area, Nitrogen level varied between (0.32 –0.40)%. Most of the nitrogen is available in form of nitrates, nitrites,NH4+ and organic nitrogen. The Phosphorous content ranged between(0.07 - 0.10)%. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) varied between(18.4 – 20.1 meq/100 gm). Ranges of Magnesium and Sulphur werevaried between (0.20 - 0.24)% and (0.18 – 0.24)%. Organic Matter inthe soils was observed to be ranging between (1.3 – 2.1)%.




C3 - 38


Table-3.7.1Code No of soil sampling locations with sampling session

Table-3.7.2Soil Quality Analysis of the Study Area

Sl.No.

PARAMETERS ANDUNIT SAMPLING LOCATIONS

RANGESQ-1 SQ-2 SQ-3 SQ-4

PHYSICAL CHARACTERESTICS

1 ColourReddishBrownClay

BrownClay

ReddishBrownClay

BrownClay -

2 TEXTUREb) Sand 26 28 25 29 25 – 29c) Silt 20 16 18 21 16 – 21d) Clay 54 56 57 50 50 – 57

3 BULK DENSITY(gm/cm3) 1.14 1.18 1.13 1.16 1.13 – 1.18

4 POROSITY (%) 39.4 38.4 37.6 38.8 37.6 – 39.4

5 WATER HOLDINGCAPACITY (%) 33.30 34.30 32.40 30.80 30.8 – 34.30

CHEMICAL CHARACTERESTICS1 pH 5.2 5.7 5.4 5.1 5.1 – 5.72 EC (µmhos/cm) 577 520 536 526 520 – 5773 Calcium (%) 0.28 0.31 0.27 0.25 0.25 – 0.314 Magnesium (%) 0.2 0.22 0.21 0.24 0.20 – 0.245 Sodium (%) 0.33 0.35 0.4 0.34 0.33 – 0.406 Potassium (%) 0.25 0.27 0.22 0.26 0.22 – 0.277 Sulphur (%) 0.18 0.21 0.24 0.19 0.18 – 0.248 Nitrogen (%) 0.37 0.4 0.32 0.34 0.32 – 0.409 Phosphorus (%) 0.09 0.07 0.1 0.08 0.07 – 0.1010 CEC ( meq/100 g) 19.6 20.1 18.4 19.5 18.4 – 20.111 Organic Matter (%) 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.3 1.3 – 2.112 Copper (mg/Kg) 15.1 13.8 14.6 12.4 12.4 – 15.113 Chromium (mg/Kg) 20.6 21.2 19.8 23.3 19.8 – 23.314 Zinc (mg/Kg) 11.4 13.1 10.4 11.7 10.4 – 13.1

Code Sampling LocationSamplingsession Samples have been

collected byrepresentatives of

Envirotech East Pvt.Ltd.

SQ-1: HormodangaDecember,

2018SQ-2: HijlagoraSQ-3: DhaslaSQ-4: Damodarpur




C3 - 39


Observation on soil characteristics:1) The pH of the soil was found to be slightly acidic, which will favour the

growth of biota.2) Texture was found to be sandy loam with moderate water holding

capacity3) Plant nutrient like phosphorus, nitrogen, potassium and organic matter

were found to be moderate level as per ICAR Handbook.4) Trace metals and non metals also were found to be sufficient for Plant

growth.

Conclusion:Results of the collected soil sample showed that the soil in this area is suitablefor cultivation of paddy, wheat and seasonal vegetables. It is also home formany beneficial biological organisms like bacteria, fungi, lichen, etc. Thenutrient status and pH of the soil certainly produces the food and fodder to theend user and retain the sustainability of top soil. No impact of surroundingindustry has been found.




C3 - 40


3.8 AIR QUALITY

3.8.1 SELECTION OF MONITORING STATIONSThe sources of air pollution in the region are industrial emissions,vehicular traffic, dust arising from unpaved village roads and domesticfuel burning. The prime objective of the baseline air quality study was toestablish the existing ambient air quality of the area. This will be usefulfor assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air qualityduring the operation of the proposed plant.

The monitoring locations for establishing the baseline status of ambientair quality has been identified on the basis of the followingconsiderations:

1. Meteorological conditions2. Topography of the study area3. Category of the area like habitat, forest etc.4. Representative of likely affected area

Further, due consideration was also given to the likely affected zonesduring construction and operation of the plant and transportation of rawmaterials and products from the plant. The location of human habitationand other sensitive areas within the study area were also considered inselection of ambient air quality monitoring locations.

Eight (8) numbers of monitoring stations were set up to assess theexisting air quality of the 10 km radius study area. One station waslocated near the project site and the seven others, outside the proposedproject site. The locations of the monitoring stations were based on thefrequent wind directions in order to site the stations as close as feasibleto the anticipated maximum pollutant deposition areas, moreover, dulyconsidering human habitation and proximity to sensitive zones withinthe study area. Logistic considerations as ready accessibility, security,availability of reliable power supply etc. were examined while finalizingthe monitoring locations.

The Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations have been presented inFigure-3.8.1. The relative direction and distance of these locations withrespect to the project site have been tabulated in Table-3.8.1.




C3 - 41


3.8.2 PARAMETERS & FREQUENCY OF MONITORINGAmbient Air Quality Monitoring has been conducted for the period(October, 2018 - December, 2018) at a frequency of twice a week at eachstation adopting a continuous 24 hours schedule in respect of thefollowing parameters:

- Particulate Matter-10 (PM10)- Particulate Matter-2.5 (PM2.5)- Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)- Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)

Carbon Monoxide (CO) monitoring has been conducted for the sameperiod at a frequency of twice a week at each station adopting acontinuous 8 hours schedule.

The equipment was placed at a height of 3.0 to 4.5 metres above groundlevel at each monitoring station, thus negating the effects of windblownground dust. The equipment was placed at open space free from treesand other obstruction which otherwise act as a sink of pollutantsresulting in lower levels in monitoring results.

Table - 3.8.1Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations in the study area

Code LocationName

Approx.Areal

Distancefromprojectsite

(in km)

Directionfromprojectsite

Criteria forSelection

LocationCo-ordinates

Latitude Longitude

AQ1 Near ProjectSite - -

Representationof the Project

Site23°41'36.69"N 87° 7'7.76"E

AQ2 Hormodanga 2.0 N

Located inmost

predominantdown windDirection

23°42'36.52"N 87°6'28.97"E

AQ3 Damodarpur 3.5 NW

Located in the2nd

predominantdown windDirection

23°42'5.06"N 87°5'23.11"E

AQ4 Jadudanga 3.4 SWLocated in theSettlement

Area23°40'45.37"N 87°

5'23.97"E




C3 - 42


AQ5 Sarthakpur 2.5 S

Located inmost

predominantup windDirection

23°40'24.76"N 87° 7'3.98"E

AQ6 Dhasla 3.4 SE

Located in the2nd

predominantup windDirection

23°40'52.68"N 87°8'19.26"E

AQ7 Bijaynagar 2.0 ELocated in theSettlement

Area23°41'49.74"N 87°

7'59.70"E

AQ8 Hijalgora 2.8 NELocated in theSettlement

Area23°42'45.64"N 87°

7'31.06"E




C3 - 43


Sl. No. LocationAQ1 Near Project SiteAQ2 HormodangaAQ3 DamodarpurAQ4 JadudangaAQ5 SarthakpurAQ6 DhaslaAQ7 BijaynagarAQ8 Hijalgora




C3 - 44


Table - 3.8.2Statistical Analysis of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results

(PERIOD: October, 2018 - December, 2018)Pollutants Locations MES Min Max A.M. P - 98

PM10

(µg/m3)

Near Project Site 26 70 118 87.5 111.5Hormodanga 26 61 97 76.0 95.5Damodarpur 26 66 98 81.5 95.5Jadudanga 26 63 97 79.3 94.5Sarthakpur 26 65 96 78.2 95.0Dhasla 26 68 105 83.4 104.0Bijaynagar 26 62 113 82.0 105.5Hijalgora 26 64 99 76.3 96.5Overall 208 61 118 80.5 -

PM2.5

(µg/m3)


SO2

(µg/m3)


NO2

(µg/m3)





C3 - 45


Table – 3.8.2Statistical Analysis of Pollutants

(Period: October, 2018 - December, 2018)Pollutants Locations MES Min Max A.M. P -98

Ozone(µg/m3)


Lead (Pb)(µg/m3)

Near Project Site 26 0.11 0.20 0.15 0.20Hormodanga 26 0.09 0.17 0.12 0.17Damodarpur 26 0.05 0.15 0.10 0.15Jadudanga 26 0.08 0.16 0.11 0.15Sarthakpur 26 0.06 0.14 0.09 0.13Dhasla 26 0.07 0.22 0.12 0.21Bijaynagar 26 0.08 0.21 0.14 0.21Hijalgora 26 0.05 0.13 0.08 0.12Overall 208 0.05 0.22 0.11 -

Nickel (Ni)(ng/m3)

Near Project Site 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLHormodanga 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLDamodarpur 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLJadudanga 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLSarthakpur 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLDhasla 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLBijaynagar 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLHijalgora 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLOverall 208 - - - -

Arsenic (As)(ng/m3)

Near Project Site 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLHormodanga 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLDamodarpur 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLJadudanga 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLSarthakpur 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLDhasla 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLBijaynagar 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLHijalgora 26 BDL BDL BDL BDLOverall 208 - - - -




C3 - 46


Table - 3.8.2 (Contd…)Statistical Analysis of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results

(PERIOD: October, 2018 - December, 2018)

Pollutants Locations MES Min Max A.M. P - 98

CO(mg/m3)

Near Project Site 78 0.438 1.512 0.766 1.461Hormodanga 78 0.325 1.269 0.642 1.168Damodarpur 78 0.344 1.440 0.734 1.333Jadudanga 78 0.340 1.290 0.743 1.198Sarthakpur 78 0.313 1.132 0.682 1.104Dhasla 78 0.418 1.387 0.708 1.347Bijaynagar 78 0.388 1.466 0.748 1.448Hijalgora 78 0.348 1.204 0.652 1.109Overall 624 0.313 1.512 0.709 -

Where,MES: No. of Measurements; MIN: Minimum; Max: Maximum, P-98: 98 Percentile value;AM: Arithmetic Mean;

PM10: Particulate Matter size less than or equal to 10 µg/m3;PM2.5 : Particulate Matter less than or equal to 2.5 µg/m3;SO2: Sulphur Dioxide;NO2: Nitrogen Dioxide;CO: Carbon Monoxide;

3.8.3 Results & DiscussionsThe Minimum, Maximum, Arithmetic Mean (AM) and 98-percentilevalues for the monitoring period have been shown in Table - 3.8.2.

The following implications can be made on the basis of the obtainedresults:

3.8.3.1 Particulate Matter (PM10)Arithmetic Mean of the 24-hourly average values of PM10 variedstation-wise between 76.0 g/m3 (at Hormodanga) and 87.5 g/m3

(near Project Site) with overall mean of the 8 stations being 80.5g/m3.

The 24-hourly average 98-percentile value of PM10 at three locationexceeds the limit of 100 g/m3, as stipulated in the National AmbientAir Quality Standards, 2009. But at the remaining five locations, thevalue is within the limit of 100 g/m3.




C3 - 47


The considerably high values of PM10 at three locations can beattributed to the existence of a number of Brick making plants ofabsolute technology, operating in the nearby areas. Use of coal indomestic sigris also contributes to high PM level in some villages.

3.8.3.2 Particulate Matter (PM2.5)Arithmetic Mean of the 24-hourly average values of PM2.5 variedstation-wise between 31.2 g/m3 (at Hijalgora) and 37.5 g/m3 (nearProject Site). The overall mean for the 8 stations was 33.9 g/m3.

The 24-hourly average 98-percentile values of PM2.5 (max 49.9 g/m3

near Project Site), at all the locations were observed to be well withinthe limit of 60 g/m3, as stipulated in the National Ambient AirQuality Standards, 2009.

3.8.3.3 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)Arithmetic mean of 24-hourly average values of SO2 varied stationwise between 10.7 g/m3 (at Hormodanga) and 16.6 g/m3 (NearProject site). The overall mean for the 8 stations was 12.7 g/m3.

The 24-hourly average of 98-percentile values of SO2 observed (max23.5 g/m3 near project site) at all the locations were well below thepermissible limit of 80 g/m3 for industrial areas, as stipulated in theNational Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009.

3.8.3.4 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)The overall mean of 24-hourly average values of NO2 over the entirearea was 16.7 g/m3 while individual arithmetic mean levelscomputed at the 8 stations ranged between 22.0 g/m3 (atHormodanga) and 30.0 g/m3 (at Dhasla).

The 24-hourly average 98-percentile values of NO2 (max 28.5 g/m3

(at Damodarpur) at all the locations were well below the permissiblelimit of 80 g/m3, as stipulated in the National Ambient Air QualityStandards, 2009.

3.8.3.5 Carbon Monoxide (CO)The overall arithmetic mean of 8-hourly average values of CO overthe entire study area was 0.709 mg/m3 while individual arithmeticmean levels computed at all 8 stations ranged between 0.642 mg/m3

(at Hormodanga) and 0.766 mg/m3 (near Project Site). ArithmeticMean of the 8-hourly average values of CO at all locations is withinthe permissible limit of 2.0 mg/m3, as stipulated in National AmbientAir Quality Standards, 2009.




C3 - 48


3.8.3.6 Ozone (O3)The overall arithmetic mean of 8-hourly average values of O3 over theentire study area was 17.2 g/m3 while individual arithmetic mean levelscomputed at 8 stations ranged between 14.1 g/m3(at Jadudanga Village)to 19.7 g/m3 (near Project site). Arithmetic Mean of the 8-hourly averagevalues of O3 at all locations is under the limit of (100 g/m3) NationalAmbient Air Quality Standards, 2009.

The 8-hourly average 98-percentile values of O3 (max 31.0 g/m3 observedNear Bijaynagar Village) at all the locations were well below thepermissible limit of 100 g/m3, as stipulated in the National Ambient AirQuality Standards, 2009.

3.8.3.7 Lead (Pb)The overall arithmetic mean of 24-hourly average values of Pb over theentire study area was 0.11 g/m3 while individual arithmetic mean levelscomputed at 8 stations ranged between (0.08 - 0.15) g/m3. ArithmeticMean of the 24-hourly average values of Pb at all locations is under thelimit of (1.0 µg/m3) National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009.

The 24-hourly average 98-percentile values of Pb (max 0.218 g/m3

observed near Dhasla Village) at all the locations were well below thepermissible limit of 1.0 g/m3, as stipulated in the National Ambient AirQuality Standards, 2009.

3.8.3.8 Arsenic (As) and Nickel (Ni)The values of both these parameters at these selected 8 locations werefound Below Detection Limit (BDL).

3.8.4 ConclusionThe values of all the pollutants at the respective locations were within theacceptable ranges as per NAAQS.

The graphical analyses of the concentrations of all pollutants have beenshown in Figure-3.8.2 to Figure-3.8.8.




C3 - 49


FIGURE-3.8.2: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF PM10

FIGURE-3.8.3: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF PM2.5




C3 - 50


FIGURE-3.8.4: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF SO2

FIGURE-3.8.5: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF NO2




C3 - 51


FIGURE-3.8.6: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF CO

FIGURE-3.8.7: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF OZONE




C3 - 52


FIGURE-3.8.8: STATISTICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF LEAD (Pb)




C3 - 53


3.9 METEOROLOGY3.9.1 LOCATION

The climate of the area is characterized by a hot and dry summerfrom March to May, a south-west monsoon or rainy season from Juneto September, a pleasant post-monsoon or retreating monsoon fromOctober to November and a cool winter from December to February.Therefore, climatologically, four seasons viz. summer (pre-monsoon),monsoon, post-monsoon and winter could be deciphered comprisingthe following months:

Summer : March, April, MayMonsoon : June, July, August, and SeptemberPost-monsoon : October, NovemberWinter : December, January, and February

3.9.2 PAST RECORDS OF IMD, DURGAPUR3.9.2.1 Data Collected

The meteorological data described in this section have been collectedfrom the IMD Station located at Durgapur, which is around 12 km.from the Project Site and deemed to be representative of the studyarea. The station is observed to be well manned and equipped.Available meteorological data for the past 15 years’ period (1971-1985)have been collected and have been summarized. The climatic featuresof this station are presented in Tables 3.9.1 and 3.9.2.

3.9.2.2 TemperatureAt Durgapur, The overall mean dry bulb temperature for the past 13years’ period (1971 – 1985) was recorded 26.3oC in day time and28.1oC in night time while the overall mean wet bulb temperature forthe past 30 years’ period (1971 – 2000) was recorded 22.5oC in daytime and 23.2oC in night time (Table-3.9.1).

3.9.2.3 Relative HumidityHumidity was fairly high through the major part of the year atDurgapur. In day time the overall mean relatively humidity was 70%while in night time it was 66% (Table-3.9.1). The mean relativehumidity of Monsoon and Post monsoon seasons was rangingbetween 68% - 84% in day time and 64% - 81% in night tine. Themean relative humidity of summer and winter seasons was rangingbetween 53% - 67% in day time and 45% - 62% in night time. Fromthese 13 years’ IMD data it was found that the relative humidity wasfairly very high in Monsoon season (June, July, August, andSeptember).

3.9.2.4 Rainfall and Rainy DaysThe total annual mean rainfall received is about 1910.2 mm atDurgapur (Table-3.9.1). Rainfall was peaked during the month of July




C3 - 54


(mean monthly rainfall in July was 600.4 mm). The lowest rainfallwas occurred during the month of January (mean monthly rainfall inJanuary was 7.7 mm). Total annual mean number of rainy days wasabout 68.1 in Durgapur.

3.9.2.5 Cloud CoverThe mean monthly data revealed that the cloud cover in day timeranged between 1.1 Oktas (at month of January) to 5.5 Oktas (atmonth of August) and in time time it ranged between 1.0 Oktas (atmonth of January) to 5.5 Oktas (at month of July and August). Theoverall annual mean cloud cover was found 2.7 Oktas in both dayand night time (Table-3.9.1).

3.9.2.6 Wind Speed and DirectionThe annual mean wind speed is around 7.8 km/hr at Durgapur withthe mean monthly wind speed was ranged between 5.1 km/hr (duringNovember) and 10.1 km/hr (during May) at Durgapur (Table-3.9.1).The predominant wind direction was observed South-West, followedby North and South.

3.9.3 ON-SITE METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATORYAir Pollutants upon discharge to atmosphere pass through a numberof mechanisms, which include diffusion and transportation leading todispersion. These mechanisms are governed by the local atmosphericconditions. All these results in the necessity to collect themeteorological parameters like ambient temperature, wind speed,wind direction, and other weather conditions (relative humidity,atmospheric pressure etc.), which will be ultimately used for theprediction of the ground level concentrations of the air pollutantsthrough mathematical modelling.

For this purpose as also to corroborate and supplement the long termmeteorological data availed from IMD, Durgapur, a sophisticated on-site meteorological observatory was established close to the projectsite and operated continuously for three months period (October,2018 – December, 2018).

The observatory was located about 10 m above the ground level andensured to be free from any obstruction to wind. Besides, thislocation was found to be most suitable one being close to the projectsite. The summary of the on-site data generated in respect of theabove parameters for the period mentioned above are presented inTable-3.9.2. The Wind rose diagram for the entire period is shown inFigure-3.9.1 to Figure-3.9.4.




C3 - 55


3.9.3.1 On-Site Meteorological Data

TemperatureThe monthly maximum and minimum temperatures recorded on-siteduring the aforesaid monitoring period (October, 2018 – December,2018) varied between (26.5 – 32.5)°C and (8.5 – 20.0)°C respectivelywith overall maximum and minimum temperatures being 32.5°C and8.5°C respectively (Table-3.9.2). It could be observed that, the patternof data recorded on-site generally matches with the past data of IMDdata.

Relative HumidityThe monthly minimum and maximum relative humidity recorded on-site during the said monitoring period varied between (48-56)% and(73-80)% respectively, the overall minimum and maximum being 48%& 80% respectively (Table-3.9.2).

Atmospheric PressureThe overall minimum and maximum atmospheric pressures recordedon-site during the said monitoring period were 749.6 mmHg and758.6 mmHg respectively (Table-3.9.2).

Wind Speed and DirectionDuring the said monitoring period, the monthly mean wind speedmeasured on-site varied between 3.46 km/hr (October, 2018) to 4.54km/hr (November, 2018) (Table-3.9.2). The overall mean wind speedduring the period was 3.93 km/hr. The predominant wind directionwas observed North-West.




C3 - 56


Table 3.9.1Mean Monthly Summary of Climatological Data Collected from

IMD, Durgapur (1971-1985)




C3 - 57


Table 3.9.2Onsite Meteorological Data in the study area

(October, 2018 - December, 2018)

Month

TemperatureRelativeHumidity

BarometricPressure Average

Velocity(km/hr)

Max. Min.08:30hrs

17:30hrs

08:30hrs

17:30hrs

(°C) (%) (mm Hg)October,2018

32.5 20.0 56 73 749.6 756.8 3.46

November,2018

26.5 10.5 48 73 751.1 758.6 4.54

December,2018

28.5 8.5 55 80 751.6 758.6 3.78

OVERALL 32.5 8.5 48 73 749.6 758.6 3.93




C3 - 58


Fig No. 3.9.3 - Wind RoseDiagram

(Calm : 22.13%)(December, 2018)

Fig No. 3.9.1 - Wind Rose Diagram(Calm: 23.53%) (October, 2018)

Fig No. 3.9.2 - Wind Rose Diagram(Calm: 25.00%) (November, 2018)

Fig No. 3.9.4 - Overall Wind Rosediagram

(Calms – 23.56%)(October, 2018 – December, 2018)




C3 - 59


3.10 WATER ENVIRONMENTThe main surface water body in the study area is river Damodar andriver Ajay, which flow towards North-west to South-east w.r.t. theproject Site. Besides, a number of scattered confined water bodies, viz.Tanks, ponds, roadside burrows etc. exist within the study area.

3.10.1 PRESENT WATER USEThe water demand of the area can be broadly classified into twomajor groups, viz. Domestic and industrial. These two rivers are metfrom various surface water resources.

3.10.2 WATER QUALITY

Water samples were collected and analyzed at total eight (8) locationsfor surface water, including Ajay River and six (6) pond water samplesand eight (8) locations for ground water to assess the water quality inthe study area.

All the samples were analyzed with respect to physical, chemical andbiological parameters including toxic organics and metals, adoptingStandard methods. The locations of the sampling points have beenpresented in Table-3.10.1. Surface water and Ground water samplinglocations have been presented in Figure-3.10.1 and Figure-3.10.2respectively.

3.10.2.1 Surface Water QualitySurface Water samples were collected from 6 ponds (SW3 to SW8) & 2samples from Ajay river (SW1 & SW2). Locations of surface watersampling have been shown in Table-3.10.1.

River Water Quality from Ajay (SW1 & SW2)The water quality monitoring results of the river has been compiled inTable-3.10.2.

pH values of the collected samples from river Ajay were found to be6.8 and 7.0. The values of Dissolved Oxygen were observed 6.8 mg/land 6.9 mg/l. Values of Total Dissolved Solids from the samples werefound 172 mg/l and 165 mg/l while values of total Hardness werefound 120 mg/l and 104 mg/l. Values of Calcium were found to be 38mg/l and 30 mg/l while values of Magnesium were found to be 6mg/l and 7 mg/l. Sulphate, Nitrate and Chloride were observed to be




C3 - 60


6 mg/l & 5 mg/l, 2.2 mg/l & 2.2 mg/l and 30 mg/l & 34 mg/l. TheIron contents from these two samples were found to be 0.18 mg/l and0.14 mg/l respectively.

Heavy metals like copper, lead, mercury, cadmium and chromium ofboth the rivers were below their respective detection limits.

Pond Water QualityThe water quality monitoring results of six (6) pond water samples(SW3 to SW10) has been compiled in Table-3.10.2.

The pH value from the collected pond water samples was found in therange of (6.7 - 7.4). Dissolved Oxygen was observed in the range of(5.7 - 6.4) mg/lit. Total Dissolved Solids were found in the range of(212 – 286) mg/lit while Total Hardness was found in the range of(137 – 196) mg/lit. Chloride, Calcium & Magnesium were found fromthese six pond water samples varying in the ranges of (50 – 72) mg/lit,(40 – 52) mg/lit and (9 – 16) mg/lit respectively.

Heavy metals like copper, lead, mercury, cadmium and chromiumwere below their respective detection limits.

Conclusion from Surface water AnalysisConclusion can be drawn in the light of the overall analysis made sofar that both the surface & the ground water in the study area is freeof any kind of industrial and urban pollution and has been found tobe generally fit for human consumption.

The physico-chemical characteristics of both the river water sampleswere found to be similar in nature except the total coliform in whichdownstream water showed a higher value, which may be due tourban discharge.

As per CPCB norms of classification of surface water, both the pond& river water quality falls under the cover of “C” which indicate thatboth sources of water are fit for drinking purposes after Conventionaltreatment and disinfection. Also as per Canadian Water Quality Index,the calculated WQI value for river water is coming to 92.80, whichshows that total coliforms count and BOD failed in almost all sampleas per guidelines and water quality is good (80-94) and is protectedwith slight presence of impairment. For pond water the calculated




C3 - 61


WQI value is coming to 93.55 and water quality is good (80-94) withslight presence of impairment

3.10.2.2 GROUND WATER QUALITYGround Water samples (from bore-well) were collected from 8locations (GW1 to GW8). Locations of ground water sampling havebeen shown in Table-3.10.1. The ground water quality monitoringresults have been presented in Table-3.10.3.

The pH values of collected ground water samples were found in therange of (6.9 – 7.5). Values of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) were foundin the ranges of (288 – 404) mg/lit while Total Hardness were found inthe ranges of (178 – 231) mg/lit. Calcium and Magnesium were foundvarying in the ranges of (57 – 76) mg/lit and (6 – 14) mg/litrespectively. Sulphate, Nitrate and Chloride were observed in theranges of (6 – 15) mg/lit, (1.5 – 3.5) mg/lit and (58 – 102) mg/litrespectively. Iron contents were found in the ranges of (0.11 – 0.35)mg/lit and zinc contents were found (0.06 – 0.17) mg/lit. Alkalinitywas found in the ranges of (179 – 239) mg/lit.

Other heavy metals like copper, Chromium, Cadmium, arsenic andlead were below their respective detection limits.

Conclusion:Ground water physico-chemical properties in the study area showedthat the water Start mainly from Carbonate – Bicarbonate buffersystem have appreciable amount of alkalinity, calcium & Magnesiumwhich are beneficial for human health. The other parameters arecomparable and fit for direct human consumption except Iron contentwhich is only aesthetic value and the water quality of this area are asper BIS-10500 drinking water norms. As per Canadian Water QualityIndex the calculated WQI value is coming to 95.40, which indicatesthat the ground water quality in the study area is excellent (95-100)and quality is protected with virtual absence of impairment.

Surface water and Ground water sampling locations have beenpresented in Figure-3.10.1 and Figure-3.10.2 respectively.




C3 - 62


Table 3.10.1Water Quality Monitoring Locations in the Study Area

SampleCode

LOCATION

Surface WaterSW1 Ajay River(Near Dorbodanga)SW2 Ajay River (Near Jamuria - 2)SW3 Pond water (Dhasna)SW4 Pond water (Barul)SW5 Pond water (Jot Jonaki)SW6 Pond water (Chak Dola)SW7 Pond water (Benali)SW8 Pond water (Jamuria)

Ground WaterGW1 Near project Site (Borewell water)GW2 Jamuria (Borewell water)GW3 Benali (Borewell water)GW4 Damodarpur (Bore well water)GW5 Jot Jonaki (Borewell water)GW6 Hijolgora (Borewell water)GW7 Sharthakpur (Borewell water)GW8 Bijaynagar (Borewell water)




C3 - 63


Table 3.10.2Surface Water Quality Analysis in the Study Area

Sl.No. Parameter Unit Sample Code

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW51 Colour Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless2 Odour Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj.3 pH 6.8 7.0 6.7 7.3 6.94 Conductivity µmhos/cm 302 288 452 399 4085 Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 6.8 6.9 6.4 6.2 6.4

6Biochemical OxygenDemand(3 days at 270C)

mg/L 6 5 7 6 8

7 Total Coliforms MPN/100mL 2335 1470 465 930 1111

8 Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 172 165 253 228 2339 Oil & Grease mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.0110 Cyanide ( as CN ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0511 Phenol ( as C6H5OH ) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

12 Total Hardness ( asCaCO3 ) mg/L 120 104 158 149 162

13 Chloride ( as Cl ) mg/L 30 34 66 58 6214 Sulphate ( as SO4 ) mg/L 6 5 10 8 1415 Nitrate ( as NO3 ) mg/L 2.2 2.2 3.3 2.7 3.016 Fluoride ( as F ) mg/L 0.42 0.46 0.55 0.5 0.4417 Calcium ( as Ca ) mg/L 38 30 40 43 4518 Magnessium ( as Mg ) mg/L 6 7 14 10 1219 Copper ( as Cu ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0520 Iron ( as Fe ) mg/L 0.18 0.14 0.35 0.4 0.3621 Manganese ( as Mn ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0522 Zinc ( as Zn ) mg/L 0.1 0.12 0.15 0.2 0.1823 Boron ( as B ) mg/L <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.0224 Arsenic ( as As ) mg/L <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.00225 Mercury ( as Hg ) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.00126 Lead ( as Pb ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0527 Alkalinity ( as CaCO3 ) mg/L 112 102 130 124 11228 Cadmium ( as Cd ) mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

29 Hexavalent Chromium( as Cr+6 ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

CODE LOCATION NAMESW1 Ajay River (Near Dorbodanga)SW2 Ajoy River (Near Jamuria - 2)SW3 Pond water (Dhasna)SW4 Pond water (Barul)SW5 Pond water (Jot Jonaki)




C3 - 64


Table 3.10.2 (Contd…)Surface Water Quality Analysis in the study area

Sl.No. Parameter Unit

Sample CodeSW6 SW7 SW8 Range

(SW3 – SW8)1 Colour Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless2 Odour Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj.3 pH 7.1 7.4 6.9 6.7 - 7.44 Conductivity µmhos/cm 378 484 510 378 - 5105 Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 6.1 5.9 5.7 5.7 - 6.4

6Biochemical OxygenDemand(3 days at 270C)

mg/L 5 7 9 5 - 9

7 Total Coliforms MPN/100mL 750 885 663 465 - 1111

8 Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 212 276 286 212 - 2869 Oil & Grease mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 -10 Cyanide ( as CN ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -11 Phenol ( as C6H5OH ) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 -

12 Total Hardness ( asCaCO3 ) mg/L 137 182 196 137 - 196

13 Chloride ( as Cl ) mg/L 50 60 72 50 - 7214 Sulphate ( as SO4 ) mg/L 7 12 10 7 - 1415 Nitrate ( as NO3 ) mg/L 2.9 3.1 3.6 2.7 - 3.616 Fluoride ( as F ) mg/L 0.3 0.55 0.56 0.3 - 0.5617 Calcium ( as Ca ) mg/L 40 48 52 40 - 5218 Magnessium ( as Mg ) mg/L 9 15 16 9 - 1619 Copper ( as Cu ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -20 Iron ( as Fe ) mg/L 0.4 0.35 0.44 0.35 - 0.4421 Manganese ( as Mn ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -22 Zinc ( as Zn ) mg/L 0.15 0.21 0.23 0.15 - 0.2323 Boron ( as B ) mg/L <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 -24 Arsenic ( as As ) mg/L <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 -25 Mercury ( as Hg ) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 -26 Lead ( as Pb ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -27 Alkalinity ( as CaCO3 ) mg/L 119 165 159 112 - 16528 Cadmium ( as Cd ) mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 -

29 Hexavalent Chromium(as Cr+6 ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -

CODE LOCATION NAMESW6 Pond water (Chak Dola)SW7 Pond water (Benali)SW8 Pond water (Jamuria)




C3 - 65


Table 3.10.3Ground Water Quality Analysis in the study area

Sl.No.

Parameter Unit SAMPLE CODEGW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5

1 Colour Hazen Colour Colour Colourless Colourless Colourless

2 Odour - Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj.3 Taste - Agree Agree Agree Agree Agree4 Turbidity NTU <1 <1 <1 <1 <15 pH - 6.9 7.1 7.2 7.4 7.26 Conductivity µmhos/cm 720 586 549 634 5297 Total Hardness(as CaCO3) mg/L 223 192 178 212 1848 Iron (as Fe) mg/L 0.25 0.11 0.14 0.21 0.359 Chloride (as Cl) mg/L 98 70 66 83 6810 Residual Free Chlorine mg/L nil nil nil nil nil11 Fluoride (as F) mg/L 0.35 0.29 0.46 0.34 0.3512 Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 404 328 307 355 30213 Calcium (as Ca) mg/L 66 57 58 75 5714 Magnessium (as Mg) mg/L 14 12 8 6 1015 Copper (as Cu) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0516 Manganese (as Mn) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0517 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/L 12 9 7 10 818 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/L 2.0 2.6 2.4 3.1 2.919 Phenol Compounds

(as C6H5OH ) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

20 Mercury (as Hg) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.00121 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.0122 Arsenic (as As) mg/L <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 <0.00223 Cyanide (as CN) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0524 Lead (as Pb) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0525 Zinc (as Zn) mg/L 0.17 0.09 0.11 0.12 0.0626 Hexavalent Chromium (as Cr+6 ) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.0527 Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/L 239 205 190 199 17928 Boron (as B) mg/L <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.0229 Total Coliforms MPN/100ml absent absent absent absent absent

CODE LOCATION NAMEGW1 Near project Site (Borewell water)GW2 Jamuria (Borewell water)GW3 Benali (Borewell water)GW4 Damodarpur (Bore well water)GW5 Jot Jonaki (Borewell water)




C3 - 66


Table 3.10.3 (Contd...)Ground Water Quality Analysis in the study area

Sl.No.

Parameter Unit SAMPLE CODEGW6 GW7 GW8 Range

(GW1-GW8)1 Colour Hazen Colour Colour Colour2 Odour - Unobj. Unobj. Unobj. Unobj.3 Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable4 Turbidity NTU <1 <1 <1 -5 pH - 7.5 7.4 7.3 6.9 – 7.56 Conductivity µmhos/cm 668 698 515 515 – 7207 Total Hardness(as CaCO3) mg/L 208 231 190 178 – 2318 Iron (as Fe) mg/L 0.24 0.27 0.11 0.11 – 0.359 Chloride (as Cl) mg/L 92 102 58 58 – 10210 Residual Free Chlorine mg/L nil nil nil -11 Fluoride (as F) mg/L 0.36 0.43 0.2 0.2 – 0.4612 Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 374 390 288 288 – 40413 Calcium (as Ca) mg/L 65 76 58 57 – 7614 Magnessium (as Mg) mg/L 11 10 11 6 – 1415 Copper (as Cu) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -16 Manganese (as Mn) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -17 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/L 13 15 6 6 – 1518 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/L 3.4 3.5 1.5 1.5 – 3.519 Phenol Compounds

(as C6H5OH )mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 -

20 Mercury (as Hg) mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 -21 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 -22 Arsenic (as As) mg/L <0.002 <0.002 <0.002 -23 Cyanide (as CN) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -24 Lead (as Pb) mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -25 Zinc (as Zn) mg/L 0.12 0.14 0.09 0.06 – 0.1726 Hexavalent Chromium (as

Cr+6 )mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 -

27 Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/L 200 218 187 179 – 23928 Boron (as B) mg/L <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 -

29 Total Coliforms MPN/100ml absent absent absent -

CODE LOCATION NAMEGW6 Hijolgora ( Borewell water)GW7 Sharthakpur ( Borewell water)GW8 Bijaynagar ( Borewell water)




C3 - 67


3.11 NOISEA total of Ten (10) locations within an area of 10 km radius aroundthe project site have been selected for measurement of ambient noiselevels. These locations have been displayed in Table-3.11.1.

3.11.1 Major Sources of Noise in the Study AreaThe study area is of both industrial & residential in nature. Vehicularmovement on the roads is a source of noise in those residential &industrial areas. This increases the ambient noise levels. There arealso a number of other domestic noise sources such as television,radio, loud speakers, etc.

3.11.2 Ambient Noise MonitoringIn the present study, a sound level meter has measured soundpressure levels. Since loudness of sound is important for its effects onpeople, the dependence of loudness on frequency must be taken intoaccount in environmental noise assessment. This has been achievedby using A-weighting filters in the noise measuring instrument whichgives a direct reading of approximate loudness. Moreover, A-weightedequivalent continuous sound pressure level (Leq) values have beencomputed from the values of A-weighted sound pressure level (SPL)measured with the help of a noise meter.

A preliminary reconnaissance survey was undertaken to identify themajor noise sources in the area. The sampling location in the areawas identified considering location of industry, commercial shoppingcomplex activities, residential areas with various traffic activity andsensitive areas like hospital, court, temple, schools etc.

At each location, readings were taken at uniform interval over atwenty-four hours period, divided into day and night shifts. For aparticular location daytime Leq has been computed from the SPLvalues measured between 6.00 A.M to 10.00 P.M and night time Leqfrom the SPL values measured between 10.00 P.M to 6.00 A.M, suchthat comparison could be made with the National Ambient NoiseStandards.

3.11.3 Noise Levels in the Study AreaThe noise levels were monitored at 10 (Ten) locations. Monitoring wasdone, covering both day and night time. Noise levels in Leq at therespective locations separately for Day and Night times have beenpresented in Table-3.11.1.




C3 - 68


During the day time, the equivalent noise levels were found to vary inthe range of (56.4 - 68.6) dB(A) while in the night time, the equivalentnoise levels were observed to vary in the range of (45.9 – 59.0) dB(A).The variation of noise level in day & night time has been presented inFigure-3.11.1.

As usual, the day time noise levels were found to be higher thanthose observed at night level.

CONCLUSIONThe noise level in the study area were found to be normal as perCPCB guide line and to some extent quite in nature.

TABLE-3.11.1Equivalent Noise Level in the Study Area, Leq in dB(A)

SL.NO.

LOCATIONS Category EQUIVALENT NOISELEVEL, Leq in dB(A)DAY NIGHT

1. Near Project Site Industrial 67.1 57.92. Near Shyam sel Limited Industrial 68.6 59.03. Village Hijalgora Residential 58.8 49.14. Village Ikrah Residential 59.8 49.75. Village Damodarpur Residential 58.4 47.36. Village Bijaynagar Residential 56.8 46.47. Chokdola More Commercial 63.3 50.18. Mamudpur Primary School Silence 56.7 45.99. Benali High School Silence 58.2 47.810. Mandalpur Block Primary

Health CentreSilence 56.4 46.4

N.B. Day time is reckoned between 0600 Hrs to 2200 Hrs.Night Time is reckoned between 2200 Hrs to 0600 Hrs.




C3 - 69


3.12 ECOLOGYBiological environment is a good bio-indicator of changingenvironmental quality. The concept of ecology has been increasinglyused as conceptual focus for conservation policy and to measurespecies extinction and ecosystem loss in response to natural andhuman induced selection pressures. Thus, in any environmentalanalysis where integration of ecological thoughts into planningprocess is required, such kind of analysis of biological environmentalstatus, survey is very significant. So, this type of assessment includesevaluation of both the terrestrial & aquatic ecology.

Natural Flora and Fauna are key features of an environment sincethey form of distinctive community having mutual dependencesamong their 3 types of bio-diversity, i.e., genetic diversity, speciesdiversity and ecological diversity and so diverse degree of respondsand sensitivities to physical influences.

3.12.1 STUDY METHODOLOGYBiological environment is a good bio-indicator of changingenvironmental quality. A reconnaissance survey was undertakenaround the proposed project site. In the present survey 10 km radiusarea around the proposed project site was considered as the studyarea. Both terrestrial and aquatic ecological analysis was carried outin the field and in the laboratory. Assessment of flora and fauna wasundertaken in the study area. Ecological study was carried outconsidering the 10 km radius of the proposed project site. Samplingof flora and fauna was done on random basis and were consideredseparately and their distribution in the above mentioned study areawas represented separately. The field study was undertaken duringNovember, 2018.

Study was carried out during one field season along with literaturereviews / desk research to understand the ecological (both terrestrialand aquatic) condition of the study area. Biological environmentassessment plays a significant role in environmental impactassessment for any development project.

In addition to the field study, literature review/desk research wascarried out to determine the existing conditions within the study areaand to identify habitats and species of potential importance that maybe affected by the Project.

The following parameters were primarily considered in the study. Assessment of present state of vegetation, flora and fauna in thestudy area.




C3 - 70


Identification of important plants/animal species having diverseeconomic values.

Identification of rare and endangered plant and animal species (ifany).

Collection of data from literature about the flora and faunaaccounts.

3.12.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY AREAThe study area is mainly under the Jamuria and Raniganj municipalarea. The study area is urban and semi-rural in nature and isprimarily Industrial with dense residential area. Many part of thestudy area is agricultural area. Different large scale industries withmany small scale industries are situated in 10 km radius of the studyarea. The major rivers are Damodar and Ajay which flow almostparallel to each other in the region. The average distance between thetwo rivers is around 18 km. There are also many water bodies likeponds, bills, Jheels and many other different small wetlands are alsoobserved by the survey team members. There are sufficient number ofplantation in an around the project site.

Ecological study was carried out considering the 10 kms radius of theproposed project site. Here the ecology is mainly two types i.e.Terrestrial and Aquatic. Each type of ecology is further subdividedinto two categories i.e. Flora and Fauna. Floral and faunal categoriesare also subdivided into many categories. Floral and faunal samplingwas done on random basis and was considered separately and theirdistribution in the above mentioned study area was representedseparately. Through initial rapid extensive field survey at the selectedsampling locations, the flora-fauna checklist was prepared by thesurvey team members. Different floral, faunal categories of terrestrialand aquatic ecosystem are summarized separately which arementioned below:

3.12.1.1 Terrestrial EcologyHere in terrestrial ecology the floral classifications are i) Trees, ii)Shrubs, iii) Herbs, iv) Climber and creepers, and v) Grasses andBamboos and the faunal classifications are i) Insects, ii) Butterflies,iii)Molluscs, iv) Amphibia, v) Reptiles, vi) Birds, and vi) Mammals

FLORA :Trees, Shrubs, Herbs Climber and creepers and Grasses are in thecategories of flora. Here in terrestrial ecology trees and shrubs arecombination of both deciduous and evergreen plants mixed with someexotic species.




C3 - 71


During the ecological study the following common deciduous andevergreen natural trees and garden trees have been identified in thestudy area and tabulated in Table 3.12.1 and 3.12.2.

Table 3.12.1 - Natural Tree Species in the Study Area

Table 3.12.2 - Introduced Avenue and Garden Trees

Sl. No. Common Scientific Name Family OccurrenceDeciduous Type

1 Haritaki Terminalia chebula Combretaceae +2 Horse cassia Cassia grandis Papilionaceae +3 Jamrul Syzygium aqueum Myrtaceae ++

Deciduous TypeSl. No. Common Scientific Name Family Occurrence

1 Aam Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae +++2 Amra Spondias pinnata Anacardiaceae ++3 Ashathwa Ficus religiosa Moraceae ++4 Bel Aegle marmelos Rutaceae ++5 Bohari Cordia dichotoma Boraginaceae +6 Gular Ficus racemosa Moraceae +7 Jainti Sesbania sesban Papilionaceae ++8 Jibanti Trema orientalis Moraceae +9 Jir bat Ficus retusa Moraceae +10 Kalo jam Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae +++11 Karanja Pongamia pinnata Papilionaceae +12 Kath bel Feronia limonia Rutaceae +13 Kul Ziziphus Rhamnaceae ++14 Nona ata Annona reticulata Annonaceae ++15 Pakur Ficus infectoria Moraceae ++16 Palte madar Erythrina Leguminosae +17 Phalsa Grewia asiatica Tiliaceae +18 Sajine Moringa oleifera Moringaceae +++19 Sehora Streblus asper Moraceae +20 Shimul Bombax ceiba Bombacaceae +21 Sirish Albizia lebbeck Mimosaceae ++22 Tentul Tamarindus indica Caesalpiniaceae ++

Evergreen Type1 Bat gach Ficus Moraceae +3 Fig Ficus hispida Moraceae +4 Gab Diospyros affinis Ebenaceae ++4 Kanthal Artocarpus Moraceae ++5 Mahanim Melia azedarach Meliaceae +6 Neem Azadirachta indica Meliaceae ++7 Pepe Carica papaya Caricaceae +++

Frequent = “+++” ; Moderately frequent = “++” ; Rare = “+”




C3 - 72



4 Jarul Lagerstroemia Lytharaceae ++5 Java cassia Cassia javanica Caesalpiniaceae +6 Javan fig Ficus benjamina Moraceae +7 Jum Garuga pinnata Burseraceae +8 Kadam Anthocephalus Rubiaceae +9 Kanchan Bauhinia racemosa Caesalpiniaceae ++10 Kath badam Terminalia catappa Combretaceae +++11 Krishnachura Caesalpinia Caesalpiniaceae ++12 Kusum Schleichera trijuga Sapindaceae +13 Nagalingam Couroupita Lecythidaceae +14 Nagkesar Mesua ferrea Guttiferae +15 Nil gulmohar Jacaranda Bignoniaceae +16 Palash Butea monosperma Papilionaceae ++17 Parul Tabebuia pallida Bignoniaceae +++18 Radhacura Peltophorum Caesalpiniaceae +19 Raktha Adenanthera Mimosaceae +20 Rakta Bauhinia variegata Caesalpiniaceae +21 Red cassia Cassia marginata Papilionaceae ++

Evergreen Type1 Halud sondal Cassia siamea Caesalpiniaceae +2 Jacquinia Jacquinia ruscifolia Myrsinaceae +3 Jau Casuarina Casuarinaceae +++4 Kathalichampa Artabotrys Annonaceae ++5 Kaju badam Anacardium Anacardiaceae +6 Krishna bat Ficus krishnae Moraceae +7 Litchu Litchi chinensis Sapindaceae ++8 Mahagony Swietenia Meliaceae ++9 Maharuk Ailanthus excelsa Simaroubaceae +10 Mandir Polyalthia longifolia Annonaceae ++11 Narangi Citrus japonica Rutaceae +12 Mahua Madhuca indica Sapotaceae ++13 Petrea Petrea arborea Verbinaceae +14 Portlandia Portlandia Rubiaceae +15 Putranjiba Putranjiva Euphorbiaceae ++16 Ritha Sapindus Sapindaceae +17 Rubber Ficus elastica Moraceae +18 Sabeda Achras zapota Sapotaceae ++19 Safed sirish Albizia procera Papilionaceae +20 Sagun Tectona grandis Verbenaceae ++21 Sausage tree Kigelia pinnata Bignoniaceae ++22 Sheuli Nyctanthes arbor-

tristisOleaceae ++

23 Shisu Dalbergia sissoo Leguminosae ++24 Silver oak Grevillea robusta Proteaceae +25 Sultana

champaCalophylluminophyllum

Clusiaceae +




C3 - 73



26 Tej pata Cinnamomumtamala

Lauraceae +27 Timla Ficus auriculata Moraceae ++28 Umbrella tree Brassia actinophylla Araliaceae +

During the ecological study the following Climber and creeper specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.3.

Table 3.12.3 - Climber Species in the Study Area

Sl. No. Common Scientific Name Family Occurrence1. Alkushi Mucuna prurita Papilionaceae ++2. Baramanda Dendrophthoe falcata Loranthaceae +3. Chagul bati Daemia extensa Asclepiadaceae ++4. Dhundhul Luffa cylindrica Cucurbitaceae ++5. Germany lata Mikania scandens Compositae +++6. Gandal Paederia foetida Rubiaceae +7. Golancha Tinospora cordifolia Menispermaceae +++8. Harkakra Allamanda cathartica Apocynaceae +9. Ishvarimul Aristolochia indica Aristolochiaceae +10. Jhumko lata Passiflora foetida Passifloraceae ++11. Kumro Cucurbita maxima Cucurbitaceae ++12. Kankrol Momordica Cucurbitaceae ++13. Langulilata Lpomoea pes-tigridis Convolvulaceae ++14. Lau Lagenaria siceraria Cucurbitaceae ++15. Misti kumra Cucurbita pepo Cucurbitaceae ++16. Madhabi lata Quisqualis indica Combretaceae ++17. Money plant Scindapsus aureus Araceae ++18. Noaloya Derris scandens Papilionaceae ++19. Satamuli Asparagus racemosus Liliaceae ++20. Telakucha Coccinia cordifolia Cucurbitaceae ++


During the ecological study the following grass and bamboo species havebeen identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.4.

Table 3.12.4 - Grasses and bamboos

Sl. No. Common Scientific Name Family Occurrence1 Chorkata Chrysopogon Poaceae ++2 Dhane Eragrostis tenella Poaceae +++3 Gini ghas Panicum maximum Poaceae +++4 Golden Bambusa vulgaris Poaceae +5 Kakuriya Dactyloctenium Poaceae ++




C3 - 74


6 Karail Dendrocalamus Poaceae +7 Kash Saccharum Poaceae ++8 Krishna ghas Oplismenus Poaceae ++9 Nirbishi Cyperus kyllingia Cyperaceae ++10 Nirbishi Kyllinga monocephala Cyperaceae +++11 Ooloo grass Imperata cylindrica Poaceae +++12 Shama Echinochloa colonum Poaceae +++


Fauna :Insects, Butterflies, Molluscs, Amphibia, Reptiles, Birds andMammals are in the categories of fauna of terrestrial ecology. List ofspecies of these categories have been shown from Table-3.12.5 toTable-3.12.11.

During the ecological study the following most common Insectsspecies have been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.5.

Table 3.12.5 - Insects

Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name OccurrenceDRAGON FLY

1 Blue jewel Rhyothemis variegata common2 Blue skimmer Orthetrum glaucum Frequent3 Chalky percher Diplacodes trivialis Frequent4 Evening hawker Brachythemis Rare5 Painted grass hawk Neurothemis Frequent6 Spotted grass hawk Neurothemis common7 Scarlet skimmer Crocothemis servilia Frequent8 Slender skimmer Orthetrum sabina rare

DAMSEL FLY9 Blue tail Pseudagrion rubriceps common10 Yellow damselfly Ceriagrion common

ANT11 Common red ant Oecophyla samragdyna common12 Common black ant Camponotus common13 Indian wood ant Formica rufa common14 White ant Microtermes obesi common

WASP15 Common Indian wasp Vespa orientalis common16 Lady bird beetle Coccinella variabilis common

MOSQUITO17 Aedes Aedes aegypti common18 Anopheles Anopheles minimus Common19 Culex Culex fatigans Common

FLIES20 Fruit fly Drosophila Common




C3 - 75


Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence21 Housefly Musca domestica Common22 Honey bee Apis indica Common23 Little bee Apis florae Frequent24 Rock bee Apis dorsatta Frequent

SPIDER25 House spider Heteropoda venatoria Common

COCKROACH26 Cockroach Periplaneta americana Common

During the ecological study the following most common butterfly specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.6.

Table 3.12.6 - Butterfly

Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence1. Blue Tiger Tirumala limniace common2. Common Castor Ariadne merione moderately frequent3. Common Indian Crow Euploea core frequent4. Common Grass Yellow Eurema hecabe common5. Common Mormon Papilio polytes common6. Common Four-ring Ypthima hiiebneri common7. Common Emigrant Catopsilia pomana frequent8. Common Palmfly Elymnias moderately frequent9. Danaid Eggfly Hypolimnas misippus common10. Indian Skipper Spialia galba common11. Lime Butterfly Papieio demoleus Common12. Plain Tiger Danaus chrysippus common13. Peacock Pansy Junonia almana rare14. Striped Tiger Danaus genutia common15. Swift Parnara guttata rare

During the ecological study the following most common molluscs specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.7.

Table 3.12.7 - Molluscs

Sl.No Species Occurrence1. Achatina sp. Common2. Helix sp. Common3. Limax sp. Common4. Pleurodiscus Common

During the ecological study the following most common amphibiaspecies have been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table3.12.8.




C3 - 76


Table 3.12.8 - Amphibia

Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence1. Common Indian Toad Bufo melanostictus Frequent2. Indian Bull Frog Rana tigerina Common

During the ecological study the following most common reptiles specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.9.

Table 3.12.9 - Reptiles

Sl. No. Common Names Scientific Names OccurrenceLIZARDS

1 Common garden lizard Calotes versicolor Common2 Common or brahminy Mabuya craniata Common3 House gecko Hemidactylus brooki Common4 Little skink Mabuya macularia Common5 Tree gecko Hemidactylus Moderately6 Tucktoo Gecko gecko Common7 Wall lizard Hemidactylus Common

SNAKES8 Beakead worn or blind Typhlops acutus Moderately9 Common wolf snake Lycodon aulicus Moderately10 Checkered keel back Xenochrophis piscator Moderately11 Common indian Krait Bungarus caeruleus rare12 Russell’s Viper Viper russelli rare

During the ecological study the following most common bird specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.10.

Table 3.12.10 – BirdsSl. No. Common Name Scientific Name TypeSl. No. Common Name Scientific Name Type

1 Blackheaded Oriole Oriolus xathornus R2 Barn Owl Tyto alba R3 Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R4 Baya Weaver Ploceus philippinus R5 Black Drongo Dicrurus adsimilis R6 Black rumped flameback Dinopium benghalense R7 Blossom headed Parakeet Psittacula Cyanocephala R8 Ble throated Barbet Megalaima asiatica R9 Brown Shrike Lanius Cristatus M10 Cattle Egret Bubukus inis RM11 Crow Pheasant Centropus sinensis R12 Crimson breasted Barbet Megalaima haemacephala R13 Common Swallow Hirundo rustica RM




C3 - 77


Sl. No. Common Name Scientific Name Type14 Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R15 Common Kingfisher Alcedo atthis R16 Common Lora Aegithina tiphia R17 Colour Dove Streptopelia decaocto R18 Coppersmith Barbet Megalaima haemacephala R20 Grey backed shrike Lanius tephronotus RM21 Golden Oriole Oriolus oriolus RM22 Golden Back Woodpecker Dinopium benghalense R23 House Crow Corvus splendens R24 House Swift Apus affinis R25 Honey Buzzard Pernis ptilorhynchus RM26 Hoopoe Upupa spops RM27 House Sparrow Passer domesticus R28 Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R29 India Tree Pie Dendocitta vagabunda R30 Indian Ring Dove Streptopelia decapctp R31 Jungle crow Corvus macrorthynchos R32 Jungle Babler Turdoides striatus R33 Koel Eudynamys scolopacea R34 Kingfisher - White throated Halcyon smyrnensis R35 Kingfisher - Whitebreasted Halcyon smyrnensis R36 Kingfisher - Common Alcedo atthis R37 Kingfisher – Stork billed Halcyon capensis R38 Little Brown Dove Streptopelia senegalensis R39 Lesser Goldenbacked

WoodpeckerDinopium benghalensis R

40 Large Pied Wagtail Motacillamaderaspatensis

R41 Magpie Robin Copsychus saularis R42 Mayna - Pied Sturnus contra R43 Mayna - Brahminy Sturnus pagodarum R44 Mayna - Common Acridotheres tristis R45 Mayna - Jungle Acridotheres fuscus R46 Pariah Kite Milvus migrans R47 Pied Cuckoo Clamator jacobinus RM48 Pond Heron Ardeala grayii R49 Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R50 Redwattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R51 Red Turtle Dove Streptopelia

tranquebaricaV

52 Rose ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R53 Redvented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R54 Sandgrouse Pterocls sp. R55 Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis R56 Sirkeer Cuckoo Taccocua leschenaultu R57 Wood Shrike Tephrodomis

pondicerianusR

58 Whitebrowed Fantail Flycatcher Rhipidura aureola RR = Resident/Localised; RM = Resident/Migratory; V = Vagrant.




C3 - 78


During the ecological study the following most common mammal specieshave been identified in the study area and tabulated in Table-3.12.11.

Table 3.12.11 - Mammals

Sl. No. Common Names Scientific Names OccurrenceWILD

1 Common Langur Presbytis entallus rare2 Squirrel Funumbulus palmerum common3 Flying fox Pteropus gigantus common4 Fruit bat Rousettus sp. Rare5 House shrew Suncus murinus common6 House rat Rattus rattus common7 House mouse Mus musculus common8 Indian mole rat Bandicota bengalensis common9 Jackal Canis aureus rare10 Jungle cat Felis chaus rare11 Squirrel Funambulus palmeram common12 Palm civet Paradoxurus harmaphroditus common13 SmallIndian civet Viverricula indica common14 Bandicoot Rat Bandicota indica rare

DOMESTIC15 Ass (Domesticated) Equus hemionus rare16 Buffalo Bubalus indicus common17 Cat Felis domestica common18 Cow Bos indicus common19 Dog Canis familiaris common20 Goat Capra benghalensis common21 Horse Equus caballus rare22 Pig Sus cristatus rare

Though species of reptiles, amphibia and molluscs are in terrestrialecology as well as in aquatic ecology, but fish species are completelyin aquatic ecology.

Checklist of most common fish species in the study area are shown inTable 3.12.12.

Table 3.12.12 - Fish Species

Sl. No Common Name Scientific Name1. Bata Labeo bata2. Ban Mastacemalus armatus3. Bele Glossogobius giuris4. Bhetki Lates calcarifera5. Boal Wallago attu6. Chang Channa orietalis




C3 - 79


7. Chanda Osteobrana cotio cotio8. Chela Salmostoma culpeodes9. Common Barb or Punti Puntius saphori10. Common Resbora Resbora daniconius11. Darika Esomus darika12. Falui Notopterus13. Fire-fin Barb or Tito Punti Puntius ticto14. Kuche Monopterus cuchia15. Kurchi Labeo gonius16. Katla Catla catla17. Kalbaus Labeo kalbasu18. Lata Channa punctalis19. Masheer Tor putitora20. Magur Clarius batrachus21. Mud-Purcher Badius badius22. Morala Aspidoparea mola23. Mrigal Chirrhinus mrigala24. Pakal Mastacemalus pancalus25. Rohu Labeo rohita26. Silver carp Hypopthalmicthys molytrix27. Telapia Oriochromis mosambica28. Tengra Mystus cavasius29. Tepa Tetradon cuscutia

3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENTThe growth of industrial sectors and infrastructure developments inand around the agriculture dominant areas, village and towns isbound to create its impact on the socio- economic aspects of the localpopulation of the area experiencing development. The impacts may bepositive or negative depending upon the development activity. Toassess the anticipated impacts of the project and industrial growth onthe socio-economic aspects of people, it is necessary to study theexisting socio-economic status of the local population, which will behelpful for making efforts to further improve the quality of life in thearea under study.

The sociological aspects of this study include human settlements,demography, and social strata such as Scheduled Castes andScheduled Tribes and literacy levels besides infrastructure facilitiesavailable in the study area. The economic aspects includeoccupational structure of workers.

The Baseline Demographic and Socio economic characteristics withregards to demography, literacy and occupational status have beendescribed, based on the Primary Census abstract, 2011, while therelevant details of the Infrastructure Facilities have been gathered




C3 - 80


from the Primary Census abstract, 2011. The study area includes,either partly or entirely 61 villages and 4 Municipal areas. The studyarea is rural-urban mixed in nature.

The proposed project at Block Jamuria is under Burdwan district ofWest Bengal. The CD blocks falls under the 10 km radius study areaaround the proposed Project are presented in Table-3.13.1.

Table-3.13.1Composition of the Study Area

Name ofDistrict

Name of the CDBlock

STD-R STD-U

Number ofVillages

Name ofMunicipality

Number ofCensusTown

Burdwan

BarabaniJamuriaRaniganjKhyarasolOndalPandabeswar

Total 61Villages

Jamuria,Raniganj,Ondal,

Jamuria,Raniganj,Ondal

Pandabeswar -(total 51Words) -

-

STD (T) 61 4 3

3.13.1 Brief Outline of the Study AreaStudy area for the present project is defined as the area of a circlewith 10 km radius taking the project site as the center underBurdwan district. The district is dominated by rural population whoconstitute about 26.06% of the total population. Total workforce inBurdwan is about 31.43% of total population. Looking at theoccupational pattern, it is observed that about of the main workersare associated with agriculture and allied activities. The distributionof main workers in other activities, viz. workers in householdindustries, construction, trade & commerce, transport,communication & storage, mining & quarrying and other services areobserved to maintain low proportion although these activities variedwidely within in the district. Population density of this district as perthe census data 2011 is 1376.53 per sq. km. High growth ofpopulation in urban population growth areas is mainly attributed tothe migration of people from rural to the urban area in search ofemployment and other sources of income.




C3 - 81


3.13.2 Demographic Aspects of the Study AreaDistribution of PopulationAs per 2011 census, the total population in the study area was4,32,229. The distribution of the total population has been shownbelow in the Table-3.13.1.

Average Household SizeThe Study area had an average family size of around 4.9 persons perhousehold. This is considered to be a normal family size in WestBengal.

PopulationPopulation structure in the study area is presented in Table-3.13.1.

Table 3.13.1Distribution of Population in the Study Area

Particulars 2011No of Household 85806Total Population 432229Male Population 225201Female Population 207028

3.13.3 Social structureIn 2011, about 23.37% of the total population belonged to ScheduledCaste (SC). Similarly, 6.73% of the total population belonged toScheduled Tribes (ST). The distribution of population in the studyarea by social structure is presented in Table 3.13.2 (Based on 2011Census Data).

Table 3.13.2Distribution of Population by Social Structure

in the Study AreaParticulars 2011Total Scheduled Castes 101000Scheduled Castes Male 51773Scheduled Castes Female 49227Total Scheduled Tribes 29080Scheduled Tribes Male 14683Scheduled Tribes Female 14397

3.13.4 Literacy levelsThe literacy rate was 64.4 % of the total population in 2011. The maleliteracy rate was 71.5% (of total male population), whereas




C3 - 82


corresponding figures for the female literacy rate was 56.7 % (of totalfemale Population),) in 2011. The details are presented in Table 3.13.3.

Table 3.13.3Distribution of Literates and Literacy

in the Study AreaSl. No. Particulars 2011

1 Total Literates 2783992 Male Literates 1611103 Female Literates 117289

3.13.5 OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTUREThe occupational structure of people in the study area is studied withreference to main workers and marginal workers. The main workersinclude 10 categories of workers defined by the Census Department,which consists of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying; manufacturing,processing and repairs in household industry; and other than householdindustry, construction, trade and commerce, transport andcommunication and other services. The marginal workers are thoseworkers, engaged in some work for a period of less than six monthsduring the reference year prior to the census survey.

The total workers were 31.4 % and the non-workers were 68.6 % of thetotal population in 2011 whereas the main workers were 73.9% andmarginal workers were 24.3% of the total workers in 2011. Thedistribution of workers with their male and female population in thestudy area by occupation structure is presented in Table 3.13.4 (Basedon 2011 Census Data).

Table 3.13.4Occupational Structure in the Study Area

Sl. No. Status 2011Total Population 432229Male Population 225201Female Population 207028

1 Total workers 135833Male 117206Female 18627

2 Main workers 100387Male 90304




C3 - 83


Female 100833 Marginal workers 32988

Male 3332Female 7760

4 Non workers 296396Male 107995Female 188401

4 Total Cultivators 135833Male 117206Female 18627

5 Agricultural Workers 100387Male 90304Female 10083

3.13.6 INFRASTRUCTURAL FACILITIESMedical FacilitiesMedical facility in some from or the other is available to thepopulation residing with the rural segment of the study area. However,medical facilities i.e. Hospital with basic facilities only is availablewithin the urban segment of the study area.

Drinking Water FacilitiesTap water, ground water and surface water is being used in thedifferent village located in the rural sector of concerned C.D. Blocks.In the urban area tube well and tap water are the source of drinkingwater.

ElectricityMost of the villages have electricity in the Concerned C.D. Blocksavailable for domestic purposes.

Communication Transport & Access FacilitiesMost of the villages in the concerned C.D. Block have Post Officeavailable within study area. All most of the villages have Busconnectivity. Approach paved road is available in the all village area.

Graphical presentations of demographical and occupational statushave been given in Figure-3.13.1.




C3 - 84


FIGURE – 3.13.1: DEMOGRAPHICAL & SOCIO-ECONOMICALSTRUCTURE OF THE STUDY AREA


Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant


C4 - 1

Environmental Impact Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-4.0ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS &

MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 PROJECT ACTIVITIES4.1.1 Phases of Impacts

The proposed expansion project will have impacts on the environmentin two phases. During the construction phase, which is temporaryand short-term, the other during the operation stage, which will havelong term effects. The environmental impacts in this study have beendiscussed separately for the construction phase and the operationstage.

Spatially, the impacts have been assessed over the study area of10 km radius of the project site.

4.2 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE4.2.1 Activities during Construction Phase

During the construction phase, the following activities are consideredto be important towards development of impacts:

a) Site preparationb) Excavation and backfillingc) Hauling of earth materialsd) Piling, cutting and drillinge) Erection of concrete and steel structuresf) Road constructiong) Painting and finishingh) Clean up operationsi) Landscaping and Afforestation

Construction phase activities will have moderate impacts on land use,demography and socio-economics, on-site soils and on-site noise. Itcould also develop minor impacts on water use, air and water qualityand ecology.

The activities can be divided into two categories, viz. sub-structuraland super-structural work. Certain foundation would require piledriving and the machineries would pose noise and gaseous pollution.

Moreover, construction work will involve cutting of trenches,excavation, concreting etc. There may be dust, gaseous and noisepollution from these activities.




C4 - 2


Mechanical erection work involves use of mechanical equipment forstorage, transportation, erection and on-site fabrication work. Theseactivities generally produce some air contaminants and noisepollution which will be contained by using water sprinkling and noiseabatement measures.

4.2.2 Impacts on Air QualityParticulate matter would be the predominant pollutant affecting theair quality during the construction phase. Dust will be generatedmainly during excavation, back filling and hauling operations alongwith transportation activities.

Sprinkling of water from tankers or other suitable means would beundertaken at the construction sites for the suppression of fugitivedust.

Undesirable gaseous pollutants will be generated mostly by the trafficand use of machineries. However, this would not lead to any tangibleeffect, as the expected emission volume is low.

It would be ensured that all the vehicles plying during constructionare properly tuned and maintained to keep emissions within thepermissible limits.

4.2.3 Impacts on Hydrology and Water UseAll construction activities will take place within the project site. Bestpractices will be followed to ensure least disturbance to the naturaldrainage pattern of the site and the neighbourhood and thus, is notexpected to have any impact on the local hydrology.

4.2.4 Impacts on Water QualityWastewater from construction activities would mostly containsuspended impurities. Other pollutants which may find their way intoit will be in insignificant concentrations and may be safelydisregarded. Drains from different construction sites will be led tosedimentation pits where excess suspended solids will be settled outand relatively clear supernatant will be discharged into the outsidesurface drains.

4.2.5 Impacts on NoiseDuring the construction phase, noise will be generated due tomovement of vehicles and operation of light and heavy constructionmachineries including pneumatic tools and compressors, which areexpected to emit sounds with moderate to high decibel value. Carefulplanning of their operation is required during this period so thatminimum disturbances are caused. The construction personnel




C4 - 3


would be located away from the major road traffic. Moreover,residential areas not being close to the project site, no significantimpact is apprehended.

4.2.6 Impacts on Soil and Land UseAll major construction activities tend to create certain changes in thesoils of the area. However, this will take place inside the plantpremises and as such; there will be no impact on the soil conditionoutside the plant boundary in terms of fertility.

During storms, some of the excavated soil and construction materialssuch as sand etc. would be blown up in the air and dispersed aroundthe project site; some would also tend to be driven into the soil andclog inter granular spaces.

However, in order to minimise such impacts, sprinkling of water shallbe done.

Preparatory activities like construction of access roads, temporaryoffices, quarters and godowns, piling, storage of constructionmaterials etc. will be confined within the project area. These will notgenerally exercise any significant impact except altering the land usepattern of the proposed site. There will be no impact on the adjoiningland.

As a result, the impact on land use would be very insignificant andany impact due to construction will be confined within the projectarea and will not hamper the land use aspects outside.

Overall, it could be easily inferred that there will be no adverse impacton soil quality & land use in the study area.

4.2.7 Impacts on Demography & SocioeconomicsIt is estimated that a large number of workers, comprising of skilled,semi-skilled and unskilled labourers, shall be employed by variouscontractors at site during the construction phase. Significant numberof semiskilled and unskilled labourers would be recruited from thenearby areas. This would create some employment opportunities inthe area.

Since most of sizeable labour force will be drawn from neighbourhood,no change in demographic profile is anticipated. However, there willbe increased economic opportunities for the local people.

Most of the construction work is labour intensive. As most of the jobwill be done by the contractors, it will be ensured that the




C4 - 4


contractor's workers are provided with proper facilities includingsanitation and drinking water supply.

4.3 IMPACTS DURING OPERATIONAL PHASEThe process description including quantum of pollution loads fromliquid and gaseous effluents considering their proposedenvironmental control measures has been discussed in Chapter 2 -Project Profile.

The operational impacts in this study have accordingly beenevaluated for this project.

4.3.1 Impacts on Air Quality4.3.1.1 Sources of Emissions

The major sources of continuous emission from the existing units are20 stacks. In the proposed project total 19 stacks will be attachedwith the corresponding units. Stack emissions would be constitutedof mainly SO2, NOx and Particulate matters (PM).

The major source of emission from the proposed units and from theexisting units considering with Air pollution Control devices andwithout Air pollution Control devices has been presented in Table-4.1& 4.2 respectively.

TABLE 4.1PROPOSED STACKS & EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Description PelletPlant3x0.6MTPA

CementGrindingUnit(1.2

MTPA)

MBF(1x450 m3)

WBR Boilerattached

with 4x350TPD DRIKilns

WBR Boilerwith DRIRotary

Kilns (300TPD) #

WBR Boilerattachedwith 0.3

MTPA CokeOven Plant

No. of Stacks 3 1 1 2 1 1

Stack height (m) 50 36 50 60 45 70

Internal diameter at StackTop (m) 2.5 1.2 2.0 4.0 2.2 3.8

Exit velocity of flue gas(m/sec) 10 13 20.0 9.5 13 10.8

Temp. of flue gas degree (oC) 75 95 140 120 115 160

Temp. of flue gas degree (K) 348 368 413 398 388 433

Flue gas flow rate (Nm3/Hr) 138685 39,281 149578 298662 1,25,223 278120

PM emission rate(mg/Nm3) 50 50 50 30 30 30

PM emission rate (gm/sec) 2.0 0.55 2.08 2.49 1.04 2.0




C4 - 5


SO2 emission rate (gm/sec) - - 1.64 2.46 1.05 29.43

NOx emission rate (gm/sec) - - 0.82 1.50 0.64 15.0

PollutionEquipment

ESP &BagFilter

Bag Filter Bag Filter ESP & BagFilter

ESP & BagFilter

Bag Filter

# Unit under implementation

TABLE 4.1 (CONTD…)PROPOSED STACKS & EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Description InductionFurnaces(2x18 T)

InductionFurnaces(3x18 T)


Electric ArcFurnace(1x45 T)

Sinter Plant(0.4 MTPA)

No. of Stacks 1 1 2 1 1Stack height (m) 30 30 30 35 50Internal diameter at StackTop (m)

1.151.5 1.11 1.2 1.5

Exit velocity of flue gas(m/sec) 11.5 10.0 11.0 12 11.0

Temp. of flue gas degree (oC) 70 70 70 80 140Temp. of flue gas degree (K) 343 343 343 353 413Flue gas flow rate (Nm3/Hr) 34240 50654 30512 37801 46276PM emission rate(mg/Nm3) 50 50 50 50 50PM emission rate (gm/sec) 0.48 0.70 0.42 0.53 0.64

SO2 emission rate (gm/sec) - - - - 1.1

NOx emission rate (gm/sec) - - - - 1.2Pollution Equipment Bag Filter Bag Filter Bag Filter Bag Filter ESP &

Bag Filter




C4 - 6


TABLE 4.1 (CONTD…)PROPOSED STACKS & EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Description0.1MTPA DIP Plant

MagnesiumConverter

Unit

ZincCoatingMachine

BitumenCoating

AnnealingFurnace

No. of Stack 1 1 1 1

Stack height (m) 35 35 35 35

Internal diameter atStack Top (m)

1.0 1.0 0.8 1.2

Exit velocity of flue gas(m/s)

8.0 8.0 7.0 9.0

Temp. of flue gasdegree (oC)

40 40 40 170

Temp. of flue gasdegree (K)

313 313 313 443

Flue gas flow rate(Nm3/Hr)

19737 19737 11053 22591

PM emissionrate(mg/Nm3)

50 50 50 50

PM emission rate(gm/sec)

0.27 0.27 0.15 0.31

Sulpher Di-oxide (SO2)emission rate (gm/sec)

- - - -

Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)emission rate (gm/sec)

- - - -




C4 - 7


TABLE 4.2STACKS & EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS FOR EXISTING UNITS

Description WBRBoiler

attachedwith2x100TPD DRIKilns

WBRBoiler

attachedwith2x300TPD DRIKilns

WBRBoiler

attachedwith 2x90TPD DRIKilns

PelletPlant(0.48MTPA)

PelletPlant(0.12MTPA)

InductionFurnaces(2x18 T +2X15 T)


No. of Stack 1 1 1 1 1 1 1Stack height (m) 45 63 45 53 53 30 30Internal diameterat Stack Top (m) 2.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 3.0

1.01.0

Exit velocity of fluegas (m/s)

9.0 9.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 9.0 8.5Temp. of flue gasdegree (oC)

120 120 120 75 75 70 70Temp. of flue gasdegree (K)

393 398 393 348 348 343 343

Flue gas flow rate(Nm3/Hr)

70736 298662 63662 189721 189721 20262 19136

PM emissionrate(mg/Nm3)

30 30 30 50 50 50 50

PM emission rate(gm/sec)

0.59 2.49 0.53 2.64 2.64 0.28 0.27

SO2 emission rate(gm/sec) 0.82 2.46 0.74 - - - -NOx emission rate(gm/sec) 0.50 1.50 0.45 - - - -




C4 - 8


TABLE 4.2 (CONTD…)STACKS & EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS FOR EXISTING UNITS

Description InductionFurnaces(5x18 T)

SubmergedArc

Furnaces(8x9 MVA)

SubmergedArc

Furnaces(2x4.5 MVA)

CFBC BasedBoiler

for 43 MWCPP

No. of Stack 2 8 2 1Stack height (m) 35 40 40 90Internal diameterat Stack Top (m) 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.65

Exit velocity of fluegas (m/s) 10 9.0 9.0 10.0

Temp. of flue gasdegree (oC) 50 90 65 140

Temp. of flue gasdegree (K) 323 363 338 413

Flue gas flow rate(Nm3/Hr) 15301 19145 20561 50903

PM emissionrate(mg/Nm3) 50 50 50 30

PM emission rate(gm/sec) 0.21 0.27 0.29 0.42

SO2 emission rate(gm/sec) - - - 2.2

NOx emission rate(gm/sec) - - - 1.0

4.3.1.2 Air Quality Dispersion ModellingSelection of ModelThe plant operation will emit gaseous pollutants through stacks,which have the potential to deteriorate the air quality of the area. Inorder to evaluate the impact on ambient air quality due to suchreleases, the ground level concentrations (GLCs) as a result of theplant emissions have been evaluated through mathematical modellingusing computer aided techniques.

Upon discharge to atmosphere, the emissions from sources aresubjected to transport and diffusion processes which together aretermed as dispersion. The processes which govern the atmosphericdispersion of pollutants are plume rise, transport by wind anddiffusion by turbulence and a number of physico-chemical processessuch as gravitational settling, deposition, chemical reactions,transformation, decomposition and wash out.

The computation has been made applying ISCST3 of USEPA, which ismost widely used and also recommended by CPCB




C4 - 9


(PROBES/70/1997-98). The model is based on some assumptionsuch as steady state conditions, continuous homogeneous flow, inertpassive pollutants, no ground absorption and a Gaussian distributionof the plume in both horizontal and vertical planes.

4.3.1.3 Data Used for ModellingVarious stack and emission data as presented in Tables–4.1 & 4.2respectively have been used as input to the model. The prediction ofGLCs and corresponding impacts has been made for the emissionfigures mentioned therein.

The hourly meteorological data like ambient temperature, wind speedand wind direction used for air quality modelling have been takenfrom such data generated through continuous on-site monitoringduring (1st October,2018 – 31st December,2018) representing the PostMonsoon season.

The hourly occurrence of various atmospheric stability classes hasbeen determined from the on-site hourly wind speed and cloud coverdata using the insolation based stability classification.

The Mixing Height data were taken from one of the publisheddocuments i.e., “Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth overIndian Region” of R. N. Gupta, applicable for the region. The mixingheights considered for modelling are given in Table 4.3.




C4 - 10


TABLE-4.3MIXING HEIGHT DATA

4.3.1.4 Modelling Procedure

Modelling exercise has been performed for the proposed new stacksbecause the impact of existing stack emission has been captured inthe baseline air quality data generated around the project site.

As recommended by CPCB, radial pattern of receptor locations hasbeen implemented using the polar (r,) co-ordinate system with originat the Centre of the project site. The locations of the receptors havethen been defined with respect to 16 radial directions (N to NNWangle of such directions measured clockwise from North) and radialdistance ‘r’ from the origin.

The receptors are selected in such a way that more receptors arelocated close to the maximum concentration point. The maximumdistance covered is 10 km., which has been seen adequate to coverthe maximum concentrations for this particular situation.

In order to compute the 24 hourly concentrations due to theoperation of the proposed project, the hourly meteorological datarecorded at the site meteorological observatory set up near the projectsite was used. The model was used to compute the 24-hourconcentrations for each day for the Post Monsoon season.

Hour of the dayMixing Height (m)

Post Monsoon Season4 505 506 507 1008 4009 50010 50011 100012 100013 100014 100015 100016 100017 100018 50019 50020 40021 10022 50




C4 - 11


4.3.1.5 Discussion on Modelling ResultsThe predicted maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx & PM are presented inTable – 4.4. The isopleths of the pollutants have been depicted inFigures – 4.1 to 4.3.

TABLE – 4.4PREDICTED IMPACTS ON BASELINE AIR QUALITY

Pollutants MGLC(g/m3)

Distance(Km)

Direction BaselineMax (g/m3)

2 + 5(g/m3)

NAAQS24-h avg

1 2 3 4 5 6 7SO2 5.2 0.8 SE 24 29.2 80 g/m3

NOx 3.0 0.5 SE 43 46 80 g/m3

PM2.5 8.0 0.8 SE 50 58 60 g/m3

The ambient air quality of the area w.r.t SO2, NOx and PM2.5 willremain within the prescribed NAAQS after the proposed expansionunits becomes operational.

4.3.1.6 Impact due to road transportationSSPL has its own railway siding within the plant premises, fromTopsi railway station which is about 50 m away from the project site.Raw materials and finished products are transported by rail.Therefore, the impact due to material transportation has beenminimized.

During the construction and operation phase of the proposed project,movement of goods’ vehicles and loading and unloading operationsshall contribute to air emissions. The layout of the proposed projecthas generous area earmarked parking, roads and greenery. This willact as effective media for arresting the emissions.

The vehicular traffic plying in and out of the project site will be one ofthe significant sources of air pollution. If the site is not properlyregulated, it can create disruption in free traffic movement leading toair pollution problems. This difficulty can be tackled to a great extentby properly regulating the traffic and by following strict anddisciplined vehicular movement and operation in the project site. Byimposing vehicular emission standards, this problem can be furthercurbed to a large extent. Adequate and planned road network will beset up in the project area for smooth movement of vehicles.

Though operation of trucks, materials loading and unloading andother activities will offer air pollutants to the ambient air of the area,




C4 - 12


it was felt that idling of trucks particularly during winter season mayhave some impact of concern on the air environment. In fact, inmany cases, the truckers warm up the engines of their vehiclessufficiently after a long waiting/rest period (like after overnightparking). While idling of one or a couple of trucks may not create aproblem but a number of trucks idling all at a time may have anegative effect on the ambient air quality of the neighborhood,though the number of trucks at a time will be negligible.

In the proposed project, it is estimated that at a time around 120trucks will be situated within the project site. Since the number oftrucks that might be idling at a time is very difficult to predict atthis stage, it was decided to consider that around 60 trucks will beidling at a time. At this stage, it is also not possible to predict thelocation of such trucks within the project site. However, the totaltruck parking area has been considered as a single volume sourceinput to the model having multiple sources scattered within it. Theimpact under consideration is expected to be maximum during thewinter. The emission of SPM, SOx & NOx from the 60 idle truckshas been calculated based on the emission factor (Ref Table – 4.5 &4.6).

Undesirable gaseous pollutants will be generated mostly by thetraffic and use of machineries. However, this would not lead to anytangible effect, as the expected emission volume is low. It would beensured that all the vehicles plying in the working zone are properlytuned and maintained to keep emissions within the permissiblelimits. All the trucks, carrying various raw materials will be coveredwith tarpaulin. At loading and unloading points, arrangement forWater sprinkling will be made so that dust generation duringtransportation of materials is minimized further.

Table 4.5Emission Factor for the Idle Trucks

Source Type Units NOx Sox PMHeavy Duty Diesel Vehicles -idle

gm/hr 68.08 0.04 1.30

Heavy Duty Diesel Vehicles -idle

gm/sec 0.0189 0.00001 0.0004

Source: Idling Emission Factors developed from EMFA AC2002(ARB2003)

Table 4.6Total Emission Load for 60 Idle Trucks

No. of Trucks Units NOx SOx PM60 Trucks gm/sec 1.134 0.0006 0.024




C4 - 13


There will be some impact on the surrounding environment due toNOx emission. However, it will be within the acceptable ranges. Theimpact due to the emission of other pollutants will be negligible.

With strict traffic management system and various environmentalmanagement practices, contribution of pollutants in the ambient airwill be kept under control so as to create minimum disturbances inthe neighbourhood.

4.3.2 Impacts on Water QualityM/s SSPL will follow “the zero wastewater discharge concept” and theentire wastewater will be recycled to the plant for various uses. As nowastewater will be discharged outside the plant premises, there willbe no impact on the water quality of any surface water bodies of thearea.

Storm Water Discharge: The network of storm water drains andwastewater drains inside the plant will be made separate. The stormwater drain will have be connected with rain water collection pondinside the premises for use in non-critical purposes. The rain waterfrom all nearby Buildings / areas like ADM buildings, Laboratory,Central Stores, Electrical substation building, Canteen and internalroads will be collected to storm water pond through storm waterdrains.

During the first or second rain of the monsoon season, there ispossibility that, rain water will be contaminated due to presence ofdust, oil and grease particles on the roof top of industries and withinthe plot. To prevent flow of such contaminated rain water into stormwater drainage system it is proposed that contaminated rain water iscollected in a storage tank for required treatment and disposal. If rainwater is not contaminated, the same can be bypassed to storm waterdrains. The contaminated rain water will have to be treated insideindustry premises or discharged to low polluting effluent collectionnetwork.

4.3.3 Impacts on Hydrology and Water UseThe requirement of water for the proposed projects will be around12,500 m3/day. The water requirement shall be met from River Ajay /ADDA Supply. Expansion will be done within the existing plantpremises. No nalla or drains are passing through the plant premises.So, there will be no alteration in existing drainage pattern due to




C4 - 14


diversion. The storm water generated from the premises will bediverted to storm water drains, which will be provided withsedimentation tanks of adequate depth (depending on the maximumhourly runoff). Storm water will be disposed in surrounding nallasafter collection of silt and sand using the sedimentation tanks.

4.3.4 Impacts on Noise during OperationAny industrial complex in general consists of several sources of noisein clusters or single. These clusters/single source may be housed inbuildings of different dimensions made of different materials orinstalled in open or under sheds. The material of construction impliesdifferent attenuation co-efficient. In this project, noise shall begenerated mainly from Fan, Pump, Turbine, Compressor etc. Theequipment shall be designed to comply with the stipulated limit of 85dB(A).

In order to predict ambient noise levels due to the operation of theequipment in the project, the noise modeling has been done. Forcomputing the noise levels at various distances with respect to theplant site, noise levels are predicted using “CUSTIC”, a NoisePollution Modeling Software of Canarina Environmental Software, thedetails of which are elaborated below:

Model for Sound Wave Propagation during OperationFor an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambientair from the point source, a standard mathematical model asmentioned above for sound wave propagation is used. The noisegenerated by equipment decreases with increase in distance from thesource due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in soundpressure level with distance from the source is expected due toatmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmissionpath.

For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous lossfree medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, dueto different sources using model based on first principles, as per thefollowing equation:

Lp2=Lp1-20Log(r2/r1)–AE–AM (1)

Where,Sound Lp2 and Lp1 are the Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) at pointslocated at a distances of r2 and r1 from the source. AE & AM areattenuations due to Environmental conditions (E) and Machinecorrection (M). The combined effect of all the sources can bedetermined at various locations by the following equation.




C4 - 15


Lp(total)= 10Log (10 (Lpa)/10 + 10(Lpa)/10 + 10 (Lpa)/10 +. . ………….) (2)

Where Lpa, Lpb, Lpc are noise pressure levels at a point due to differentsources.

Input for the modelThe designed noise levels for the major noise generating sourcesduring the operation of the plant machineries are given in Table-4.7.The values, mentioned in the table are at 1 m. distance from thesource.

TABLE-4.7ESTIMATED NOISE LEVELS DURING PLANT OPERATION

S. No. SOURCE Sound PressureLevel* in dB(A) 1m.

from source1 Fan 852 Pump 853 Turbine 854 Compressor 85

Note: *After acoustic enclosure

The predicted noise levels at various distances are given in Table-4.8.The noise level contours are shown in Figure-4.4.

The ambient noise level recorded during field studies in the arealocated near the project site ranges between 45.8 - 55.7 dB(A). As theambient noise levels are higher than the predicted noise level, due tomasking effect, there is no increase in the ambient noise levels duringoperation phase is envisaged. Hence, there will not be any significantimpact on the surrounding areas due to masking effect.

TABLE-4.8PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS

Sr. No. Distance(m)

Noise level dB (A)

1 50 41.32 100 36.13 200 28.74 300 23.85 400 21.06 500 18.47 600 15.58 700 12.89 800 10.3




C4 - 16


10 900 8.711 1000 5.5

Industrial Noise Standards:The OSHA has recommended permissible noise exposure limit forIndustrial worker which is based on 90 dB(A) for 8 hours exposure aday with 5 dB(A) trading rates. The limits are given in Table-4.9.

TABLE-4.9

PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE NOISE LIMITS

Total time of exposureper day in hours

Sound pressurelevel in dB(A)

8 906 924 953 972 1001 105½ 110¼ 115

Work Zone Noise LevelsThe protective measures need to be provided to the operators andworkers working near the high noise generating machinery. As perOccupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards,the maximum allowable noise level for the workers is 90 dB (A) for 8hours exposure a day.

Mitigation MeasuresAdequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs tothe workers working in high noise areas need to be provided. Inaddition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areasshall be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures suchas use of enclosures with suitable absorption material, etc. Further,in addition to the in plant noise control measures, all the open areaswithin the plant premises and all along the plant boundary will beprovided with adequate green belt to diffuse the noise.

4.3.4 Impacts on SoilThere will be solid waste generation, but will be managed in theproper manner, which has been discussed in Chapter-2.0 of thereport. This will ensure that there will not be any impact on soilquality due to the disposal or deposition of solid wastes.




C4 - 17


4.3.5 Impacts on Land UseThe proposed development will take place on the industrial land,which is not suitable for the agricultural purpose. So, there will beinsignificant impact on the land use pattern of the area.

4.3.6 Impacts on Demography and SocioeconomicsThe labour force involved during construction phase will be replacedby more skilled manpower to operate and maintain the plant.

As the area is close to Raniganj, Asansol & Durgapur Town, theskilled people from the town will be available to work here. So, therewill be no major change of local occupational scenario, though theestablishment of the new project will increase the direct and indirectjobs and other economic opportunities. There will be somedevelopment of secondary service market, which will be beneficial tothe local economy.




C4 - 18


FIGURE - 4.1ISOPLETHS OF SO2




C4 - 19


FIGURE - 4.2ISOPLETHS OF NOx




C4 - 20


FIGURE - 4.3ISOPLETHS OF PM




C4 - 21


FIGURE – 4.4: NOISE LEVEL CONTOURS




C5 - 1

Analysis of Alternatives Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd.

CHAPTER-5.0ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

The proposed project is the expansion of the existing project so it

is proposed within the existing plant site for the overall

integration. So, no alternative site has been explored.


Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed expansion of Integrated Steel Plant for ultimateproduction of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant at


C6 - 1

Environmental Monitoring Programme Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-6.0ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

PROGRAMME

6.1 INTRODUCTIONEnvironmental monitoring is the systematic measurement of thecharacteristics of environmental components. The post projectenvironmental monitoring program serves as the key tool to check theperformance of mitigation measures implemented / adequacy of pollutioncontrol technologies installed.

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMMEMonitoring of the following aspects is important to keep a constant checkon the environmental performance of the project and also theenvironmental quality of the area.

Ambient Air Quality Stack Emission Work zone Air quality, Water Quality Wastewater Quality Drinking Water Quality Noise Level Plantation Condition Periodic Preventive Maintenance Occupational Health & Safety Monitoring Fire Safety Monitoring

Ambient Air Quality

Ambient air quality monitoring will be conducted at 3 locations (120degree to each other) around the project site for relevant parameters as perfrequency stipulated in NAAQS 2009. The parameters, to be monitoredinclude PM10, PM2.5, SO2 , NO2, Ozone, and As, Ni and Pb in PM10.

Fugitive emissions of PM10 will be monitored with a frequency of twice aweek inside the project area where fugitive dust emissions are anticipatedlike the raw material handling area (unloading and storage), truck




C6 - 2


movement and parking area, solid wastes storage area, to ensure that airpollution control measures are working properly.

Table 6.1: Air Pollutant Measurement Technique

Sl.No.

Parameter Technique Technical ProtocolMinimum Detectable

1 RespirableParticulateMatter (PM10)

Respirable Dust Sampler(Gravimetric Method)

IS 5182 (Part 23) :2006 Reaffirmed 2012

2 PM2.5 Fine Respirable DustSampler (GravimetricMethod)

CPCB method -

3 Sulphur Dioxide Modified West & Gaekemethod

IS 5182 (Part 2) : 2001

Reaffirmed 2012

4 Oxides ofNitrogen

Jacob & Hochheisermethod

IS 5182 (Part-6): 2006Reaffirmed 2012

5 Ozone Potassium Iodide chemicalspectroscopic method

CPCB method

6 As, Ni,Pb AAS method CPCB method

Stack Emissions

Emissions from all stacks will be monitored once a week by stack monitoring kit.Online Continuous Emission Monitoring System will be installed at at all majorstacks.

The flue gas from the all stack will be monitored for PM and the Power Plantstack and blast furnace stack for PM SO2, and NOx.

Table 6.2: Stack Measurement Technique

Sl.No.

Parameter Technique Technical ProtocolMinimum Detectable

1 ParticulateMatter

Gravimetric Method IS 11255 (Part 1) : 1985Reaff. 2014

2 SulphurDioxide

IPA – Thorin method IS 11255 (Part 2) :1985Reaff. 2014

3 Oxides of Phenol di-sulphonic IS 11255 (Part 7): 2005




C6 - 3


Nitrogen acid method Reaff. 2012

Ground Water Quality

Ground water will be monitored inside the project site, near solid wastesstorage areaby installing apiezometer. Groundwater quality monitoringwill be also done at nearby villages (3 villages located along the boundaryof plant). The monitoring will be carried out with a frequency of four timesin a year.

Wastewater Quality

Zero wastewater discharge has been planned for the proposed project.There will be wastewater treatment plant and final treated wastewaterafter treatment will be reused. Yet the wastewater quality before use willbe regularly monitored on monthly basis.

Meteorology

A meteorological station will be set-up at the project site for the record ofmeteorological parameters such as wind velocity and direction, ambienttemperature,.

Noise

Noise monitoring will be carried out inside the work area of each plant andnear the high noise generating areas, atplant boundary and outside theproject site at nearby villages twice in a year.

Plantation

The project proponent have trained people to look after and record theconditions of tree plantation and greening of the project area.

Periodic Preventive Maintenance

All instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of workingenvironment parameters will be regularly tested and calibrated, and therespective records maintained;

Occupational Health & Safety Monitoring

The occupational health and safety monitoring program shall includesafety inspection, testing and calibration. Project proponent shall carryout




C6 - 4


inspection and testing of all safety features and hazard control measuresfor plant operation. This shall include regular inspection and testing of allsafety features and hazard control measures focusing on engineering andpersonal protective features, work procedures, places of work,installations, equipment, and tools used. The inspection shall verify thatissued personal protective equipment (PPE) continues to provide adequateprotection and is being worn as required.

ConclusionThe post project monitoring programme, consisting of various disciplines,no. of locations, parameters, frequency of monitoring along with the fundprovision for the proposed expansion project has been presented inTable-6.3.

However, the monitoring programme w.r.t. the frequency and thesampling locations will be finally decided in consultation with the StatePollution Control Board and Regional Office of the MOEF&CC.




C6 - 5


TABLE-6.3MONITORING PROGRAMME FOR PROPOSED PROJECT

Discipline Locations Parameters Frequency Fund Provision(Annual Costin Lakhs)

Meteorology(Met Station)

One Temperature, Rainfall,Relative Humidity,Atmospheric Pressure,Wind Speed andDirection

Hourly 2.0 lakhs

Ambient AirQuality

3-4 relevantlocations

PM10, PM2.5, SO2& NO2 Twice in ayear

3 lakhs

Stack Emission Each Unit PM, SO2 & NOx Twice in ayear

1 lakh

Effluent ProcessEffluent

pH, Total SuspendedSolid, Temperature, Oil& Grease, Copper, Iron &COD

Monthly 20 lakhs

Ground WaterQuality

2-3 Locations pH, Temperature,Conductivity, Turbidity,Alkalinity, Chlorine,Total Suspended Solid,Total Dissolved Solids,Total Hardness,Ca-hardness,Mg-hardness, Coliform,Fe, Cu, Cd, Cr6+, Pb, As,Hg, Zn

Quarterly 1 lakh

Noise Plant Area andNearby villages

Day-and Night-TimeNoise Levels

Twice in ayear

3 lakhs

TOTAL 30 lakhs




C7 - 1

Additional Studies Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-7.0ADDITIONAL STUDIES

(HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ASSESSMENT,DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN AND PUBLIC

CONSULTATION)

Considering the generic structure of the EIA/EMP report prescribed inEIA Notification dated 14.09.2006, this chapter is to comprise of publicconsultation, disaster management, social impact assessment and R&RAction plan. This chapter deals with identification of hazards anddisaster and preventive measures for disaster. The proposed project mayface certain types of hazards which can disrupt normal activitiesabruptly and lead to disaster like fires, inundation, failure of machinery,hot metal spill, electrocution to name a few. Disaster management planis formulated with an aim of taking precautionary step to control thehazard propagation and avert disaster and also to take such action afterthe disaster which limits the damage to the minimum.

Industrial activities, which produce, treat, store and handle hazardoussubstances, have a high hazard potential to safety of man andenvironment at work place and outside. Recognizing the need to controland minimize the risks posed by such activities, the Ministry ofEnvironment & Forests have notified the “Manufacture Storage & Importof Hazardous Chemicals Rules” in the year 2008 (In super session ofthe Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling Rules, 1989) andsubsequently modified, inserted and added different clauses in the saidrule to make it more stringent. For effective implementation of the rule,Ministry of Environment & Forests has provided a set of guidelines. Theguidelines, in addition to other aspects, set out the duties required to beperformed by the occupier along with the procedure. The rule also listsout the industrial activities and chemicals, which are required to beconsidered as hazardous.

During the process of manufacture and other associated materialshazardous wastes are generated which are stored and used within theplant process. The major chemicals handled / stored by the plantincludes HSD, LDO etc. In view of this, proposed activities are beingscrutinized in line of the above referred “manufacture, storage and




C7 - 2


import of hazardous chemicals rules” and observations / findings arepresented in this chapter.

7.1 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENTHazard is a source or situation that has the potential for harm in termsof human injury, ill health, damage to property or the environment, or acombination of these factors. It has got a short or a long term effect onthe work environment with considerable human and economic costs. Ahazard can have a potential to create an emergency like situation at thework place. Hazard is a potential cause to generate a disaster.

Hazards exist in every workplace in different forms and required to beidentified, assessed and controlled regarding the work processes, plantor substances. They arise from (i) workplace environment, (ii) use ofplant and equipment (iii) use of substances and materials, (iv) poor workand/or plant design, (v) inappropriate management systems and workprocedures, and (vi) human behaviour.

Steel plant has many hazardous processes and operations which cancause considerable environmental, health and safety risk to theworkforce. All the hazards cause potential risk to the work environmentwhich include work force and work place and hence need properassessment.

M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. is presently operating a steel plantcomprising Pellet Plant, Sponge Iron Plant, Induction Furnace,Structural Mill, Rolling Mill, Ferro Alloy Plant and Captive Power Plant atVillage Dhasna, P.S. Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Burdwan in thestate of West Bengal after getting the necessary approvals from therelevant Statutory Authorities.

The Company has planned to take up an expansion programme of thesteel plant. Under the expansion programme, the company intends toimplement units for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPASinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89 MTPAsponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal/pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPAlong steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unitand 136 MW captive power plant,0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys within theexisting plant premises.




C7 - 3


The Plant has lower risk potential than those industries dealing withtoxic and flammable chemicals. Off-site people are not exposed to anydangers, hence the societal risk is insignificant.

This is an early check of major hazards, which are of risk potential -including the potential for disastrous interactions of the various plantoperational activities. This checklist, though not strictly speaking aHazard and Operability Study (HAZOP) would considerably facilitate afull scale HAZOP Study for final drawing up of risk managementmeasures when the ‘design-freeze’ stage commences. The identificationof hazards anticipation for the proposed project activities are presentedbelow in Table-7.1.

TABLE 7.1HAZARD IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECTItem Nature of Hazard Hazard Potential

Raw Material Handling:Iron Ore Fines/Lump,Manganese Ore, Limestone,Dolomite, Quartzite etc.

Dust Minor

Coal (Coking & Non-coking) Heat, Fire & Dust ModerateHSD/ Lube Oils / Greases Heat & Fire MajorProduction Units:Blast Furnace(CO gas leakage, explosion,burns)

Fire, Heat & Dust Major

Sinter Plant Dust & Heat ModerateSponge Iron Plant Fire, Heat & Dust ModerateSteel Making Facilities :Induction Furnaces &Electric Arc Furnaces

Heat & Fire by HotMetal & Slag Handling

Major

Coke Oven Plant Fire, Heat & Dust Moderate

Hot Rolling Mill Heat ModerateDuctile Iron Pipe Unit Heat & Dust ModerateCaptive Power Plant(Coal Storage & Fuel oilstorage tanks need to bementioned)

Fire, Heat & Dust Moderate

Pellet Plant Heat & Dust ModerateProducer Gas Plant Heat & Dust ModerateCement Plant Dust ModerateUtilities :




C7 - 4


Fuel (Gas / Liquid) Heat & Fire MajorElectric Power Supply Heat & Fire Minor

The Brief about nature of various Hazards in M/s SSPL is given below,

Brief of Nature of Hazard in the Project

NATURE OF HAZARD SOURCESFire Hazard Release/leakage of CO gas, BF gas, Coke Oven gas

and Hot Liquid metal.Fire in HSD storage.

Explosion Hazard Release/leakage of CO gas, BF gas & Coke Oven gas.Toxic Hazard Release of CO gas, BF gas & Coke Oven gas.

Fire/Explosions dueto Spillage of Liquid

Metal

Spillage/Transfer of liquid metal, liquid steel andhot slag.

Heat Radiations dueto Hot MetalHandling

Spillage of liquid metal, liquid steel and hot slag

Accidents due toMaterial Handling

Equipment

Connected with all Material Handling Equipment

(a) Splashing of molten metal and solid waste : Sudden breaks out ofmolten metal and slag have been known to take place during furnaceoperation. The break out may take place from weak portions of hearth.The spillage of hot metal or slag can cause severe burn injuries and fires.Explosions may also occur due to hot metal or slag falling in a pool ofwater resulting in injuries and fire due to flying hot splinters andsplashing of hot metal or slag. The spillage of hot metal can also be dueto hearth breakage, mould breakage and during transportation. Theaccidents can occur due to failure of water-cooled panels, puncture inwater-cooled lances, leakage of water from the walls of mould. Throughregular checks and proper upkeep of furnace refractory and coolingpanels, such incidents can be avoided.

The consequences will result in death (extreme case), severe burn andmechanical injury and will be limited to working personnel near the siteof incident.

(b) Dust and fumes: Dust and fumes will be generated at many points inthe steel plant.




C7 - 5


Exposure to silica is a risk to workers engaged in lining, relining andrepairing induction furnaces and vessels with refractory materials.Ladles are lined with fire-brick or bonded crushed silica and this liningrequires frequent repair. The silica contained in refractory materials ispartly in the form of silicates, which do not cause silicosis but ratherpneumoconiosis. Workers are rarely exposed to heavy clouds of dust.

Alloy additions to furnaces making special steels sometimes bringpotential exposure risks from chromium, manganese, lead and cadmium.

(c) Rolling Mill: Severe injuries may be sustained in hot rolling, ifworkers attempt to cross roller conveyors at unauthorized points.Looping and lashing may cause extensive injuries and burns, evensevering of lower limbs. The use of large quantities of oils, rust inhibitorsand so on, which are generally applied by spraying, is another hazardcommonly encountered in rolling mills. Despite the protective measurestaken to confine the sprayed products, they often collect on the floor andon communication ways, where they may cause slips and falls.

Even in automated works, accidents occur in conversion work whilechanging heavy rollers in the stands.

Tongs used to grip hot material may knock together; the squarespanners used to move heavy rolled sections by hand may cause seriousinjuries to the head or upper torso by backlash. Many accidents may becaused by faulty lifting and handling and by defects in cranes and liftingtackle. Many accidents are caused through falls and stumbles or badlymaintained floors, by badly stacked material, by protruding billet endsand cribbing rolls and so on.

In hot rolling, burns and eye injuries may be caused by flying mill scale;splash guards can effectively reduce the ejection of scale and hot water.Eye injuries may be caused by dust particles or by whipping of cableslings; eyes may also be affected by glare.

Considerable noise develops in the entire rolling zone from the gearbox ofthe rolls and straightening machines, from pressure water pumps, fromshears and saws, from throwing finished products into a pit and fromstopping movements of the material with metal plates.

Cleaning of the finished products with high-speed percussion tools maylead to arthritic changes of the elbows, shoulders, collarbone, distal ulnaand radius joint, as well as lesions of the navicular and lunatum bone.

(d) Carbon monoxide exposure: In the proposed blast furnace, largequantity of blast furnace gas (which also includes 22 to 23% carbonmonoxide) will be produced in the process of manufacturing. After the




C7 - 6


dust is removed, these gases will be used as fuel sources in differentunits. The Blast Furnace gas is odorless, poisonous and inflammablebecause of large amount of carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide sometimes emanates or leaks from the tops or bodiesof blast furnaces or from the many gas pipelines inside plants,accidentally causing acute carbon monoxide poisoning. Any leakage ofthe gas and subsequent ignition may cause explosion / fire. Inhalationof the gas may also result in fatality. Most cases of such poisoning occurduring work around blast furnaces, especially during repairs. Othercases occur during work around hot stoves, tours of inspection aroundthe furnace bodies, work near the furnace tops or work near cindernotches or the tapping notches. Carbon monoxide poisoning may alsoresult from gas released from water-seal valves or seal pots; from suddenshutdown of blowing equipment, boiler rooms or ventilation fans; fromleakage; from failure to properly ventilate or purge process vessels,pipelines or equipment prior to work; and during closing of pipe valves.

ASSIFICATION OF MAJOR HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCESHazardous substances may be classified into three main classes namelyflammable substances, unstable substances and toxic substances. Theratings for a large number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivityand toxicity have been given in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. The majorhazardous materials to be stored, transported, handled and utilizedwithin the facility have been summarized in the Table-7.2. The fuelstorage details and properties are given in Table-7.3 and Table-7.4respectively.

TABLE-7.2CATEGORY WISE SCHEDULE OF STORAGE TANKS

TABLE-7.3HAZARDOUS MATERIALS STORED, TRANSPORTED AND HANDLEDA Material No. of Tank Capacity

(Storage Condition)1 HSD 2 20 KL

TABLE-7.4PROPERTIES OF FUELS USED IN THE PLANT

Chemical Codes/Label TLV FBP MP FP UEL LEL0C %

HSD Flammable - 371 - 54.4 6 0.7TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling PointMP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point

Materials Hazardous PropertiesHSD U 1202. Dangerous Goods Class 3 – Flammable

Liquid




C7 - 7


UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

7.1.1 IDENTIFICATION OF MAJOR HAZARD INSTALLATIONS BASED ON GOIRULES, 2008

Following accidents in the chemical industry in India over a few decades,a specific legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforcedby Govt. of India in 2008 (In suppression of 1989) in conjunction withEnvironment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as GOI Rules2008. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations, the rulesemploy certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosiveproperties of chemicals.

A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities ofstorage has been carried out, to determine threshold quantities asnotified by GOI Rules, 2008 and the applicable rules are identified.Applicability of storage rules are summarized in Table-7.5.

TABLE-7.5APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL STORAGE

Sr.No.

Chemical/Fuel Listed inSchedule

TotalQuantity

Threshold Quantity (T)for Application of Rules4, 5, 7-9,13-15

10-12

1 HSD 3(PART II) 2 x 20 KL 10,000 MT 10,000 MT

7.2 HAZARD ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION

7.2.1 METHODOLOGYAn assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose ofidentifying and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, majorprocess components, utility and support systems, environmental factors,proposed operations, facilities, and safeguards.

In the proposed steel plant large amounts of material will be processed,transported and conveyed by massive equipment. The major chemicalshandled / stored by the plant includes HSD, LDO etc. Due to massiveequipment and movement of large masses of materials, workers will beexposed to the heat of molten metal and slag at temperatures up to1,800°C, toxic or corrosive substances, respirable air-bornecontaminants and noise.

Burns may occur at many points in the steel-making process: at thefront of the furnace during tapping from molten metal or slag; from spills,




C7 - 8


spatters or eruptions of hot metal from ladles or vessels duringprocessing, teeming (pouring) or transporting; and from contact with hotmetal as it is being formed into a final product.

Water entrapped by molten metal or slag may generate explosive forcesthat launch hot metal or material over a wide area. Inserting a dampimplement into molten metal may also cause violent eruptions.

Mechanical transport exposes workers to potential struck-by andcaught- between hazards. Overhead travelling cranes are found inalmost all areas of steel works. Most large works also rely heavily on theuse of fixed-rail equipment and large industrial tractors for transportingmaterials.

Large quantities of greases, oils and lubricants are used and if spilledcan easily become a slipping hazard on walking or working surfaces.

Sharp engines or burrs on steel products or metal bands pose lacerationand puncture hazards to workers involved in finishing, shipping andscrap-handling operations.

Foreign-body eye hazards are prevalent in most areas, especially in rawmaterial handling and steel finishing, where grinding, welding andburning are conducted.

7.2.2 PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS (PHA)A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the majorhazards associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This isfollowed by consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally, thevulnerable zones are plotted for which risk reducing measures arededuced and implemented. Preliminary hazard analysis for fuel storagearea and whole plant is given in Table-7.6 and Table-7.7.

TABLE-7.6PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR STORAGE AREAS

Unit Capacity Hazard IdentifiedHSD 2x20 KL Pool fire

TABLE-7.7




C7 - 9


PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT INGENERAL

PHA Category Description ofPlausibleHazard

Recommendation Provision

Environmentalfactors

If there is anyleakage andeventuality ofsource ofignition.

-- All electrical fittingsand cables will beprovided as per thespecified standards. Allmotor starters will beflame proof.

Highlyinflammablenature of theliquid fuelsmay cause firehazard in thestorage facility

A well designed fireprotection includingfoam, dry powder, andCO2 extinguishershould be provided.

Fire extinguisher ofsmall size and big sizewill be provided at allpotential fire hazardplaces. In addition tothe above, SSPL hasown firefightingequipment.

7.2.3 FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX (FE&TI) FOR STORAGE UNIT

Dow's Fire and Explosion Index (F and E) is a product of Material Factor(MF) and hazard factor (F3) while MF represents the flammability andreactivity of the substances, the hazard factor (F3), is itself a product ofGeneral Process Hazards (GPH) and Special Process Hazards (SPH). Theapplication of FE & TI would help to make a quick assessment of thenature and quantification of the hazard in these areas. However, thisdoes not provide precise information.

The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical valueof F&EI as per the criteria given below:

F&EI Range Degree of Hazard0-60 Light61-96 Moderate97-127 Intermediate128-158 Heavy159-up Severe

By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classifiedinto one of the following three categories established for the purpose(Table-7.8).

TABLE-7.8FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX




C7 - 10


Category Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) Toxicity Index (TI)I F&EI < 65 TI < 6II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10

Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures arerecommended for the three hazard categories.

7.2.4 RESULTS OF FE AND TI FOR STORAGE UNITBased on the GOI Rules 2008, the hazardous fuel used by the proposedproject is identified. Fire and explosion are the likely hazards, which mayoccur due to the fuel storage. Hence, fire and explosion index has beencalculated for in plant storage.

The Health (Nh), Flammability (Nf), Reactivity (Nr), and MF (MaterialFactor) for all the materials under consideration was derived from NFPA(National Fire Protection Association) codes. The GPH (General ProcessHazard Factor) and SPH (Specific Process Hazard Factor) was calculatedaccordingly. Based on F&EI (Fire and Explosion Index), the HSD willcome in light degree of hazard and nil toxicity. Thus Risk Assessmentand Hazard analysis has been carried out due to fire hazard for HSDtanks by carrying out MCA (Maximum Credible Accident) analysis for thesame. Estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.9.

TABLE-7.9FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Fuel TotalCapacity

NFPAClassification

GPH SPH F&EI F & ECategory

**TI ToxicityCategory

Nh Nf Nr MFHSD 2x20 KL 0 2 0 10 2 2.2 43.2 Light NIL -

Results of FE&TI analysis show that the storage of HSD falls into Lightcategory of fire and explosion index.




C7 - 11


Damage distance computations for MCA (Maximum Credible Accident)analysis

The major hazards scenarios identified for the possibility of occurrenceare mainly concerned with HSD tanks.

A storage tanks of HSD with a capacity of 1x20 KL, Molecular Weight135 kg/kg mol, Boiling Point 350°C, density 900 kg/m3 is considered.Tank fire would occur if the radiation intensity is high on the peripheralsurface of tanks leading to increase in internal tank pressure. Pool firewould occur when fuel oil collected in the dyke due to leakage getsignited. As the tanks are provided within the dyke the fire will beconfined within the dyke wall.

SOURCE STRENGTH:Burning Puddle / Pool FirePuddle Diameter: 2.5 metersPuddle Volume: 5 cubic metersFlame Length: 8 metersBurn Duration: ALOHA limited the duration to 1 hourBurn Rate: 25.3 kilograms/minTotal Amount Burned: 1,516 kilograms

THREAT ZONE:

Sr.No.

IncidentRadiation(kW/m2)

Type of Damage IntensityDamage toEquipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to processequipment

100% lethality in 1 min.1% lethality in 10 sec

2 12.5Minimum energy toignite with a flame;melts plastic tubing

1% lethality in 1 min.

3 4.5

Causes pain if duration islonger than 20 sec,however blistering is un-likely (First degree burns)

4 2 Causes no discomfort onlong exposures

Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank

The maximum capacity of storage of HSD is 20 KL. The most crediblefailure is the rupture/hole of the storage tank. As a worst case, it isassumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke forming a pool,




C7 - 12


which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition. The radiationintensities for rupture of HSD storage tank is given in Table-7.10.

TABLE-7.10THERMAL RADIATION DUE TO FAILURE OF HSD TANKS

Scenario Thermal radiation kW/m2 distance in m37.5 12.5 4.5 2.0

Failure of HSDStorages tank

0.65 1.3 2.17 3.76

7.3 FAILURE MODE EFFECT ANALYSISFailure mode effects analysis (FMEA) is one of the most important andwidely used tools for reliability analysis. FMEA identifies correctiveactions required to reduce failures to assure the highest possible yieldsafety and reliability. Even though it is widely used reliability techniqueit has some limitation in prioritizing the failure modes and output maybe large for even simple systems, may not easily deal with timesequence, environmental and maintenance aspects.

Figure – 7.2: Steps in FMEA

7.3.4.1 RISK PRIORITY NUMBER

Risk priority number methodology is a technique for analysing the riskassociated with potential failures during a FMEA analyses. To calculate




C7 - 13


risk priority number severity, occurrence, and detection are the threefactors need to determine.

RPN= Severity× Occurrence× Detection

7.3.4.2 SEVERITY (S)

Severity is the seriousness of the effect of potential failure modes.Severity rating with the higher number represents the higherseriousness or risk which could cause death.

Table-7.11: Example table of Severity

7.3.4.4 OCCURRENCE (O)

Occurrence ratings for FMEA are based upon the likelihood that a causemay occur based upon past failures and performance of similar systemin similar activity. Occurrence values should have data to providejustification.

Table –7. 12: Example table of Occurrence




C7 - 14


7.3.4.5 DETECTION (D)

Detection is an assessment of the likelihood that the current controlswill detect the cause of failure mode.

Table – 7.13: Example table of Detection

7.3.4.6 FMEA IMPLEMENTATION

Failure mode effect analysis is executed by a multidisciplinary team ofexperts in mini blast furnace operation with the help of process flow chart.Criteria of ranking of severity, occurrence and detection are selectedsuitably by analyzing the past failure records of the furnace. Using valuesof severity, occurrence and detection number risk priority number iscalculated.




C7 - 15


Table – 7.14: RPN for proposed expansion project &Propose Control Measures

Blast Furnace

Components /Process

FailureMode

FailureEffect

FailureCause

ExistingControl S O D RPN Additional

Control

Bleedervalves

Failed toOperate Explosion Corrosion Reliable

Supplier 10 2 3 60 PeriodicMaintenance

Conveyorfeed belt Friction Fire Improper

MaintenanceBelt SwaySwitch 8 2 2 32

Lubricating therotating partsregularly

Cold blastBlower

FlowPressureIncrease

Rupture instove

Failure ofvalves Flow meters 8 1 2 16 Interlock system

Hot blastBlower

Stove shellcrack

Fire &Explosion

ExcessTemperature

Thermocouple 9 1 2 18 Periodic

Maintenance

Blast Furnacegas

Pipelinerupture

COpoisoning

OverPressure Detectors 10 2 2 40

Providedetectorswith alarmsystem

OxygenInjection

Pipelinerupture

Fire &Explosion



Cooling watersupply pump

Pumpfailure Explosion No power

supply

Redundantpowersupply

10 3 2 60Check the fuellevel of dieselgenerator

Tapping hoseOxygenhosecut

Fire Ageing ReliableSupplier 8 4 4 128 Change hose

periodically

Hot metallifting bycrane

Ropebreakage

Hot Metalladle down Overloading

Safeworkingload aremarked

9 3 2 54 interlocks withalarm

Hot metaltransfer bytrolley

MechanicalFailure

(Gearbox,Axial,Wheel)

Spillage ofhotmetal

ImproperMaintenance

ROW (3 m)marked,coverladle,loadingwithinGranted

permissiblelimit

9 3 2 54

Regularinspectionand Periodicmaintenance

Gas cleaningfilter bags

Filter bagsfailure

Impropergas

cleaning

ExcessTemperature

Monitoringsystem 4 3 3 36


Lancing Hose Tuyerspuncture Burns Ageing Reliable

Supplier 5 4 4 80 Check defectsbefore use

Butterfly valveto regulate

flow

Valvepartiallyclosed

COPoisoning Dust Air-line

respirators 9 3 2 54 PeriodicMaintenance

SteamInjection

Pipelinecracks Burns Excess

pressureLine

Inspection 7 2 3 42Display

cautionarynotice




C7 - 16


SinterConveyor feedbelt to sinter

plantFriction Fire Improper



Pneumaticlime

transportationsystem

Failed toOperate

Spillageof HotLime

ImproperMaintenance



Automaticlubricatingsystem

Failed toOperate

MechanicalFailure

ImproperMaintenance

Monitoringsystem 4 2 3 24 Periodic

Maintenance

Double conedust valves

Failed toOperate

Improperdust

cleaningCorrosion Reliable

Supplier 3 2 4 24 PeriodicMaintenance

Mixed gasinjection

Pipelinerupture

Fire &Explosion



Sinter Cooler Failed toOperate

Combustion

failure inSinter

ImproperMaintenance



DRI

Conveyor feedbelt to DRI Friction Corrosion Improper



Reducing Gasinjection

Pipelinerupture

ProcessFailure inDRI Kiln

OverPressure

LineInspection 7 3 3 42


CoolerDischarged

Gas

Pipelinerupture

Failure inAfter

BurningChamber

ExcessPressure

LineInspection 5 3 2 30


Mag Pulley MechanicalFailure

WasteConveyingSystemFailure

ImproperMonitoring Inspection 5 3 3 45 Periodic

Maintenance

Conveyor Beltto storage

BinsFriction

WasteStorageSystemFailure

ImproperMaintenance

Belt SwaySwitch 4 2 2 16


SMS- INDUCTION FURNACEFlow

monitoringswitch

Failure tooperate

Rupture inCurrentFlow

Switchbroken

ReliableSupplier 7 2 3 42 Regular

Inspection

DC Choke Failure tooperate

Rise ofcurrent todangerous

level

ElectricFailure

ReliableSupplier 7 3 3 63 Regular

Inspection

DM Watercirculating

unit

Failure tocirculatede ionizedwater

ExcessiveHeat

generationin solid

state powersupply unit

ElectricFailure Inspection 4 3 3 24


directionControl Valve

Failure tooperate

furnacetiltingcontrol

Corrosion ReliableSupplier 7 2 3 42 Periodic

Maintenance




C7 - 17


failure

Furnacelaminationpacket

Electric/magneticfailure

Failure toprovidea returnpath tothe flux

Overheatingof the

structureInspection 7 3 2 42


Flowregulatingvalves infurnace

Failed toOperate

ExcessiveTemperatur

e

ImproperMaintenance Indicator 8 3 4 96 Periodic

Maintenance

Hot metallifting bycrane

Ropebreakage

Hot Metalladle down Overloading

Safeworkingload aremarked

9 3 2 54 interlocks withalarm

Hot metaltransfer bytrolley

MechanicalFailure

(Gearbox,Axial,Wheel)

Spillage ofhotmetal

ImproperMaintenance

ROW (3 m)marked,coverladle,loadingwithinGranted

permissiblelimit

9 3 2 54


Ladle Refining FurnaceHot metal

ladletransfer car

Friction Fire ImproperMaintenance



Continuous Casting Machine

Ladle car Friction Fire ImproperMaintenance



Stopper MechanicalFailure

Fire &Explosion

ImproperMaintenance Indicator 7 2 2 28 Regular

Inspection

Tundish Failed toOperate

Spillage ofHot liquidmetal

MechanicalFailure

Lineinspection 7 2 2 28


Ferro Alloy Plant

Furnace

Recirculating coolingwater

coming incontactwith the

molten ironor slag

Spillage ofHot

Spurting ofmetal/slag.Explosionunderextremecases.

Leakage ofwater from

therefractorywalls

Operate



Furnace

Presence ofOil &

Grease andother

impurities

Suddencatching offires andflames

ImproperMaintenance Inspection 4 3 3 24 Periodic

Maintenance

Coke Oven PlantConveyor belt

totop of the coal

tower

Operationfailure Injury Improper

MaintenanceLine

inspection 4 2 2 16 Periodicmaintenance




C7 - 18


Rolling Mill (Hot)

Conveyorrollers to feed Friction Fire Improper



Water coolingpump

Pumpfailure Explosion No power

supply


10 3 2 60

Check the fuellevel

of dieselgenerator

Ductile Iron Pipe

Conveyor feedbelt Friction Fire Improper



Magnesiumtreatment

Pipelinescrack Explosion Excess

PressureLine


cautionarynotice

Cooling watersupply pump

PumpFailure Explosion No power

supply


10 4 2 80

Check the fuellevel

of dieselgenerator

& provision forstand by pump

Core makingjets

OperationalFailure Injury Improper

MaintenanceBelt SwaySwitch 6 6 2 72 Periodic

maintenance

SteamInjectionHeat

Treatment)

Pipelinescrack Burns Excessive

PressureLine


cautionarynotice

CementsprayingNozzle

Pin Holes

Gastemperatur

eincrease

Sprayingcement

excessivelyMonitors 7 3 2 42

Check the levelfor

every 5 minutes

Gas Cleaningfilter bags

Filter bagsfailure

Impropergas

cleaning

excess

Temperature

Monitoringsystem 4 3 3 36 Regular

inspection

BitumensprayingNozzle

Pin Holes

Gastemperatur

eincrease

SprayingBitumenexcessively

Monitors 8 8 2 32Check the level

forevery 5 minutes

Dolochar Coal Mix based CPP

Air SupplyFluidized Bed

Flow AirFuel Ratio

OperationFailure

Air FlowBelow 30 %



Boiler CorrosionEffect

Cooling oftube

increases

temperature

CreepFailure

Lineinspection 4 4 5 80 Regular

inspection

Boiler Boiler Tube

Damageinside &

outside thetube

Extremelycombustion Monitors 6 2 5 60 Periodic

Maintenance

Boiler

TubeAlignment

&Setting

Deformation of

vibrationArrestor

Vibrationincreases Inspection 6 2 4 48 Periodic

Maintenance




C7 - 19


BoilerIncompleteCombustio

n

Air FuelLosses

Insufficientair supply toFurnace

Lineinspection 5 2 5 50 Regular

inspection

Turbine/Steam

Generator

Temp ofSuperHeater &Reheater

Failure ofturbineblades

Changingthe

plant load

Lineinspection 5 2 6 60 Periodic

Maintenance

Turbine/Steam

GeneratorLoss of fuel

AbnormalCombustio

n

Improper airfuel mixture Monitors 4 3 4 48

Check the levelfor

every 5 minutes

water Tank Water Levelof Drum

ExcessSteamPressure

Failure ofIndicators Monitor 6 3 2 36 Regular

inspection

Producer Gas Plant

Air Injection Pipelinerupture

Operationfailure

ImproperMaintenance Detectors 7 3 2 42


Turbine

Temp ofSuperHeater &Reheater

Failure ofturbineblades

Changingthe

plant load

Lineinspection 5 2 6 60 Periodic

Maintenance

7.3.4.7 RESULT OF FEMA FOR PROCESS UNIT

In MBF, highest value of risk priority number is obtained fortapping process. However, the control measures like change ofhose periodically by purchasing it from the reliable supplier shallminimize the risk probability.

The hot metal from MBF/ Induction Furnace / Electric ArcFurnace will be transported by crane / trolley which carrymoderate risk priority number. This will be well equipped with theinterlocking facility with alarm in case of any overloading.Moreover, proper marking with ROW of 3 m will be in place alongwith all safe guards to ensure the absence of water throughoutthe hot metal transfer route.

7.4 RISK REDUCTION OPPORTUNITIES

The following opportunities will be considered as a potential means ofreducing identified risks during the detailed design phase:

Safety organization is of prime importance in the iron and steelindustry, where safety depends so much on workers’ reaction topotential hazards. The first responsibility for management is toprovide the safest possible physical conditions, Accident-prevention committees, workers’ safety delegates, safety incentives,competitions, suggestion schemes, slogans and warning noticescan all play an important part in safety programmes.




C7 - 20


Provision for adequate water capacity to supply fire protectionsystems and critical process water;

Isolate people from load carrying/mechanical handling systems,vehicle traffic and storage and stacking locations;

Installation of fit-for-purpose access ways and fall protectionsystems to facilitate safe access to fixed and mobile plant;

Provision and integrity of process tanks, waste holding tanks andbunded areas as per relevant standards;

Arrange display signs for material strictly prohibited inside anywork premises like inflammable materials, firearms, weapons &ammunitions, etc.

Developing ‘Dos’ & ‘Don’ts’ during various types of works likeworking at heights, etc.

Ensure that emergency control mechanisms like switch, valve andemergency lamp are covered with shield, water & shock resistancecover during rain etc. and peddle switch for bigger rotatingmachinery mixer etc. There should be no temporary cable jointsand open air working switch yard at enriched level.

In addition to the yard fire hydrant system, each individual shopwould be provided with fire and smoke detection alarm system.Fire detection system would be interlocked with automated watersprinklers.

Security of facility to prevent unauthorized access to plant,introduction of prohibited items, and control of onsite traffic; and

Development of emergency response management systemscommensurate.

Overall, an integrated approach combining good engineering andmaintenance practices, safe job procedures, worker training and use ofpersonal protective equipment (PPE) is required to control hazards.

7.5 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN




C7 - 21


A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people areplunged into helplessness and suffering, as a result, need protection,clothing, shelter, medical and social care and other necessities of life. Adisaster is an unforeseen combination of circumstances that causesserious body injuries loss of life or extensive damage to the plantfacilities or total.

In the above sections, risk assessment has been made, based on thepotential hazards, identified for the said project.

Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, disastersresulting from natural phenomena like

1. Cyclone2. Earthquake3. Sabotage4. Riot5. Air Raid

The second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, orman’s impact upon the environment. Examples are industrial accidents,radiation accidents, factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases orchemical substances, spillage of hot molten liquid metal, river pollution,mining or other structural collapses, rail and road transport accidentsand can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss.

The company has prepared its Disaster Management Plan to take care ofall the emergency situations/ eventualities, as discussed above.

The Disaster Management Plan of the company is divided into two parts:

(i) Onsite Emergency PlanIn this plan, the company officers will be given pre-designatedresponsibilities for dealing with the emergency.

(ii) Offsite Emergency PlanIn this, different Govt. agencies will be conformed about theemergency for necessary help from them.

7.5.1 OBJECTIVE OF DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

The disaster management plan is aimed to ensure safety of life,protection of environment, protection of installation, restoration ofproduction and salvage operations in this same order of priorities.

For effective implementation of the disaster management plan, it will bewidely circulated and personnel training given through rehearsals/drills.




C7 - 22


The disaster management plan would reflect the probable, consequentialseveralties of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions.

To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory orimmediate vicinity of the factory, a disaster management plan has to beformulated and this planned emergency document is called “DisasterManagement Plan”.

The objective of the industrial disaster management plan is to make useof the combined resources of the plant and the outside services toachieve the following:

Proper training should be provided to ensure safe operation of thecrane for hot metal transfer. There should be propercommunication and use of standard hand signals between cranedrivers and slingers to prevent injuries from unexpected cranemovement / spillage of hot metal

Ensuring proper safe guard by providing rail guards with interlocks in all those areas where hot metal transfer takes place.

Inspection and maintenance programs for crane parts, ropes, liftingtackle, hooks to prevent dropped loads.

Safe means of access to cranes to avoid falls and accidents oncrane transverse ways.

Regular maintenance shall be ensured for Mechanical parts oftrolleys like Gearbox, Axial & Wheels to avoid any spillage of hotmetal during transportation.

Proper training should be imparted to the workers, which shouldinclude information about hazards, safe methods of work,avoidance of risks and the wearing of PPE.

Furnace operators should be protected by enclosing the source ofnoise by providing sound proof shelters. Reducing exposure timemay also prove effective. Hearing protectors (earmuffs or earplugs)are often required in high-noise areas.

All dangerous parts of machinery and equipment, including lifts,conveyors, long travel shafts and gearing on overhead cranes,should be securely guarded.

Proper ventilation should be provided throughout the plantwherever substantial quantity of dust, fumes and gas are generated,together with the highest standards of cleanliness andhousekeeping.




C7 - 23


Gas equipment must be regularly inspected and well maintained soas to prevent any gas leakage. Whenever any work is to be done inan environment likely to contain gas, carbon monoxide gasdetectors should be used to ensure safety. When work in adangerous area is unavoidable, self-contained or supplied-airrespirators should be worn. Breathing-air cylinders should alwaysbe kept in readiness,

Heat protection should be provided between workers and radiantheat sources, such as furnaces or hot metal.

ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

A) The disaster control procedure lays down the efforts to be made toprevent fatal accidents, physical harm or injury to personnel anddamage to equipment facilities materials. It requires coordinatedefforts of all employees to control and eliminate a disastrous situation.

B) All efforts to control a disaster will be coordinated among the variousco-ordinators and all actions, taken will be as directed by the chiefco-ordinator. The co-ordinating members will be responsible to keephim posted on the development and course of action will be followedby them (refer Annexure-I).

7.5.2 EMERGENCIES

Emergencies may be of minor and major nature and both requires behandled properly with minimum damage or loss and/or injury.

I. Fire & Explosion General Fire. Electrical Fire. Fire on HSD

Table-7.13-Work instruction for the personnel for fire

Sr. No. Element Description Responsibility

1 Detection of FireIt fire out breakers at anyplace, it is to be reported toArea- in-charge

Concerned Line Incharge/Staff

2 Switch off thesources of fire Source of fire to be stopped. Concerned Operational

in charge

3 Emergency Alarm

Emergency Alarm should beactivated by nominatedSecurity Guard like ShiftSecurity Supervisor

Shift SecuritySupervisor/ ShiftSecurity Officer




C7 - 24


4 AssemblyAll employees to beassemble at the nearestassembly point.

Security Guard/Member of Emergency

control team

5 Head count & CallFire Brigade

Head count to be done forall the personal matchingwith total entry.

Manager- HR & A

6 Remedy Action

Using in house FireExtinguisher, Fire Brigade/tanker available in plant tostop the fire

Unit Head

7 Call Fire brigade Call to the nearest firebrigade if required Manager- HR & A

II. Heavy Leakage of Blast Furnace Gases

If heavy leakage observed, immediately, Operational-in-charge/ Shift-in-charge will take initiative to stop the sources of BFG leakage by usingon-line breathing apparatus.

If any fire found, must be extinguished with water CO2, ABC, typeextinguishing medium.

Close the BFG source.

Switch off the appliances. Do not reuse until remedial action hasbeen taken.

Stop main safety shut of control valve.

Open the vent.

Open all the doors and windows to increase ventilation.

At the same time, water sprinkling spray to be applied to avoidexplosion.

III. Heavy Splashing/Spillage of Hot Molten Liquid Metal:

Leakage source to be controlled.

Clean all the burnt and metallic parts.

Work Instruction during transportation of Hot Metal from MBF is givenin Table-7.14 below:

Table-7.17

Sr.No. Element Description Responsibility




C7 - 25


1 Heavy Splashing /Spillage of HotMolten LiquidMetal from MBF

Molten metal transported byEOT crane and trolley and if anyspillage occurs spilled area to besegregated by safety ribbon. Thespilled area to be barricaded bydry sand to control spillage.

Removal of all the flammablematerials from the nearby areas.

Use ABC type, DCP type of fireextinguisher to control the firefrom molten metal.

Use fire hydrant water toextinguish fire from moltenmetal.

ConcernedLine In charge/ OperationalIn charge ofSSPL

IV. For Storage and Handling of Cylinders

Check the label on the cylinder and identify the content beforeusing.

All Compressed gas cylinder should be properly handled andstored. All filled cylinders must be stored upright and secured bychains or straps or kept on the trolley to prevent falling due toaccidental contact, vibration, or earthquakes.

Gas cylinder must be secured to prevent falling due to accidentalcontact, vibration, or earthquakes.

If the cylinder value cannot be open by hand, the valve shouldnever be forced and to be returned to the supplier.

All cylinder storage areas outside or inside, shall be protected fromextreme heat, cold and access from unauthorized personnel.

Do not allow grease or oil to come in contact with oxygen cylinders,valves, regulator, gauges or fittings.

Open the cylinder value slowly directed away from face.

Report all suspected leaks immediately to the maintenancedepartment.

V. Cyclones/Storms/Lightening




C7 - 26


As high speed wind can cause severe property damage, bodily injury,this plan is intended to mitigate the risk of potential damage due towind storm.

DO’s:

Immediately close all the equipment’s / instruments in safeoperational mode.

Gather at emergency assembly point.

Stay away from storm-damaged areas.

Be up to date with Weather Forecast.

Listen to the radio for information and instruction if any furtherchances or not

DON’Ts:

Avoid taking rest high rise building / trees / equipment’s etc.

Do not panic

7.5.3 FACILITIES, AVAILABLE WITH THE FACTORY

a) Fire Fighting Facility - The entire factory will be protected with fireextinguishing system from outside and inside the shop floor. FireBrigade/ tanker will be available in plant to take care of anyunforeseen circumstances.

b) Material Handling - Heavy duty cranes including mobile cranes, forklifts, trucks, trolleys will be used in the plant. The same could beused at time of emergency for handling the material.

c) Personnel Protective Equipment - Safety shoe, safety helmets, safetygoggles, asbestos hand gloves, rubber hand gloves, acid proof aprons,earplugs, aprons, leg guards etc. will be made available in the Centralstore of the plant. At the time of emergency, the same can be madeeasily available by safety coordinator.

d) Communication Facility- All the officers can be communicated bymobile phone & Walky Talky provided by authority. A siren will beinstalled at the gate to inform everybody inside and outside theterritory in case of emergency as well as all clear, by activating thesiren tone.




C7 - 27


e) Medical Facility - The Plant will maintain the required emergencymedical facilities and health checkup for the workers will be doneregularly by the visiting Doctors. In case of major accident, personswill be referred to nearest Hospital / Primary Health Centre.

7.5.4 KEY PERSONNEL AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The actions necessary in an emergency will clearly depend upon thesurrounding circumstances. Nevertheless, it is imperative that therequired actions will be initiated and directed by nominated people, eachhaving specified responsibilities as part of coordinated plan. Suchnominated personnel will be known as Key Personnel.

7.5.5 ORGANIZATION

The Central Disaster Management Cell (DMC) will be set up under thedirect charge of General Manager (Works). Organizational structure is asbelow:

Director/Executive Director (Works) will be empowered to declareemergency and he will be in charge of all operations in such situations.He will be supported by GM (Maintenance & Projects), Divisional Heads




C7 - 28


of respective all Plants, Security and Fire Fighting, Administration,Medical Officer, In-charge Safety and In-charge Environment in handlingsuch a situation.

Disaster Control Cell shall operate from the Administrative block.

There will be shop level Disaster management cell in each division.Divisional heads will be nominated as controllers for their respectivedivisions. They support central team as required. Organizationalstructure is as below:

Divisional heads

7.6 HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS & ASSOCIATED HAZARDSThe plant will have the storage facilities for the hazardous chemicals likeFurnace oil, HSD etc., which may result in the fire or explosion hazardwithin the plant. The relevant details of the chemicals along with therange of the consequences are given in Annexure-II.

7.7 OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLANType of emergency facilities/ actions required from outside bodies:

a) Firefighting facilities required: The plant will maintain its own firefighting facilities but during emergency, fire brigade may be called.

b) Police help required during emergency for evacuation of the people,traffic control security arrangements etc. shall be available.

c) Medical help required: seriously injured personnel may be referredto the Hospital/Primary Health Centre depending upon the gravityand type of injuries.

d) Humanitarian Arrangement: Transport, evacuation centers,emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid, ambulances,temporary mortuaries.

e) Voluntary Organizations: Details of organizers, telephone numbers,resources etc.

Shift In-Charge Operations Shift In-ChargeMechanical Maintenance

Shift In-ChargeElectrical & Instrumentation

Maintenance




C7 - 29


f) Public Information: Arrangements for Dealing with the mediapress office and informing relatives, etc.

List of Key persons of Off- Site Emergency Plan has been given inAnnexure-III.

7.8 EDUCATION OF PUBLICPeople living within the influence zone will be educated on theemergency in a suitable manner. This can be achieved only through theLocal and District Authorities. However, necessary information can beextended to the Authorities.

7.9 REHABILITATION AND RESETTLEMENTThe proposed project will be set up on the existing land area of around262.64 Hectares (649 acres). The land is generally flat and does notcome under flood zone. It is basically an Industrial land.

The Land is industrial in nature. No additional land is required for theproposed expansion project. As the land is already acquired, thequestion of rehabilitation and resettlement is not an issue for theproposed project.

7.10 PUBLIC CONSULTATIONAs advised, the Draft EIA/EMP Report was prepared, accommodating allthe components, based on finalized ToRs for its submission to WestBengal Pollution Control Board for the conduct of PublicHearing/Consultation.

Subsequently, the Public Hearing for Proposed expansion project wasconducted on 31st May, 2019 at Jamuria Nazrul Bhaban, Nandi Road,Jamuria, District Paschim Burdwan in West Bengal. The Public HearingProceeding and point-wise compliance to the issues, raised during thismeeting along with the action plan and budgetary provision has beenpresented as Annexure-7-IV(A) & Annexure-7-IV(B) respectively.

M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. (SSPL) fully understands andacknowledges that better education and health care facilities, roadinfrastructure and drinking water facilities are basic social amenities forbetter living standard of any human being. The above activities shall beinitiated either by providing or by improving the facilities in the area,




C7 - 30


which will help in uplifting the living standards of local communities.The company proposes to invest around Rs. 8.15 Crores on theCorporate Environment Responsibility (CER) activities, this fund shall beutilized over a period of 5 years, presented as Annexure-V.




C7 - 31


ANNEXURE - I

List of Key persons of on Site Emergency Plan

Sl. No. Emergency Co-ordinator

1 Executive Director

2 General Manager (Works)

3 General Manager (Maintenance & Projects)

4 General Manager/ Asstt. General Manager

(All individual Units)




C7 - 32


ANNEXURE–II

CHEMICAL DATA SHEET

The factory will have only fire hazardous chemicals as shown below:

Fire HazardousChemicals

Handling Storage Facility Nature ofHazardous

LSHS/Furnace Oil Pumpingsystemprovided

In the tank Fire hazard

HSD Storage Tanks Drums/Tanksegregated

Fire hazard

Likely occurrence of major accidents from:

a) Storage – Likely occurrence of major accidents could only be a fireand explosion.

b) Process – From Processes also likely occurrence of major accidentcould be fire. Since processes does not involve any toxic chemicalsand hence no chance of leakage of toxic gases.

c) Leakage / Splashing of liquid metal.

Physical range of consequences propagating:

a) From storage – Entire process plantb) From process – Localize to affected area




C7 - 33


ANNEXURE - III

List of Key persons of Off Site Emergency Plan

1. Collector of District2. Asst. Director I & II3. Fire Office4. Controller of Explosive5. District Informatics Officer6. Superintendent of Police7. District Health Officer8. Assistant Labour Commissioner9. SDO

ANNEXURE-7-IV(B)

POINT-WISE COMPLIANCE TO THE ISSUES RAISED DURING PUBLIC HEARINGALONG WITH ACTION PLAN AND BUDGETARY PROVISION

Issues raisedduring PH

Response ofprojectproponent

Time Bound Action Plan proposed Budgetary provision

Abatement ofpollution(Includingcontrol of dustpollution)

Necessary measuresconsidered for abatement ofpollution towards Air, Waterand Noise. Proper PollutionControl System will beinstalled.

Concreted road has beenconstructed and watersprinklers have been installedfor suppression of dust.

More water tanker will beengaged for dustsuppression.

Electrostatic Precipitators, Bag Filters, Cyclones, GasCleaning Plant, Fume Extraction System, Scrubber,etcwill be constructed along with the main plant unitsto control air pollution.

All conveyors transfer points shall be kept fullyenclosed. Dust extraction system shall be installed attransfer points.

Airborne dust from Material Handling shall be controlby sprinkling of water by fixed water sprinkler &mobile water tanker.

All internal roads shall be paved.Mechanical roadsweepers shall be put in place to clean the roads atregular intervals

Maintenance of air pollution control equipment shallbe done by following proper SOP and O&MSchedule. Sufficient spares shall be kept in thestores.

No waste water will be discharged outside the plantpremises. The plant is designed on ZLD concept.The entire wastewater will be recirculated andrecycled.

The equipment shall comply with the Statutory limit of85 dB(A) (at 1 m. from the source). Noise ReductionSystems will be arranged.

Above actions shall be taken during the constructionstage itself.

Capital Cost of Rs. 52.0 Croresand Recurring Cost of Rs.5.2Crores/ Annum areearmarked for Air PollutionControl.

Capital Cost of Rs. 10.5 Croresand Recurring cost of Rs.1.05Crores/Annum are allocated forwater conservation & PollutionControl.

Capital Cost of Rs. 10.0 Croresand Recurring cost of Rs.1.0Crores/Annum are allocated forNoise Reduction Systems.

ANNEXURE-7-IV(B)

Online monitoring system shall be installed in allmajor stacks. Continuous Ambient air qualitymonitoring system shall be installed. The results willbe checked daily and if any problem is seen, it will beaddressed immediately.

ANNEXURE-7-IV(B)

Generation ofemploymentopportunities tothe unemployedyouth of the localvillagers.

100% unskilled and semi-skilled labour will be engagedfrom nearby villages. Skilledlabour will be taken on merit.

Jute Handicraft classes,Sewing Classes, Computertraining classes are runningby the company to buildwomen self-help group.

Training Classes for makingJam, Jelly and Sauce atDhasna village will bearranged.

Since the areais industrially developed,unskilledand semi-skilled workforce is available innearby villges. Top priority for employmentopportunities will be given to the local people basedon their experience and qualification.

Besides, there will be a programme for the skilldevelopment to the unemployed local youth throughNational Skill Development Corporation, Govt. ofIndia Scheme.

Jute Handicraft classes, Sewing Classes, Computertraining classes have been arranged by thecompany to build women self-help group.

Training programme on making of Jam, Jelly &Sauce at Dhasna village will be arranged togenerate self-help employment opportunities.

Rs. 44 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER fortraining to unemployed localyouth for skill developmentthrough National SkillDevelopment Corporation,Govt. of India Scheme.

Rs. 36 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER fortraining programme to buildwomen self-help group.

Rs. 20 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER fortraining programme on makingof Jam, Jelly & Sauce atDhasna village to generateself-help employmentopportunities.

Tree plantationand greenerydevelopment inthe surroundingareas.

Green belt zones at nearbyvillages have already beenmade and more green beltzones on vested land will becreated with the involvementof local village committee.

5000 tree plantation will bedonein coming monsoon(2019) and 2000 saplings willbe distributed to the villagersand saplings will also bedistributed to the school.

Tree plantation and parks development programmein the nearby villages will be done and distributionof saplings will be done to the nearby villagers andschool student (2019 monsoon).

Tree plantation program will be continued year afteryear till the lifeof project.

Rs. 38 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER for thetree plantation & parkdevelopment programme anddistribution of saplings.

ANNEXURE-7-IV(B)

Measures for freeflow of water inSingaran River.

Reformation of the SingaranRiver will be done by clearingwater hyacinth and plasticwaste which are maindisturbances of the free flowof water.

Contractors have been engaged for clearing waterhyacinth and plastic wasteThe river channelclearing activity will be continued in 2020 to 2025.

Rs. 50 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forclearing of water hyacinth andplastic waste which are maindisturbances of the free flow ofwater.

Drinking waterfacilities for thevillagers.

Drinking water facilities will bedeveloped through CERprogramme which will bestrictly followed.

Drinking Water Infrastructure (Tubewell: 25 nos. @Rs. 1.0 Lakhs per tubewell) will be developed in thenearby villages.

Rs. 25 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER for thedevelopment of drinking waterfacilities.

Development ofponds in thevillages

Upgradation, cleaning &maintenance of local villageponds will be done.

Contractor have been engaged to clean one villagepond. The activity will be continued till 2025. Total15 village ponds has been identified for cleaning15nos. @ Rs. 2 Lakhs per pond).

Rs. 30 Lakhs have beenearmarked under the CER forthe upgradation, cleaning andmaintenance of local villageponds.

Ensuringavailability ofdoctors andarranging childspecialist at localhealth centre.

Bijaynagar health center willbe inaugurated shortly. Threedoctors will be engagedweekly (Gynecologist, ChildSpecialist and one GeneralPhysician).

Visiting of homeopathydoctors 4 days in Bijaynagarand one day in Dhasna, in aweek will be arranged.

Permanent Ambulance facility(24×7) will be provided by thecompany also.

The company will arrange three doctors(Gynecologist, Child Specialist and one GeneralPhysician) who will be engaged weekly atBijaynagar health center. This will be done fromAugust 2019

Permanent Ambulance facility for 24 hours will alsobe provided by the company. The ambulence willbe purchased in 2020-21.

Rs. 18 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forarrangement of three doctors(Gynecologist, Child Specialistand one General Physician) atBijaynagar health center.

Rs. 15 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forarrangement of homeopathydoctors in Bijaynagar andDhasna.

Rs. 30 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forproviding permanentambulance facility (24×7).

Construction ofsheds in nearbytwo primaryschools.

Sheds will be constructed inthe nearby primary schools

Contractors has been engaged to construct the shedin one school. Sheds in both schools will becompleted in this financial year itself.

(3 years)

Rs. 28 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER for theconstruction of sheds innearby two primary schools.

ANNEXURE-7-IV(B)

Improving healthservice at localhealth centre

Health Center of Chandipurwill be renovated afterconsultation with theauthorities.

Medicines, Sanitary napkinsand other aids will beprovided to local villagers.

Periodic health check-up programme is beingconducted at periodic intervals by arranging campsthrough Primary Health Care Centers in nearbyvillages.

The company will provide Sanitary napkins towomen for hygienic awareness.

The company will donate fund-money for therenovation of Chandipur Health Center afterconsultation with the villagers of Chandipur (2020-21).

Rs. 44 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forconducting health check-upprogramme in nearby villages.

Rs. 15 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forproviding sanitary napkins towomen for hygienicawareness.

Rs. 35 Lakhs have beenearmarked under CER forrenovation of ChandipurHealth Center.

ANNEXURE - V

Summary on

Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. has well established guideline for CorporateEnvironment Responsibility (CER) activities. The company has identified certainarea for imparting the CER activities in the context of local scenario of the areaand also considering the issues raised during public hearing. Three villagesnamely Dhasna, Bijaynagar & Ikrah within 5 km of area have been identifiedbased on their Socio-economic conditions & survey conducted and accordinglyemphasis will be given to certain areas that are being explored for ensuring theiroverall upliftment. The company proposes to invest Rs. 815 Lakhs (the totalproject cost Rs. 1661.02 Crores) on the CER activities, this fund shall be utilizedover a period of 5 years. The breakup of CER investment is as follows,

Sl.No.

PROPOSED CER ACTIVITIES

INVESTMENT (IN LACS) Total(in

Lakhs)Year1

Year2

Year3

Year4

Year5

A) PUBLIC HEARING RELATED ACTIVITIES

1.Skill development to unemployed local youththrough National Skill DevelopmentCorporation, Govt. of India Scheme

10 10 8 8 8 44

2.Development of self-help groups among localwomen.

8 8 8 6 6 36

3.

Development of self-help employmentopportunities at Dhasna Village by arrangingtraining programme on making Jam, Jelly andSauce.

5 5 5 5 - 20

4.Development of parks, plantation of trees in thenearby areas.

10 10 6 6 6 38

5.Reformation of the Singaran River by clearing ofwater hyacinth and plastic waste

20 10 10 5 5 50

6. Drinking Water Infrastructure facility at nearbyvillages (Tubewell: 25 nos. @ Rs. 1.0 Lakhs per

10 5 5 5 - 25

tubewell)

7.Upgradation, cleaning & maintenance of localvillage ponds (15 nos. @ Rs. 2 Lakhs per pond)

6 6 6 6 6 30

8.Construction of sheds in nearby two primaryschools.

10 10 8 - - 28

9.Health check-up programme in nearby villagesby arranging camps

12 8 8 8 8 44

10. Donation for renovation of Chandipur HealthCenter.

15 10 10 - - 35

11. Providing sanitary napkins to women forhygienic awareness.

3 3 3 3 3 15

12. Arrangement of three doctors (Gynecologist,Child Specialist and one General Physician) atBijaynagar health center.

18 - - - - 18

13. Providing permanent ambulance (2 nos.) facilityfor 24 hours.

12 12 2 2 2 30

14. Arrangement of homeopathy doctors inBijaynagar and Dhasna.

15 - - - - 15

15. Setting up of Football Coaching center andFootball Academy

10 5 3 3 3 24

16. Free coaching classes from Class VIII to Class XIIfor both English and Bengali medium students.

5 5 5 5 5 25

17. Free Spoken English and Short Hand TypingClasses.

5 5 5 5 5 25

18. Distribution of clothes to the nearby villagers toeconomically backward classes.

5 5 5 5 5 25

19. Supporting books and accessories to themeritorious students from nearby villages

5 5 5 5 5 25

20. Helping Ananda Ashram Charitable Trust atSatgram

6 6 5 - - 17

B) NEED BASED ACTIVITIES

21Construction of 12 Set Toilets at nearby villages(@ Rs. 3.00 Lakhs per set of 2 Toilets, separatelyfor Ladies & Gents)

9 9 9 9 - 36

22 Constructionand repairing of Metal Road (15 km)in villages (@Rs. 8 Lakhs per Km)

40 32 24 24 - 120

23 Development of Community Hall 10 5 - - - 15

24Financial Support to the Local School forextension of building / class room/ developmentof library facilities

10 8 7 - - 25

25Drainage Development - side drains &Construction of Culvert on drainage

15 10 10 - - 35

26Provide Dustbin in Village (under Swach BhartaScheme)

5 5 5 - - 15

Sub-Total 279 197 162 110 67 815

GRAND TOTAL




C8 - 1

Project Benefits Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-8.0PROJECT BENEFITS

Implementation of the proposed expansion project of M/s Shyam Sel &Power Ltd. (SSPL) at village: Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O: Bahadurpur,District: Burdwan in West Bengal will be a boon to the region and willgive various benefits to society of the region.

Such project is expected to improve living conditions by providing betteremployment opportunities and thereby result in further reduction ofpopulation below poverty line, which is one of the prime policy objectivesof the Government.

It is expected that by creation of good employment potential andindustrialization of this area, poor/weaker section of the society willenjoy higher earning power and quality of life.

The project is expected accelerate the infrastructure development in andaround the area, such as rail, road, transports and communicationfacilities.

Trading of equipment and materials such as plates, pipe fittings, valves,pumps, compressors, electrical machinery and construction materialsprovide employment and income to a large number of people.

Through the proposed project it is expected to improve hospitalityservices such as hotels/lodgings houses, restaurants, fast food joints,transport services, travel, shopping, communication facilities,hospitals/nursing homes as well as education facilities in the region.

The recommendations given by CPCB in the form of CorporateResponsibility for Environmental Protection for steel industry shall befully complied. This will result in lowest possible emissions, waterconservation and reuse of treated wastewater, solid waste utilization andresultant low cost of production.




C8 - 2

Project Benefits Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

Company will also contribute Rs. 8.15 Crores over a period of 5 yearstowards Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER). M/s Shyam Sel &Power Ltd. (SSPL) fully understands and acknowledges that bettereducation and health care facilities, road infrastructure and drinkingwater facilities are basic social amenities for better living standard of anyhuman being. The above activities shall be initiated either by providingor by improving the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting theliving standards of local communities.

The employment opportunities, both direct and indirect, that will arisefrom the proposed project are around 9000 persons will get employmenton daily average basis during the construction period. Around 7000persons will get direct employment in the project during the operationstage. Preference shall be given to local people depending upon their skilland qualification.

The project will create opportunities for indirect employment to personswho shall be employed for the greenery development work in and aroundthe plant site.

The project is expected to create large opportunities for indirectemployment as drivers, conductors and attendants of new trucks,passenger carrying vehicles, technicians in workshops and garagesbesides the plumbers, electricians and masons. The project will createopportunities for indirect employment due to increase in tradeopportunities like stockiest/ retailers of building materials, groceries,provision shops, medical stores, garment shops, furniture shops, etc.




C9 - 1

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-9.0ENVIRONMENTAL COST

BENEFIT ANALYSIS

The scope of the EIA/EMP has been prescribed vide the Terms of References

(TOR) issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide letter no. J-11011/887/2007-

IA.II(I) dated 1st November, 2018 (Refer Annexure-I).

As per S.O. 1533 dated 14th September 2006, this chapter is to be prepared

if prescribed at scoping stage.

The prescribed scope does not require environmental cost benefit analysis.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 1

Environmental Management Plan Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-10.0ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 INTRODUCTIONEnvironmental Management Plan is the key to ensure a safe and cleanenvironment. Various pollutants’ generation, their control & disposalfor the proposed projects have been discussed in Chapter-2.0. In thischapter, various management measures taken by M/s Shyam Sel &Power Ltd. (SSPL) to check, monitor and manage the performance ofvarious pollution control equipment and improvement of environmentis discussed.

10.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENTThe existing environmental management cell will be strengthened byadding qualified and experienced Engineers and Scientists. The Headof the EMD reports directly to the Plant Head.

STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 2


The environmental management cell performs the following functions:

Functions of Environmental Management Departmenta) Responsible operation related to collection, treatment and disposal

facilities for air emissions, waste water and solid wastes.b) Routine monitoring of relevant parameters to determine pollution

levels.c) Ecological monitoring and green belt maintenance.d) Implementation of environmental management plan.e) Data handling, reporting, liaison with statutory bodies and future

planning regarding environment management.

10.3 MITIGATORY MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTIONOn average 9000 manpower will be involved during the constructionphase of the proposed project. The impacts of the proposedconstruction phase on the environment would be basically of transientnature and are expected to wear out gradually on completion of theconstruction programme. However, once the construction of the unitsis completed and its operations started, these operation stage impactswould overlap the impacts due to the construction activities.

The impacts in different aspects of environment due to theconstruction programmes have been elucidated in Chapter-4.0. Inorder to mitigate such impacts and restrict them within tolerablelevels, the Authorities would adopt the following measures:

Traffic Safety Vehicle shall not exceed the speed limit of 10 km/hr inside the

plant premises. All vehicles shall be maintained. The contractor shall avoid traffic congestion and abide by the

traffic rules by deploying trained and licensed drivers. All vehicles shall have valid PUC

Fuel and Sanitation The project management shall take adequate steps to ensure

suitable sanitary facilities for the workers. These facilities includewater supply, sanitary toilets and waste treatment etc.

Contractors shall arrange for the supply of fuel to the constructionworkers so that the local trees are not felled to meet the fuelrequirement.

Handling & Storage of Hazardous Chemicals Hazardous chemicals/materials like oils, paints, and other

chemicals etc., which are hazardous in nature shall be stored asper stipulated HCM&H Rule 1989.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 3


Emission & Noise Control During construction, SSPL shall take adequate measures (e.g.

water spraying) to avoid dust emissions. SSPL shall ensure proper maintenance of the construction

equipment. Construction material/ the debris shall be transported with proper

cover to avoid the fugitive emissions of dust. The equipment shall comply with the Statutory limit of 85 dB(A)

(at 1 m. from the source).

Waste Collection & Disposal Waste has been categorized as: wood, metal, chemicals, paper,

plastic etc. The impact of waste shall be reduced through segregated collection. Besides, during mobilization, construction, demobilization and

commissioning of the project, the contractor shall minimize thewaste burden through proper material selection.

SSPL shall provide sufficient number of metal containers on-site tostore trash and debris resulting from their operations.

No waste, regardless of composition, shall be drained to sewers,trenches, ditches or channels.

Hazardous waste disposed off during the construction activitiesshall be registered in a Waste Log by the contractor. Waste shallbe stored in such a way that it is not accessible to unauthorizedpersons.

Waste handling shall be in compliance with applicable Legislation.

Personal Safety SSPL shall provide his workers with Personal Protective

Equipment (PPE) (e.g. Helmet, Goggles, Dust Mask, Ear Plug/ Muff,Hand Gloves etc.).

SSPL shall maintain First-aid Facility at the site & also anambulance for proper medical care of his workers.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 4


10.4 MITIGATORY MEASURES DURING OPERATION

10.4.1 Pollution Control Measures

Probable Pollution Sources Mitigation Measures

Sinter Plant:


Dust from Raw Material Handling Section

Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP) & Bag

Filters

Pellet Plant:


Dust from Raw Material Handling Section


Filters

Blast Furnace:

Dust and Fumes from Blast Furnace,

Laddles and Cast House and dust from

stock house

Dust Collectors, Gas Cleaning Plant,

Fume Extraction System and Bag

Filter

Sponge Iron Plant:

Dust and Fumes from DRI Kiln &


Section, Material transfer, Product

separation and loading point


Filters

Steel Melting Shop & DIP Unit:

Dust and Fumes from Furnaces Fume Extraction System and Bag

Filters

Rolling Mill:

Minor Fumes from Heating Furnace

(Direct charging of hot billet)

Skylight exhaust system

Cement Plant:

Dust from the Grinding Unit, Packing

Plant, Storage silos

ESP and Bag Filters

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 5


10.4.2 Control of Fugitive Emissions

For the purpose of effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions,following efforts will be made:

Storage area shall be clearly earmarked. Enclosure shall be provided for all the loading & unloading

operations, if possible. All transfer points shall be fully enclosed. Airborne dust shall be control by sprinkling of water. All roads shall be paved on which movement of raw materials or

products will take place. Preventive measures shall be employed to minimize dust build up on

road. Conveyors shall be provided with conveyor cover. Maintenance of air pollution control equipment shall be done

regularly. All the workers shall be provided with disposable dust mask. Green belt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions. Regular training shall be given to the personnel operating and

maintaining fugitive emissions control systems.

The fugitive emission will be monitored at following locations withinplant area as per CPCB guidelines. Details of such locations are givenbelow,

LOCATION OF FUGITIVE MONITORING

SR.NO.

AREA MONITORING LOCATION

1 Raw material handling area Transfer points2 Day bin area Feeder area, Mixing area,

Transfer points3 Product processing area Furnace area4 Other areas As per SPCB guidelines

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 6


10.4.3 Waste Water Management

The prevention and control of water pollution aim at conserving make-upwater by recycling the wastewater after treatment. The wastewater, likelyto be generated from the proposed plant is:

Underflow from Raw Water Clariflocculator Backwash Waste from Filtration Plant Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards Cooling Tower & Boiler Blow-down Canteen Effluents

Sludge from Raw Water Clariflocculator and Backwash from FiltrationPlant will be led to a thickener for removing suspended solids. Theoverflow from the thickener will be reused in the plant water system. TheSludge from the thickener will be dried and dumped.

Cooling Tower & Boiler Blow-down from various recirculation systemswill be cascaded for reuse in Ash Handling, gardening and dustsuppression as shown in water balance diagram.

Efforts will be made to harvest rainwater in the plant. Run-off water fromthe office areas, shop roofs will be collected and stored for future use.

The plant will be designed as a zero discharge plant as far as the processeffluents are concerned. The water will be recirculated through coolingand treatment. No plant effluent will be discharged outside the plantpremises. The entire waste water will be recycled for various purposesinside the plant.

Domestic effluent from the various buildings / sheds of the plant will beconveyed through separate drains to Sewage Treatment Plant (STP). Thetreated effluent from STP will be used in Gardening purpose.

Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)Sewage from the various building in the plant will be routed throughsewage treatment plant (STP) and treated waste water will be used forgreen belt development within the premises.

Sewage treatment plant (STP) based on SBR technology is proposed to beset-up in the proposed project. A well-designed sewer network will collectwastewater from different sections of the plant area. The sewer networkwill convey the wastewater into the proposed STP.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 7


10.4.4 Rain Water Harvesting PlanThe entire land of the plant area has to be leveled in such a way thatRain Water flows down to the RCC constructed Rain Water storagetank. Water will enter into the storage tank through filter bed. Filterbed will be made with different size of gravels and core sand. Thefiltrate water will be stored in the tank. The same water will be rinsedfor greenery purpose through water pump and motor. The residue ofthe filter bed will be removed manually from time to time.

75% run off may be allowed to be drained through natural drainagesystem. For its sustenance and remaining 25% may be harvested andstored suitably. Around 0.294 mcm (i.e 2,94,000 cu.m) of watertherefore can be conserved within the plant. Considering the averagedepth of 2.5 m in storage tanks, area for surface storage involvesaround 29 acres.

10.4.5 Storm Water ManagementThe effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaningof all drainage pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to seethat none of the drains are clogged due to accumulation ofsludge/sediments. The clogged drains will be cleaned as soon aspossible, preferably the same day. The catch-pits linked to the stormwater drainage system from the raw material handling areas will beregularly checked and cleaned to ensure their effectiveness. Thischecking and cleaning will be rigorous during the monsoon season,especially at the time of heavy rains forecast.

10.5 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT PLANThe potential value of vegetation in controlling air pollution has beenwell recognized. Trees can filter particulates and are effective pollutantsink. Vegetation also reduces noise level and regulates the oxygenbalance in the area by consuming released carbon dioxide. In order toimprove the aesthetic look of the area and enhance the land use aswell as to compensate for any loss in ecology during construction,adequate plantation programme around the project site have beenplanned and will be adopted. Development of green belt will includeplantation of trees along boundary of the factory, roads, raw materialyard and other available spaces. The plant species will be selected onthe basis of their growth and morphological characteristics (height,

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 8


crown and ornamental values) and factors like availability of localspecies, resistance to pollutants, location of sources, plant layout,meteorological conditions, water availability etc.

M/s SSPL has earmarked 87 Hectares (214 acres), out of total 262.64hectares (649 acres) of land for Green Belt Development. Greenbeltdevelopment has been done in a progressive manner. M/s SSPL iscommitted to plant 1,30,500 trees (@1500 trees per hectares). The treespecies selected for green belt is presented in Table-10.1.

Design of greenbeltGreen belt of 10-20 meter width, consisting of three tiers of treesspecies, around the project boundary has been considered by SSPL.Fast growing, strong, evergreen and pollution resistant trees has beenpreferred. The three tier plantation scheme comprising of:a. Outer ring of tall, thick canopy trees.b.Middle ring of less taller trees.c. Inner core layer of tolerant species.

Table-10.1Tree Species Recommended for Greenbelt Plantation

Sl. No. Scientific Name Local NameA. Tall trees

1 Azadirachta indica Neem2 Terminalia arjuna Arjun3 Ficus religiosa Pipal4 Mangifera indica Mango5 Tectona grandis Teak6 Albizia lebbeck Dirisana7 Pongamia pinnata Karanj8 Ficus religiose Ashwath9 Gmelina arborea Gummadi10 Samanea saman Nidrabhangi11 Syzygium cumini Neredu12 Terminalia catappa Badam

B. Medium dwarf trees16 Mimusops elengi Pogada17 Cassia fistula Rela18 Spathodea campanulata Flame of the forest19 Delonix regia Chitikesara20 Polyalthia longifolia Ashoka

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 9


10.6 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENTThe hazardous waste generation from the plant will be Used / SpentOil. Used oils removed from machineries, gear boxes, compressors etc.and sludge will be collected in drums and temporarily stored inspecifically earmarked areas. They will be disposed through theapproved agencies.

10.7 FIRE AND SAFETY MANAGEMENTFull-fledged fire fighting facilities will be provided in the plant to tackleany fire contingency. Regular safety audits will be carried out forimproving safety performance. Onsite and offsite DisasterManagement Plans shall be developed and mock drills will beconducted at regular intervals to keep the disaster management teamin a state of full preparedness.

10.8 ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS CAMPAIGNIn addition to training of employees in various aspects of pollutioncontrol activities of the plant, programmes like celebration of WorldEnvironment Day, World Safety Day, screening of films onenvironment, tree plantation etc. will be regularly carried out in orderto create greater awareness towards environment protection amongstemployees and the people in the neighbouring areas.

10.9 LEGAL AND STATUTORY COMPLIANCEAll the environmental standards/ stipulations will be fully maintainedby SSPL.

The plant will obtain yearly clearance from the State Pollution ControlBoard for liquid, gases & solid wastes disposal. Specific information inprescribed forms will be submitted as per Water (Prevention & Controlof Pollution) Act, Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act etc. It willbe supervised that all requirements under these Acts and Rules shallmeet. The engineer-in-charge for the Environmental Cell will preparethese reports with the help of the production engineers.

10.10 DOCUMENTATIONAll the monitoring data, environmental and health related shall bestored in systematic manner so that the specific records will be easilyavailable as required.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 10


10.11 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ACTIVITIES10.11.1 Introduction

The Occupational Health and Safety Management System exists inSSPL. In this, Management Health and Safety are taken intoconsideration. The purpose of the Occupational Health and SafetyManagement System is as follows:

Minimize risk to employees and others Improve business performance Assist the organization to establish a responsible image for heath

and safety.

10.11.2 ApproachThe basic approach of the occupational health and safety managementsystem involves the following steps:

Identify the hazards involvement in the activities of theorganization.

Evaluate the risks which are involved in the performance of theseactivities.

Control these risks to an acceptable level.

All contractor personnel and temporary staff will be compelled to usesafety equipment. Even the visitors will be advised to use helmet andsafety shoes during plant visit. The list of PPE is given in Table 10.2.

TABLE: 10.2PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS

Protectionfor Equipment Protection Against

Head

Safety helmetFall of objects/hitting againstobjects during construction,maintenance, etc.

Electrical resistancehelmet Electrical shock.

Welder’s leather cap Splashing of liquid etc.

Eye

Panorama goggles withclear plastic vision

Oil and paint splashes, dust andchips.

Spectacle-type goggleswith blue lens

High temperature flame duringfurnace work.

Ear Ear plugs or muffs High noise level.

Nose Dust, fume mask Oxygenmusk & Air musk Fine dust particles, fumes & gas

Face Welding helmet andshield

Welding fumes, sparks and UVrays.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 11


Body

Apron Falling of hot chips, slag’s, etc.

Safety belt Falling of persons from height.

Hand gloves Heat radiation.Electrical resistancegloves Electric shock.

Canvas gloves Contact with oil, grease, etc.

Leg Safety ShoeStriking by objects, fall of objectsand stepping on sharp or hotobjects.

10.11.3 Standards for the Occupational Health and Safety ManagementSystemAs per OHSAS 18001, the following specification is applicable to theorganization as given below: The establishment of an Occupational Health and Safety

Management System to eliminate risk to employees and otherinterested parties.

Implement, Maintain and continually improve the occupationalhealth and safety management system.

Assign itself of its conformance with its stated occupational healthand safety policy.

10.11.4 Core Elements of the Occupational Health and Safety Management

The basic core elements are:

Occupational Health and Safety Policy Planning Implementation and operation Checking and corrective action Management review

10.11.5 Occupational Health and Safety PolicyIt sets an overall direction of the system. It lays down the principlesinvolved as responsibilities, performance requirement, commitments,framework for setting objective and targets.

In SSPL, the hazards’ places shall be identified and the nameplateswill also be placed for the safety precaution to the relevantequipment.

All the operational parts of the various departments will beidentified and assessed.

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 12


In the operational area, the broad categories of hazards could bemechanical, electrical, substance fire and explosions, which will becarefully monitored.

10.11.6 Structure and ResponsibilitiesIn SSPL, the following structure and responsibilities will formoccupational health and safety management system.

All HOD of respective department will lay down the safety rules andsafety status of their work places and they will have the authorityto place the manpower accordingly.

The communication between the worker and management will beclear about the position of hazards situation.

The top management of the company provides resources such ashuman resources, technological resources and financial resourcesfor the implementation and control of the situation.

There is a quarterly evaluation of the improvement of the safetyand occupational health of the employees.

Safety officer monitors the compliance of safety rules.

10.11.7 Training AwarenessIn SSPL, the workers, selected by their departmental head, trainingwill be given. During training, the following topics will be discussed:

The occupational health and safety consequences of their activities. The emergency preparedness and response Importance of the occupational health and safety management

system. Training to be taken into account the responsibility, ability and

literacy of the person concerned and the nature and the extent ofrisk involved.

10.11.8 Audit of Occupational Health and Safety ManagementIn SSPL, there will be a periodic internal audit, the main elements ofwhich are given below:

The planned arrangement and implemented system conforms to thespecification.

The Occupational Health and Safety Management system has beenproperly implemented and maintained.

The audit status is provided to top management. There must be external auditor to evaluate the present status of

monitoring.

10.11.9 Management ReviewIn SSPL, there will be continuing suitability adequacy andeffectiveness of the established Occupational Health and Safety

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 13


Management System. The necessary information about the system willbe collected and reviewed.

During First-Aid training programme, classes on occupational health& hygiene will be held for the officers & staff. All employees will beexposed to this training.

10.12 INFORMATION DISSEMINATIONEverybody now a day is concerned about environmental pollution. Asteel plant is therefore susceptible to people as a source of localpollution. It is, therefore, needed that people should be provided withenvironmental data related to the plant so that wrong apprehensionscan be removed. This requires a well-planned public relation andinformation dissemination process so that unnecessary publicintervention is avoided. In this connection, the Company will organizedifferent programmes with participation from local bodies,encouraging local community in environmental projects (like treeplantation) etc.

10.13 ENVIRONMENTAL BUDGETThe project cost for the proposed expansion project of M/s Shyam Sel& Power Ltd. is Rs. 1661.02 Crores. The capital cost of environmentalmitigation measures is estimated to be Rs. 116 Crores, which includes:

Item Cost(in Crores)

Cost of Air Pollution Control Systems 52.0Cost of Water conservation & Pollution Control 10.5Cost of Solid/hazardous Waste Management System 9.5Green belt development 10.5Noise Reduction Systems 10.0Occupational Health Management 9.0Risk Mitigation & Safety Plan 10.5Environmental Management Department 4.0

GRAND TOTAL 116.0

The estimated annual cost of environmental mitigation measures forthe proposed project has been estimated to be Rs. 11.6 Crores (@10%of capital cost). The annual recurring costs includes:

Item Cost(in Lakhs)

Air Pollution Control Systems 5.2Water conservation & Pollution Control 1.05Solid/hazardous Waste Management System 0.95

ShyamSel& PowerLtd.



C10 - 14


Green belt development 1.05Noise Reduction Systems 1.0Occupational Health Management 0.9Risk Mitigation & Safety Plan 1.05Environmental Management Department 0.4

GRAND TOTAL 11.6




C11 - 1

Summary & Conclusion Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd.

CHAPTER-11.0SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

11.1 INTRODUCTIONM/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd. (SSPL), a Limited Company, wasincorporated on 5th September, 1991, having its registered office at S.S.Chamber, 5, C.R Avenue, Kolkata in West Bengal.

M/s SSPL is presently operating a steel plant at Village Dhasna, P.S.Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, District Burdwan in West Bengal. Now thecompany has decided to take up the expansion programme of the existingIntegrated Steel plant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPA Coke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89 MTPAsponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hot metal/pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPAlong steel products, 0.1 MTPA DI pipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit,0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MW captive power plant within the sameplant premises. The existing as well as proposed units with rated capacityper annum are presented in Table-11.1.

TABLE-11.1OVERALL PROJECT SCENARIO

Sl.No.



per EC)

Capacity ofProposed

Expansion Unit



2 Iron OrePellets



to 0.6 MTPA



- 0.6 MTPA(1x450 m3)

0.6 MTPA(600000 TPA)

4 SpongeIron


2 x 100 TPD3 x 300 TPD2 x 90 TPD

(0.4248 MTPA)

4 x 350 TPD(0.462 MTPA)

0.89 MTPA(890000 TPA)


3x9 MVA2x4.5 MVA(0.1 MTPA)

- 0.1 MTPA(100000 TPA)


Steel MeltingShop (SMS)(Induction

7x18 T2x15 T4x5 T

5 x 18 T8 x 8 T

(0.5082 MTPA)

1.11 MTPA(1110000 TPA)




C11 - 2


Sl.No.



per EC)

Capacity ofProposed

Expansion Unit


Furnace route) (0.6066 MTPA)


-1 x 45 T

(0.4 MTPA) 0.4 MTPA(400000 TPA)

Total Steel Billets/Ingots from SMS 1.51 MTPA(1510000 TPA)

7

RolledProducts&Structural(angle,channel,Joist, etc)


to 0.15 MTPA

1 MTPA(1000000 TPA)







(100000 TPA)





(1200000 TPA)

12 ProducerGas

Producer GasPlant -

36,000Nm3/Hour

36000Nm3/Hour

The major raw material, which will be handled, consists of Iron Ore, Coal,dolomite, Limestone, Manganese Ore, Quartzite etc. The annualrequirement of major raw materials, which will be required for theproposed project is presented in the material balance diagram aspresented below. Raw materials will be received at plant site by rail/road.All the trucks for raw material and finished product transportation shallcomply with the applicable environmental norms.




C11 - 3


FIGURE-11.1: OVERALL MATERIAL BALANCE DIAGRAM OF STEEL PLANT




C11 - 4


FIGURE-11.2 : OVERALL MATERIAL BALANCE DIAGRAMOF CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

M/s Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd. have conducted an Environmental ImpactAssessment (EIA) for the proposed expansion Project and formulated anappropriate Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for such proposedproject.

11.2 SITE LOCATIONThe project site is located at Village Dhasna, P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S.Jamuria, District Burdwan, West Bengal. Its geographical co-ordinatesare Latitude 23°40'38.51"N to 23°41'49.87"N and Longitude87°06'57.27"E to 87°07'35.84"E with above mean sea level as 350 feet or106.68 meters.

The National Highway-2 is passing about 6.0 km distance with respect tothe project site. National Highway-60 is passing about 2.6 km distancewith respect to the project site. The nearest Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport,Andal is about 20 km from the project site. Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose




C11 - 5


International (NSCBI) Airport, Kolkata, is about 178 km from the projectsite. Kolkata metrocity is located at a distance of about 178 km from theproject site.

The nearest distance of Damodar River in the South-west direction isabout 11.0 km and Ajay river is about 7.0 km in North-eastern side w.r.tthe project site. Important Towns like Raniganj Town is about 9.0 km,Asansol Town is about 14.0 km, Durgapur Town is about 29.0 km w.r.t.the project site.

Project Site: Village Dhasna, P.O. Bahadurpur, P.S. Jamuria, District PaschimBurdwan, West Bengal.

Project Site Co-ordinates: Latitude 23°40’38.51"N to 23°41‘49.87"N andLongitude 87°06‘57.27"E to 87°07‘35.84"E with Mean Sea Level 350 feet or

106.68 meters

FIGURE-11.3: PROJECT SITE ON GOOGLE MAP




C11 - 6


11.3 PROJECT HIGHLIGHTSThe principal features or highlights of the proposed expansion of existingsteel plant of M/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd., under study are as follows:

PROPOSED PROJECT HIGHLIGHTSLandrequirement

No additional land is required for the expansion units. Allnew units shall be accommodated within available 262.64Hectares land (649 acres) within the existing plantboundary. Land is already in possession of the Company.

Raw waterrequirement& source

Total 12,500 m3/day (Existing- 6526 m3/day & Proposed-5867 m3/day).

Source: Ajay River and Supplied by Asansol DurgapurDevelopment Authority (ADDA).

Powerrequirement

Total 232 MWSource: 136 MW from CPP and balance from state grid.

Effluentgeneration &disposal

The plant will be designed as a zero discharge plant. Thewater will be recirculated through cooling and treatment.The entire waste water will be recycled for various purposesinside the plant.

Domestic waste water will be treated in Septic tank - Soakpit system.

Air pollutioncontrol

Electrostatic Precipitators, Bag Filters, Cyclones, GasCleaning Plant, Fume Extraction System, Scrubber and TallStacks will be installed to control air pollution within theprescribed discharge standards.

Solid WasteManagement

Blast Furnace Slag will be used in the proposed CementPlant / sold to other cement plants for making cement.

It will be used for road making / land filling purposesafter recovering the iron.

Dolochar will be used as fuel in FBC Boilers. Dust as collected from APC devices will be recycled /

used for road making / used for land filling purposes. Coal tar from Producer gas plant will be sold Solid wastes from Billet Caster and rolling mill (end cuts

and miss rolls) will be used in Induction Furnaces.Manpower Additional 7000 (Direct and indirect)Project cost Rs. 1661.02 Crores

11.4 BASELINE ENVIRONMNETAL SCENARIOThe area falling within the radius of 10 km around the proposedexpansion project at village: Dhasna, P.S: Jamuria, P.O: Bahadurpur,District: Burdwan in West Bengal has been considered as study area.




C11 - 7


On-site environmental quality monitoring was carried out from 1st

October, 2018 - 31st December, 2018.

11.4.1 MeteorologyThe monthly maximum and minimum temperatures recorded on-siteduring the aforesaid monitoring period varied between (26.5 – 32.5)°Cand (8.5 – 20.0)°C respectively with overall maximum and minimumtemperatures being 32.5°C and 8.5°C respectively.

The monthly minimum and maximum relative humidity recorded on-siteduring the said monitoring period varied between (48-56)% and (73-80)%respectively, the overall minimum and maximum being 48% & 80%respectively.

During the said monitoring period, the monthly mean wind speedmeasured on-site varied between 3.46 km/hr to 4.54 km/hr. The overallmean wind speed during the period was 3.93 km/hr.

11.4.2 Ambient Air QualityAmbient air quality was monitored at eight (8) locations in and aroundthe project site.

The overall mean values of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2, O3, Pb and CO in thearea (mean of all the 8 locations) were 80.5 g/m3, 33.9 g/m3, 12.7g/m3, 25.7 g/m3, 17.2 g/m3, 0.11 g/m3 and 0.709 mg/m3 respectively.

11.4.3 Water QualityWater samples were collected and analyzed at eight (8) locations to assessthe surface water quality in the study area. Water samples were collectedfrom eight (8) locations to assess the baseline status of the ground waterquality of the study area.

pH values of the collected two samples from river Ajay were found to be6.8 and 7.0. The values of Dissolved Oxygen were observed 6.8 mg/l and6.9 mg/l. Values of Total Dissolved Solids were found 172 mg/l and 165mg/l while values of total Hardness were found 120 mg/l and 104 mg/l.Values of Calcium were found to be 38 mg/l and 30 mg/l while values ofMagnesium were found to be 6 mg/l and 7 mg/l. Sulphate, Nitrate andChloride were observed to be 6 mg/l & 5 mg/l, 2.2 mg/l & 2.2 mg/l and30 mg/l & 34 mg/l. The Iron contents from these two samples were foundto be 0.18 mg/l and 0.14 mg/l respectively.




C11 - 8


The pH value from the collected pond water samples was found in therange of (6.7 - 7.4). Dissolved Oxygen was observed in the range of (5.7 -6.4) mg/lit. Total Dissolved Solids were found in the range of (212 – 286)mg/lit while Total Hardness was found in the range of (137 – 196) mg/lit.Chloride, Calcium & Magnesium were found from these six pond watersamples varying in the ranges of (50 – 72) mg/lit, (40 – 52) mg/lit and(9 – 16) mg/lit respectively.

Conclusion can be drawn in the light of the overall analysis made so farthat the surface water in the study area is free of any kind of industrialand urban pollution and has been found to be generally fit for humanconsumption.

11.4.4 NoiseA total of 10 locations around the proposed project were selected for themeasurement of ambient noise levels.

During the day time, the equivalent noise levels were found to vary in therange of (56.4 - 68.6) dB(A) while in the night time, the equivalent noiselevels were observed to vary in the range of (45.9 – 59.0) dB(A).

11.4.5 EcologyThe study area is found to have a good vegetation cover due to helpfulclimatic conditions and good soil quality in the area. There are goodnumber of plantation patches in the study area and dense vegetationcover around settlement areas.

There is extensive grazing land, which come under cultivation. Theoverall floral composition in the whole study area is quite rich.

11.4.6 Demography and Socio-economyThe study area comprises of 61 villages and 4 Municipal areas i.e. rural-urban mixed in nature. The study area is populated with the totalpopulation of 4,32,229 (as per 2011 Census). Scheduled Caste (SC) andScheduled Tribe (ST) population is about 23.37% and 6.73% of the totalpopulation respectively. The sex ratio is about 919 females per 1000males. The overall literacy rate is about 64.4%. Male literacy rate is71.5% (w.r.t. the total male population) and female literacy rate is 56.7%(w.r.t. the total female population). The principal staple food is rice.




C11 - 9


11.5 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF PROPOSED PROJECTS

11.5.1 Impacts on Air QualityThe Stack emissions from the plant are mostly Sulphur Dioxide (SO2),Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Particulate matters (PM). In the proposedproject total 19 stacks will be attached with the corresponding units forcontinuous emission.

As recommended by CPCB, GLCs at various receptor locations within 10km radius have been computed for the three months’ period (1st October,2018 - 31st December, 2018) representing the study period, based on thehourly meteorological data of this period. The computation has beenmade applying Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) model, developed byUnited States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), which is mostwidely used and also recommended by CPCB (PROBES/70/1997-98).

The predicted maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx & PM are presented below,

PREDICTED IMPACTS ON BASELINE AIR QUALITY

Pollutants MGLC(g/m3)

Distance(Km)

Direction BaselineMax (g/m3)

2 + 5(g/m3)

NAAQS24-h avg

1 2 3 4 5 6 7SO2 5.2 0.8 SE 24 29.2 80 g/m3

NOx 3.0 0.5 SE 43 46 80 g/m3

PM2.5 8.0 0.8 SE 50 58 60 g/m3

The ambient air quality of the area w.r.t SO2, NOx and PM2.5 will remainwithin the prescribed NAAQS after the proposed expansion unitsbecomes operational.

11.5.2 Impacts on Water QualitySSPL will follow “the zero waste water discharge concept” and the entirewaste water will be recycled to the plant for various uses. As no wastewater will be discharged into any outside water body, there will be noimpact on the water quality of any surface water bodies of the area.

11.5.3 Impacts on SoilThere will be solid waste generation, but will be managed in the propermanner. This will ensure that there will not be any impact on soil qualitydue to the disposal or deposition of solid waste.




C11 -10


11.5.4 Impacts on Land UseThe proposed development will be confined within the boundary of theallocated land only, earmarked for the industrial purpose, so there willnot be any significant impact on the land use pattern of the area.

11.5.5 Impacts on Biological EnvironmentThe surrounding area has substantial vegetation in the form of villageorchards, roadside trees and agriculture. If the gaseous emission iscontrolled properly, there will not be significant impact. There will besufficient plantation of trees at the plant site. All these measures, ifimplemented properly will ensure insignificant impact on the localvegetation from the proposed project and may improve the vegetationscenario of the area.

No waste water will be discharged outside the plant premises. There is,therefore, no impact on the aquatic ecology of the water bodies.

11.5.6 Impacts on Socio-Economic EnvironmentThe project will offer substantial employment potential duringconstruction phase and operation phase, which will have beneficialimpact.

11.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANM/s Shyam Sel & Power Ltd., will develop various management activitiesfor the Environmental Management Programme which will meet allstatutory requirements and help to improve environmental quality.

In order to improve the aesthetic look of the area and enhance the landuse as well as to compensate for any loss in ecology during construction,adequate plantation programmes around the project site have beenplanned and will be adopted. Development of green belt will includeplantation of trees along boundary of the factory, roads, raw materialyard and other available spaces. 33% of total area of factory has beenearmarked for green belt development.

A detailed monitoring for different environmental parameters will becarried out as per direction of State Pollution Control Board. Anenvironmental management group will be established to implement themanagement plan.




C11 -11


11.7 OVERALL CONCLUSION OF THE PROJECTAll the impacts likely to have an effect on the environment have beenidentified and efficient / adequate mitigation measures have beenproposed for Sustainable Environment.

Considering the probability of likely impacts, the proponent has plannedadequate mitigation measures and Environmental Management Plan.Further, the proponent has been undertaking various CER activitieswhich have beneficial impacts on the socioeconomic environment.Measures like rainwater harvesting, energy conservation and greenbeltdevelopment are also commendable for mention. Looking to the overallproject scenario, employment potential and allied development plans willbe a great impetus to the development of the society and the economy.

The best environment savvy technology including all safety aspects shallbe adopted in the proposed expansion project. All the above safe guardsand the respective mitigation measures shall ensure sustainableenvironment.




C12 - 1

Disclosure of Consultant Engaged Envirotech East Pvt. Limited

CHAPTER-12.0DISCLOSURE OF

CONSULTANT ENGAGED

Brief Profile of M/s Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd.

M/s Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata has acquired the status of one of thePrime organizations of the country in undertaking various assignments in theareas like Environmental Impact Assessment, Environment Management Plan,Risk Analysis, Detailed Project Report, Environmental Audit / Statement, Geo-Technical Statement etc., since it was formed in 1988 by Prof. G. D. Agarwal,former Dean, IIT Kanpur and Member Secretary, Central Pollution ControlBoard.

The company owes in its name a list of eminent & well-qualified experts toexecute various assignments with the desired degree of perfection. Themanpower, engaged for EIA study for Proposed expansion of Integrated SteelPlant for ultimate production of 1.8 MTPA pellets, 0.85 MTPA Sinter, 0.3 MTPACoke, 36000 Nm3/hour producer gas, 0.89 MTPA sponge iron, 0.6 MTPA hotmetal / pig iron, 1.51 MTPA billets, 1.0 MTPA long steel products, 0.1 MTPA DIpipe, 1.2 MTPA cement grinding unit, 0.1 MTPA Ferro Alloys and 136 MWcaptive power plant at Village Dhasna, Jamuria, P.O. Bahadurpur, DistrictPaschim Burdwan in West Bengal is given in Table-12.1. Since its inception,the company has been endeavoring for continual improvement in its system forwhich it has been accredited with ISO 9001: 2000 & ISO 14001:2004certifications. The Company had obtained NABET accredition under QCI-NABET Scheme in the month of May, 2011 vide certificate no.NABET/EIA/1011/010.

The company has a well-equipped laboratory, which is recognized by WestBengal Pollution Control Board and Ministry of Environment, Forest & ClimateChange, Govt. of India.




C12 - 2


TABLE-12.1MANPOWER ENGAGED FOR EIA STUDY FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF

INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT AT VILLAGE DHASNA, JAMURIA, P.O. BAHADURPUR,DISTRICT PASCHIM BURDWAN, WEST BENGAL

Discipline Name of Expert Key Qualificationsindicating area of

specialization relevantto the respective

discipline

Signature

EIA Coordinator:Mr. T Kundu

Mr. Goutam Majumder

Bachelor of Technology(Chemical Engineering)

Bachelor of Engineering(Civil)

Functional Area Experts involved:Air Pollution Mr. T. Kundu Bachelor of Technology

(Chemical Engineering)

Meteorology Mr. T. Kundu Bachelor of Technology(Chemical Engineering)

Water PollutionControl

Mr. AsokeKumar Banerjee

M.Sc. (Chem.)

Geology Dr. AbhijitChakraborty

Ph.D in Geology

Hydrology

Ecology &Bio-diversity

Dr. (Mrs.)Anupam Sinha

Ph.D in Biology Sc.

Noise &Vibration

Mr. R. K.Dasgupta

Bachelor of Engineering(Mechanical)




C12 - 3


TABLE-12.1 (CONTD…)MANPOWER ENGAGED FOR EIA STUDY FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF

INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT AT VILLAGE DHASNA, JAMURIA, P.O. BAHADURPUR,DISTRICT PASCHIM BURDWAN, WEST BENGAL

Land Use Dr. SunandoBandyopadhyay

Ph. D in Geography

Solid &HazardousWaste


M.Sc. (Chem.)

SoilConservation


M.Sc. (Chem.)

Risk & Hazard Mr. T. Kundu Bachelor of Technology(Chemical Engineering)

Socio-economics Prof. PabitraSengupta

M.Sc. (Economics)

Scheme for Accreditation of EIA Consultant Organizations

List of Accredited Consultant Organizations (Alphabetically) Rev. 76, May 06, 2019 Page 56

S. No. Consultant Organization

Scope of Accreditation

As per NABET Scheme Project or Activity as per Schedule of MoEFCC Notification dated September 14, 2006 and subsequent Amendments

Sector Number

Name of Sector Category

Tel.: 9843052103 Conditions apply

55

Envirotech East Pvt. Ltd. Address: Bengal Ambuja Coml. Complex, UN-F-13, 1050/1, Survey Park, Kolkata -700075

e. mail: [email protected]

[email protected] Tel. : 033-24188127/ 24188128 09331026867 Conditions apply

4 Thermal power plants A 1 (d)

7 Mineral beneficiation including pelletisation

A 2 (b)

8 Metallurgical industries ( ferrous & nonferrous) - both primary & secondary

A 3(a)

9 Cement plants A 3 (b)

10 Petroleum refining industry A 4 (a)

11 Coke oven plants A 4 (b)

20

Petrochemical based processing (processes other than cracking & reformation and not covered under the complexes)

A 5 (e)

21

Synthetic organic chemicals industry (dyes & dye intermediates; bulk drugs and intermediates excluding drug formulations; synthetic rubbers; basic organic chemicals, other synthetic organic chemicals and

B 5 (f)



Scheme for Accreditation of EIA Consultant Organizations

List of Accredited Consultant Organizations (Alphabetically) Rev. 76, May 06, 2019 Page 57

S. No. Consultant Organization

Scope of Accreditation

As per NABET Scheme Project or Activity as per Schedule of MoEFCC Notification dated September 14, 2006 and subsequent Amendments

Sector Number

Name of Sector Category

chemical intermediates)

22 Distilleries A 5 (g)

24

Pulp & paper industry excluding manufacturing of paper from waste paper and manufacture of paper from ready pulp without bleaching

A 5 (i)

33 Ports, harbours, break waters and dredging

A 7 (e)

38 Building and Construction Projects

B 8 (a)

39 Townships and Area development Projects

A 8 (b)

56

Environment Protection & Training Research Institute Address: Sy. No. 91/4, Gachibowli, Hyderabad - 500032 E-mail: [email protected]; [email protected] Tel.: 040 – 23005628 09701420086 Conditions apply

1 Mining of minerals including Open cast/ Underground mining

A 1 (a) (i)

3 River Valley projects A 1 (c )

31

Industrial estates/ parks/ complexes/ Areas, export processing zones(EPZs), Special economic zones (SEZs), Biotech parks, Leather complexes

A 7 (c)

37 Common municipal solid waste B 7 (i)



SHYAM SEL AND POWER...

Documents

Transcript of SHYAM SEL AND POWER...